Home

D-Link DGS-3700 User's Manual

1. Frames Rx Frames Tx Figure 7 25 Authenticator Session Statistics window for Port based 802 1X 238 The user may select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Pon Tmetcenaton ruber assigned 1o e Port by tne System ni the Por resides octets x The number of octets ets in user tramos on por ing the session Frames x The number of user dara trames recetado is por ing the sesion A unique identifier for the session in the form of a printable ASCII string of at least three characters Authentic Method The authentication method used to establish the session Valid Authentic Methods include 1 Remote Authentication Server The Authentication Server is external to the Authenticator s system 2 Local Authentication Server The Authentication Server is located within the Authenticator s System Time The duration of the session in seconds Terminate Cause The reason for the session termination There are eight possible reasons for termination 1 Supplicant Logoff 2 Port Failure Supplicant Restart Reauthentication Failure AuthControlledPortControl set to ForceUnauthorized Port re initialization Port Administratively Disabled 8 Not Terminated Yet UserName The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant PAE
2. cccssecceeeceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeseeaaaeeeeeesssauaaaeeeeeesssaeseeeenes 155 Understanding 802 1X Port based and Host based Network Access ContrOl ccooooonnccccncccccnnoccccnnnnnnnnnnncncnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnononnnnos 158 Por Based Networ ACCESS MONTO rita dos 158 Fosi Based Network Access Son tol 159 802 TA AAA e ne eee ee ee eee eee 160 3021 ROMS CUINA alge Getta te on whee oeaatte a Seaseveade act sac E 160 PAIS Gelatin rere eee ee O cer eet om ne eee ee ce aon eee eee A O A eee eae 162 Authentication RADIUS Sever ns idiis 162 o A T E iui pi pteteniunn A E E AA 163 Fe AUCH WG Ale POS zinapo e eA A A NE 163 Guest VLAN Gon gula altas 164 A cian tian a deaalaces r ane iasecuaaeandececddiacae ance seesaitntsenadecce 165 SL SUING oa dita a A ina detet nance rani eeacetonaeareenye need mmemnantenotae 165 Download CGerilicaten a e do e tested asia 166 A 166 o o A 168 A Met erg E Ero ene eee Re eer eee eee 168 vil SSH A thmod and Algorithm SetliNgS is iia 169 SoH User Authentication o a a a e a een eer ee 170 Access Authentication Control ccccccccccceccccessessseceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeasaeeeeeeeeseaeaaaeeeeeeeeseaaaaaeeeeseeeeessaaaaees 171 A ilhenicalon POlICy oo 173 Application Authentication o cuinds apreni od 173 Authentication Se ver GOUD eras ects cece ati sso aed Pataca tate este Genel acne setae maser sheds amen cede eee eae 174 A thenticaton Se ves a a a Red etalk o ds cs
3. Parameter Description Range Name Enter a name of no more than 32 alphanumeric characters that will be used to identify this time range on the Switch This range name will be used in the Access Profile table to identify the access profile and associated rule to be enabled during this time range This parameter is used to set the time in the day that this time range is to be enabled using the following parameters e Start Time Use this parameter to identify the starting time of the time range in hours minutes and seconds based on the 24 hour time system End Time Use this parameter to identify the ending time of the time range in hours minutes and seconds based on the 24 hour time system Weekdays Use the check boxes to select the corresponding days of the week that this time range is to be enabled Tick the Select All Days check box to configure this time range for every day of the week Click Apply to implement changes made Currently configured entries will be displayed in the Time Range Information table in the bottom half of the window shown above 47 sFlow The sFlow folder contains four windows to enable and configure the sFlow settings on the Switch sFlow Global State Settings This table is used to enable or disable the sFlow Global State Settings on the Switch The sFlow version address and state configurations can also be viewed in this table To view this window click Configuration gt sFlow gt sFlow
4. AU la e ph E a a mp Protocol TACACS vw Timeout 1 255 Key Max 254 characters fo Retransmit 1 255 Total Entries 0 IP Address Protocol Timeout py Retransmit Figure 5 39 Authentication Server Settings window Configure the following parameters to add an Authentication Server Host Parameter Description 175 IP Address The IP address of the remote server host the user wishes to add Port 1 65535 Enter a number between 1 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security Protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol XTACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol RADIUS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol Timeout 1 255 Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds Key Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS servers only Specify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters Retransmit 1 255 Enter the value in the r
5. Authentication Server The Authentication Server is a remote device that is connected to the same network as the Client and Authenticator must be running a RADIUS Server program and must be configured properly on the Authenticator Switch Clients 155 connected to a port on the Switch must be authenticated by the Authentication Server RADIUS before attaining any services offered by the Switch on the LAN The role of the Authentication Server is to certify the identity of the Client attempting to access the network by exchanging secure information between the RADIUS server and the Client through EAPOL packets and in turn informs the Switch whether or not the Client is granted access to the LAN and or switches services Authentication Server Ws Switch Figure 5 16 The Authentication Server Authenticator The Authenticator the Switch is an intermediary between the Authentication Server and the Client The Authenticator serves two purposes when utilizing the 802 1X function The first purpose is to request certification information from the Client through EAPOL packets which is the only information allowed to pass through the Authenticator before access is granted to the Client The second purpose of the Authenticator is to verify the information gathered from the Client with the Authentication Server and to then relay that information back to the Client Three steps must be implemented on the Switch to properly confi
6. This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use the publickey on a SSH server for authentication Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE To set the SSH User Authentication parameters on the Switch a User Account must be previously configured For more information on configuring local User Accounts on l the Switch see the User Accounts section of this manual located in the Configuration g section E Access Authentication Control The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS commands allow users to secure access to the Switch using the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS protocols When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege he or she is prompted for a password If TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch it will contact a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify the user If the user is verified he or she is granted access to the Switch There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol each a separate entity The Switch s software supports the following versions of TACACS TACACS Terminal
7. 10 10 10 3 10 10 10 1 o e 00 20 5 01 44 44 lam 10 10 10 2 00 20 6C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Target Figure 3 260 When PC B replies to the ARP request its MAC address will be written into Target H W Address in the ARP payload shown in Table 3 The ARP reply will be then encapsulated into the Ethernet frame again and sent back to the sender The ARP reply is in a form of Unicast communication H W Protocol Protocol Operation Sender Sender Target Target type type address address H W address protocol pw address protocol length address address Table 3 ARP Payload When PC B replies the query the Destination Address in the Ethernet frame will be changed to PC A s MAC address The Source Address will be changed to PC B s MAC address see Table 4 00 20 5C 01 11 11 00 20 5C 01 22 22 Table 4 Ethernet frame format The switch will also examine the Source Address of the Ethernet frame and find that the address is not in the Forwarding Table The switch will learn PC B s MAC and update its Forwarding Table Forwarding Table Porti 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Port2 00 20 5C 01 22 22 261 How ARP spoofing attacks a network ARP spoofing also known as ARP poisoning is a method to attack an Ethernet network which may allow an attacker to sniff data frames on a LAN modify the traffic or stop the traffic altogether known as a Denial of Service DoS attack
8. 151 A Port Security Trap Log Settings Disabled Enabled Port Security System Settings System Max Learning Address 1 16384 Mo Limit From Port To Part Admin State Lock Address Mode Max Learning Address 0 16304 Port Security Port Table Admin State Lock Address Mode Max Learning Address Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset ee ee ee ee _L ee Figure 5 9 Port Security Port Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port This pull down menu allows you to enable or disable Port Security locked MAC address table for the selected ports Lock Address This pull down menu allows you to select how the MAC address table locking will be Mode implemented on the Switch for the selected group of ports The options are Permanent The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnTimeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnReset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset Max Learning The number of MAC addresses that will be in the MAC address forwarding table for the
9. Total Entries 1 Fort Subtype Address IF Type 10 24 73 21 Unknown 136 1 4 1 171 101 Figure 3 75 LLDP Local Port Information Show Detail window To return to the LLDP Local Port Information window click the lt lt Back button LLDP Remote Port Information This window displays port information learned from the neighbor The switch receives packets from a remote station but is able to store the information as local To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Remote Port Information as shown below LLDP Remote Port Brief Table Remote Entities Count 0 Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID PortiD Subtype Port iD Port Description Figure 3 76 LLDP Remote Port Information window Select the port you wish to view by using the drop down menu and click Find the information will be displayed in the lower half of the table To view the settings for an individual port select the port and click Show Normal which will display the following window LLDP Remote Entity Information Table Total Entries 0 Information Figure 3 77 LLDP Remote Port Information Show Normal window CFM Connectivity Fault Management CFM is defined by IEEE 802 1ag which is a standard for detecting isolating and reporting connectivity faults in a network CFM is an end to end per service instance Ethernet layer operation administration and management OAM function CFM functions include path discovery fault detection and
10. WNeb based ACCESS LO State Disabled Method Logout Timer 1 1440 min C infinite Port Settings From Port State Disabled Force Disconnection Port fe g 1 5 10 User Mame Auth State Assigned vlan Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 5 46 Web based Access Control Settings To set the Web based Access Control for the Switch complete the following fields Parameter Description Toggle the State field to either Enable or Disable for the Web based Access Control settings of the Switch Use the pull down menu to choose the authenticator for Web based Access Control The user may choose local Choose this parameter to use the local authentication method of the Switch as the authenticating method for users trying to access the network via the switch This is in fact the username and password to access the Switch configured using the User Account Creation screen seen below radius Choose this parameter to use a remote RADIUS server as the authenticating method 184 for users trying to access the network via the switch This RADIUS server must have already been pre assigned by the administrator using the RADIUS Server window located in the 802 1X section Logout Timer The logout time in displayed in minutes enter a value between 7 and 1440 1 1440 Authentication Enter the VLAN name which users will be placed while a
11. 26 Traffic Segmentation window The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Check the corresponding boxes for the port s to transmit packets Forward Portlist Check the boxes to select which of the ports on the Switch will be able to forward packets These ports will be allowed to receive packets from the port specified above Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch s Current Traffic Segmentation Table 90 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual BPDU Tunneling Settings This table is used to configure the BPDU Tunneling port types When the device is operated with Q in Q enabled DA will be replaced by the tunnel multicast address and the BPDU will be tagged with the tunnel VLAN based on the Q in Q VLAN configuration and the tunnel uplink setting When the device is operated without Q in Q enabled the BPDU will have its DA replaced by the tunnel multicast address and be transmitted out based on the VLAN configuration and the tunnel uplink setting The tunnel multicast address for STP BPDU is 01 05 5d 00 00 00 The tunnel multicast address for GVRP BPDU is 01 05 5d 00 00 21 To view this window click L2 Features gt BPDU Tunneling Settings as shown below BPDU Tunneling setting sis BPDU Tunneling State Disabled Enabled STP Tunnel Multicast Ad
12. Aging Time imini Hold Time sec Disabled Host Based 1440 300 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 Disabled Host based 1440 300 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 q Disabled Host Based 1440 300 10 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 11 Disabled Host based 1440 300 12 Disabled Host Based 1440 300 Figure 5 44 MAC based Access Control Settings window a Oo om ee oo Ro a The following parameters may be viewed or set Parameter Description MBA Global State Click the radio buttons to globally enable or disable the MAC based Access Control function on the Switch Use the pull down menu to choose the type of authentication to be used when authentication MAC addresses on a given port The user may choose between the following methods Local Use this method to utilize the locally set MAC address database as the authenticator for MAC based Access Control This MAC address list can be configured in the MAC based Access Control Local Database Settings window RADIUS Use this method to utilize a remote RADIUS server as the authenticator for MAC based Access Control Remember the MAC list must be previously set on the RADIUS server and the settings for the server must be first configured on the Switch
13. Authenticator Diagnostics This window contains the diagnostic information regarding the operation of the Authenticator associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Diagnostics as shown below 239 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Port Connect Enter Connect Logo Auth Enter Auth Success Auth Timeout Auth Fail o M o o M a PR Figure 7 26 Authenticator Diagnostics window The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides Connect Enter Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other state Connect LogOff Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL Logoff message Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING as a result of an EAP Response Identity message being received from the Supplicant Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant authSuccess TRUE Auth Timeout Counts the num
14. Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch Click Refresh to reload the page Port Description The Switch supports a port description feature where the user may assign names to various ports on the Switch Use the From Port To Port pull down menu to choose a port or range of ports to describe and then enter a description of the port s Click Apply to set the descriptions in the Port Description Table The Medium Type applies only to the Combo ports If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of tranport medium used SFP ports should be nominated Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE T ports should be nominated Copper The result will be displayed in the appropriate switch port number slot C for copper ports and F for fiber ports To view this window click Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Description as shown below 15 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual From Port To Port Medium Type Description aa oa comer wf O Description Figure 2 12 Port Description window Port Error Disabled The following window will display the information about ports that have had their connection status disabled for reasons such as Loopback Detection or link down status To view this window click Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Error Disabled as shown below Figure 2 13 Port Error Disabled window The following parameters are dis
15. Destination Source Ethernet H W type Protocol Protocol Operation Sender H W Sender Target H W Target address address address address address protocol address protocol address address 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 6 byte 4 byte 6 byte FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 20 5C 01 11 11 ARP reply 00 20 5C 01 11 11 10 10 10 254 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Table 5 A common DoS attack today can be done by associating a nonexistent or specified MAC address to the IP address of the network s default gateway The malicious attacker only needs to broadcast ONE Gratuitous ARP to the network claiming it is the gateway so that the whole network operation will be turned down as all packets to the Internet will be directed to the wrong node Likewise the attacker can either choose to forward the traffic to the actual default gateway passive sniffing or modify the data before forwarding it man in the middle attack The hacker cheats the victim s PC to think that it is a router and cheats the router to think it is the victim As can be seen in Figure 5 all traffic will be then sniffed by the hacker but the users will not notice anything happening User A uses this AA x eee ac Attacker MAC A S F Attacker MAC MAC address g gt MAG address Broadcasting spoofed MAC address Attacker Blan in the middle Figure 5 263 e Prevent ARP spoofing via packet content ACL Concerning the common DoS attack today caused by the ARP spoofing
16. Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server Bac Auth Fail Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server i e aFail becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to FAIL Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server Browse ARP Table This window displays current ARP entries on the Switch To search a specific ARP entry enter an Interface Name or an IP Address at the top of the window and click Find Click the Show Static button to display static ARP table entries To clear the ARP Table click Clear All The view this window click Monitoring gt Browse ARP Table as shown below 241 MN JO NLRC 27M 1 ON OC J r 00 12 DGS 3700 12G Series La yer 2G igabit Ethernet S Switch Us Ser Man ual Browse ARF Interface Name PaAddress _ Show Static Show All Clear All IP Address 10 0 0 0 10 0 58 4 10 1 1 1 10 1 1 3 10 1 1 103 10 1 1 151 10 1 1 152 10 1 1 166 10 1 1 180 10 1 1 191 10 1 1 254 10 1 41 44 10 1 104 222 102332 10 233 201 10 287 3 10 287 6 10 2 87 62 10 4 46 1 10525 105 276 10 5 89 7 10 6 38 1 10 6 51 10 10 6 70 1 E MARA A MAC Address FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 0C 6E 43 13 AE 08 00 28 32 00 AC 00 1F 3B 60 F 3 68 00 50 B4 97 D7 C9 00 50 BA 70 D6 D0 00 80 C6 13 00 04 00 50 BA 70 E4 58 00 24 3C 20 4E A0 00 03 09 18 10 01 00 57 91 DA 38 7
17. Link Status Test Result Cable Length M 1 Link Up OK The cable diagnostics feature is designed primarily for administrators or customer service representatives to verify and test copper cables it can rapidly determine the quality of the cables and the types of error Note 1 lf cable length is displayed as NA it means the cable length is Not Available This is due to the FE port being unable to obtain cable length either because its link partner is powered off or the cables used are broken and or bad in quality 2 The maximum cable length is limited to 120 meters 3 Deviation is 5 meters therefore No Cable may be displayed under Test Result when the cable used is less than 5 min length 4 t also measures cable fault and identifies the fault in length according to the distance from this switch Figure 7 2 Cable Diagnostic window Enter the port number you wish to test and click Test the results will be display on the lower half of the table CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization window displays the percentage of the CPU being used expressed as an integer percentage and calculated as a simple average by time interval To view this window click Monitoring gt CPU Utilization as shown below One Win Five Mins Unite Time Interval Record Number 200 Show Hide W Five Secs le One Min W Five Mins Figure 7 3 CPU Utilization window To view the CPU utilization by port use the real time graph
18. co 4 07 nh E oo ri PID State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Portand Protocol ID State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled VLAN Mame State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Protocol Identity State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Protocol Identity Figure 3 70 LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the pull down menu to select a range of ports to be configured Dot TLV PVID Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the advertised PVID This TLV optional datatype determines whether the IEEE 802 1 organizationally defined port VLAN TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port Dot1 TLV Protocol Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the advertised Protocol VLAN ID This TLV VLAN optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s port and protocol VLAN ID instance will be transmitted on the port If a port is associated with multiple protocol VLANs those enabled ports and protocol VLAN IDs will be advertised Dot1 TLV VLAN Use the dr
19. 12 VLAN Precedence Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specify the port or range of ports you wish to configure VLAN Precedence Use the drop down menu to select the VLAN precedence choose either MAC Based VLAN or Subnet VLAN MAC Based VLAN Specifies that the MAC based VLAN classification is given precedence over the subnet VLAN classification Subnet VLAN Specifies that the subnet VLAN classification is given precedence over the MAC based VLAN classification Click Apply to implement changes made Q in Q Q in Q Settings This function allows the user to enable or disable the Q in Q function Q in Q is designed for service providers to carry traffic from multiple users across a network Q in Q is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when the same VLAN ID is being used by different customers This is achieved by inserting SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then removing the tags when the frames leave the network Customers of a service provider may have different or specific requirements regarding their internal VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs that can be supported Therefore customers in the same service provider network may have VLAN ranges that overlap which might cause traffic to become mixed up So assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer
20. 2 Safeguard Engine window To configure the Switch s Safeguard Engine change the State to Enabled when the Safeguard Engine is enabled a green light will show on the gray bar at the top of this window next to Safeguard To set the Safeguard Engine for the Switch complete the following fields 146 Parameter Description Rising Threshold Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization before the Safeguard Engine mechanism is enabled Once the CPU utilization reaches this percentage level the Switch will move into the Exhausted state Falling Threshold Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization as a percentage where the Switch leaves the Exhausted state and returns to normal mode Trap log Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the sending of messages to the devices SNMP agent and switch log once the Safeguard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization rate Toggle the State field to either Strict or Fuzzy for the Safeguard Engine of the Switch Click Apply to implement the settings made Trusted Host Use the Security IP Management to permit remote stations to manage the Switch If you choose to define one or more designated management stations only the chosen stations as defined by IP address will be allowed management privilege through the web manager or Telnet session To define a management station IP setting type in the IP address with a proper subnet mask and click the Add butto
21. 33 SSH User Authentication Lists window In the example aboveright the User Account RG has been previously set using the User Accounts window in the Configuratrion folder A User Account MUST be set in order to set the parameters for the SSH user To Edit the parameters for a SSH user click on the corresponding Edit button which will reveal the following window to configure Total Entries 1 Liser Mame Auth Mode Host Name Host IF o Hote Maximum 8 entries and Host Name should be less than 32 characters Figure 5 34 SSH User Authentication Lists Edit window The user may set the following parameters Parameter Description Enter a User Name of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user This User Name must be a previously configured user account on the Switch Auth Mode The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users attempting to access the Switch Host Based This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a remote SSH server for authentication purposes Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user 170 Password This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use an administrator defined password for authentication Upon entry of this parameter the Switch will prompt the administrator for a password and then to re type the password for confirmation Public Key
22. Control MAC based Access Control Web Authentication and NetBIOS Filtering Settings Section 6 ACL Discussion on the ACL functions of the Switch including ACL Configuration Wizard Access Profile List CPU Access Profile List ACL Finder and ACL Flow Meter Section 7 Monitoring Features information about the monitoring functions on the Switch including Cable Diagnostic CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packet Size Memory Utilization Packets Errors Port Access Control Browse ARP Table Browse VLAN IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Browse Session Table CFM MAC Address Table Browse VLAN Counter Statistics Ethernet OAM and Historical Counter amp Utilization Section 8 Save Services and Tools Save Configuration ID 1 Save Configuration ID 2 Save Log Save All Configuration File Backup and Restore Upload Log File Reset Download Firmware and Reboot System Appendix A Mitigating ARP Spoofing Attacks Using Packet Content ACL This section introduces ARP protocol ARP spoofing attacks and the counter measure brought by D Link s switches to counter ARP spoofing attacks Appendix B System Log Entries This table lists all the possible entries and their corresponding meanings that will appear in the System Log of this Switch Appendix C Glossary Lists definitions for terms and acronyms used in this document Appendix D Password Recovery Procedure This section describes the procedure for resetting passwords
23. Figure 3 62 MSTP Port Information window The following parameters can be viewed or set Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to select a port Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being configured The range is from O to 15 An entry of O in this field denotes the CIST default MSTI Internal Path cost This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports 1 200000000 when an interface is selected within a STP instance The default setting is O auto There are two options 0 auto Selecting this parameter for the interna Cost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for an interface The default value is derived from the media speed of the interface value 1 200000000 Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 7 to 200000000 will set the quickest route when a loop occurs A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission Priority Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface A higher priority will designate the interface to forward packets first A lower number denotes a higher priority Click Apply to implement changes made 114 y fy 7 y gt FT ff TY a dAd OLN OC San I ras MAY fN a ll 2 1 A T VE my lt f ifl 1 slag mM rionce avar 2 a I NIONnIT amp THNOaKrTnoa l mm AITO j rA j IU ICI UGO 3 UU J gt C ICS Laver lt GIUdAWUll INIerriel OWLCT USCI Vic LS NANS FAI
24. Length VLAN the incoming VLAN ID of DHCP client packet Module For a standalone switch the Module is always 0 For a stackable switch the Module is the Unit ID g Port The incoming port number of DHCP client packet port number starts from 1 gt 9 29 sp Remote ID sub option format 1 2 3 4 5 ete Tete i i 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 6 bytes 1 Sub option type 2 Length 3 Remote ID type 4 Length 5 MAC address The Switch s system MAC address Figure 2 21 Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Format DHCP Relay Interface Settings This window allows the user to set up a server by IP address for relaying DHCP information to the Switch The user may enter a previously configured IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the DHCP BOOTP server using the following window Properly configured settings will be displayed in the DHCP Relay Interface Table at the bottom of the following window The user may add up to four server IP s per IP interface on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Interface Settings as shown below DHCP Relay Interface Table Interface Server Severn Figure 2 22 DHCP Relay Interface Settings and DHCP Relay Interface Table window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description interface The IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the Server Enter the IP address
25. Mo Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Lirnit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Ho Limit The Effective Tx Re Rate means the actual bandwidth of the switch port if it s not the same as the configured rate which means the bandwidth may be assigned by higher priority resource such as RADIUS server Figure 4 3 Bandwidth Control window The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description From port To port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Type This drop down menu allows you to select between RX receive TX transmit and Both This setting will determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving transmitting or both receiving and transmitting packets No Limit This drop down menu allows you to select Enabled or Disabled to specify whether the selected port have unlimited bandwidth 133 Click Apply to set the bandwidth control for the selected ports Results of configured Bandwidth Settings will be displayed in the Bandwidth Control Table on the lower half of the window Traffic Control On a computer network packets such as Multicast packets and Broadcast packets continually flood the network as normal procedure At times this traffic may increase due to a malicious end
26. RADIOS Acecountina Metwork Disabled Shell Disabled System Disabled Apply Network hen enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when 802 1 port access control events occur on the Switch Shell When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS serwer when a user either logs in logs out ar times out on the Switch using the console Telnet or SSH System When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS serwer when system events occur on the Switch such as a system reset or system boot Figure 5 43 RADIUS Accounting Settings window MAC based Access Control MAC based Access Control is a method to authenticate and authorize access using either a port or host For port based MAC the method decides port access rights while for host based MAC the method determines the MAC access rights A MAC user must be authenticated before being granted access to a network Both local authentication and remote RADIUS server authentication methods are supported In MAC based Access Control MAC user information in a local database or a RADIUS server database is searched for authentication Following the authentication result users achieve different levels of authorization Notes About MAC based Access Control There are certain limitations and regulations regarding the MAC based Access Control 1 Once this feature is enabled for a port the Switch
27. Telnet Settings Password Encryption Clipaging Settings Firmware Information Dual Configuration Settings Ping Test Local Loopback Port Settings VLAN Counter Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings SNMP Settings Time Range Settings sFlow Single IP Management and DDM L2 Features A discussion of the Layer 2 features on the Switch including Jumbo Frame 802 1Q VLAN Subnet VLAN QinQ 802 1v Protocol VLAN RSPAN Settings GVRP Settings GVRP Global Settings MAC based VLAN Settings PVID Auto Assign Settings Port Trunking LACP Port Settings Traffic Segmentation BPDU Tunneling Settings IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Port Mirror Loopback Detection Settings Spanning Tree Forwarding amp Filtering LLDP CFM and Ethernet OAM QoS Features information on Switch QoS functions including HOL Blocking Prevention Bandwidth Control Traffic Control 802 1P Default Priority 802 1P User Priority QoS Scheduling Mechanism QoS Scheduling In Band Manage Settings and SRED Security Features information on Switch security functions including Safeguard Engine Trusted Host IP MAC Port Binding Port Security DHCP Server Screening 802 1X SSL Settings SSH Access Authentication Control MAC based Access Control Web Authentication and NetBlOS Filtering Settings ACL Discussion on the ACL functions of the Switch including ACL Configuration Wizard Access Profile List CPU Access Profile List ACL Finder and ACL Flow
28. The principle of ARP spoofing is to send the fake or spoofed ARP messages to an Ethernet network Generally the aim is to associate the attacker s or random MAC address with the IP address of another node such as the default gateway Any traffic meant for that IP address would be mistakenly re directed to the node specified by the attacker IP spoofing attack is caused by Gratuitous ARP that occurs when a host sends an ARP request to resolve its own IP address Figure 4 shows a hacker within a LAN to initiate ARP spoofing attack IF 10 16 18 5 MAC O0 20 5C 01 33 33 e IE 160 10 10 254 l MAC 00 20 50 01 54 54 DNS server IP 10 10 10 253 MAC 00 20 5C 01 53 53 IF 10 10 10 2 A wrong ARP entry spreads over Pp the network to spoof all PCs MAC 00 20 5C 01 22 22 IF 10 10 10 1 MAC 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Figure 4 In the Gratuitous ARP packet the Sender protocol address and Target protocol address are filled with the same source IP address The Sender H W Address and Target H W address are filled with the same source MAC address The destination MAC address is the Ethernet broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF All nodes within the network will immediately update their own ARP table in accordance with the sender s MAC and IP address The format of Gratuitous ARP is shown in Table 5 262 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Gratuitous ARP Ethernet A AA
29. Therefore each link between bridges is sensitive to the status of the link Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed links and thus faster topology adjustment A drawback of 802 1D is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges Forwarding Yes Yes Table 3 2 Comparing Port States RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state it no longer relies on timer configurations RSTP compliant bridges are sensitive to feedback from other RSTP compliant bridge links Ports do not need to wait for the topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state In order to allow this rapid transition the protocol introduces two new variables the edge port and the point to point P2P port Edge Port The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop cannot be created An example would be a port connected directly to a single workstation Ports that are designated as edge ports transition to a forwarding state immediately without going through the listening and learning states An edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port 107 P2P Port A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges Under RSTP all ports operating in full duplex mode are considered to be P2P ports unless manually overridden through config
30. especially during peak demand as bottlenecks can quickly develop if the QoS settings are not suitable To view this window click QoS gt QoS Scheduling Mechanism as shown below 137 005 Scheduling Mechanism Settings From Por To Port Scheduling Mechanism 005 Scheduling Mechanism Table Mode Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict strict strict strict strict strict Figure 4 7 QoS Scheduling Mechanism The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Enter the port or port list you wish to configure Scheduling Strict The highest class of service is the first to process traffic That is the highest class of Mechanism service will finish before other queues empty Weighted Round Robin Use the weighted round robin WAR algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service For weighted round robin queuing the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight Click Apply to implement changes made QoS Scheduling This window allows the user to configure the way the Switch will map an incoming packet per port based on its 802 1p user priority to one of the eight available hardware priority queues available on the Switch To view this window click QoS gt QoS Scheduling as shown below 138 005 Scheduling Settings From Fort To Fort Class ID Scheduling Mechanism n w 005 Scheduling Tab
31. frames larger than the standard Ethernet frame size of 1536 bytes of up to 13K and 13312 bytes tagged can be transmitted by the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt Jumbo Frame as shown below Jumbo Frame Disabled Enabled Apply Current Status The maximum size offrame is 1536 bytes Figure 3 1 Jumbo Frame window Click Apply to implement changes made 66 VLANs Understanding IEEE 802 1p Priority Priority tagging is a function defined by the IEEE 802 1p standard designed to provide a means of managing traffic on a network where many different types of data may be transmitted simultaneously It is intended to alleviate problems associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks The quality of applications that are dependent on such time critical data such as video conferencing can be severely and adversely affected by even very small delays in transmission Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802 1p standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of data packets These devices can also assign a priority label or tag to packets Compliant devices can also strip priority tags from packets This priority tag determines the packet s degree of expeditiousness and determines the queue to which it will be assigned Priority tags are given values from O to 7 with O being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the highest The highest priority tag
32. in effect doubles the potential throughput of a link half duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received but not at the same time Contrast with full duplex IP address Internet Protocol address A unique identifier for a device attached to a network using TCP IP The address is written as four octets separated with full stops periods and is made up of a network section an optional subnet section and a host section IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange A protocol allowing communication in a NetWare network 2 8 LAN Local Area Network A network of connected computing resources such as PCs printers servers covering a relatively small geographic area usually not larger than a floor or building Characterized by high data rates and low error rates latency The delay between the time a device receives a packet and the time the packet is forwarded out of the destination port line speed See baud rate main port The port in a resilient link that carries data traffic in normal operating conditions MDI Medium Dependent Interface An Ethernet port connection where the transmitter of one device is connected to the receiver of another device MDI X Medium Dependent Interface Cross over An Ethernet port connection where the internal transmit and receive lines are crossed MIB Management Information Base Stores a device s management characteristics and parameters MIBs are used by the Simple Network Manag
33. lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Enable Admin failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Login failed through Web from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt MAC lt mac gt Enable Admin failed through Web from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt MAC lt mac gt Login failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt MAC lt mac gt Enable Admin failed through Enable Admin failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt 2 2 Web SSL from lt userlP gt due due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration to AAA server timeout or Username lt username gt MAC lt mac gt improper configuration Login failed through Telnet Login failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt due to AAA from user due to AAA server server timeout or improper configuration Username timeout or improper lt username gt MAC lt mac gt configuration Warning Enable Admin failed through Enable Adm
34. running a 1000BASE T cable for connection between the Switch port and other device capable of a gigabit connection The master setting 7000M Full_M will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex speed and physical layer type The master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers The timing control is set on a master physical layer by a local source The slave setting 1000M Full S uses loop timing where the timing comes form a data stream received from the master If one connection is set for 1000M Full M the other side of the connection must be set for 7000M Full_S Any other configuration will result in a link down status for both ports Flow Control Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations Ports configured for full duplex use 802 3x flow control half duplex ports use backpressure flow control and Auto ports use an automatic selection of the two The default is Disabled Address Learning When Enabled destination and source MAC addresses are automatically listed in the forwarding table The default setting is Enabled Medium Type This applies only to the Combo ports If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of transport medium used SFP ports should be set at Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE T ports should be set at Copper
35. 1 4 6 pO a Show All Clear All Total Entries O MAC Address Lock Mode Figure 5 11 Port Security Entries window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description VLAN Name specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN Name VLAN ID e g 1 4 6 Specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN ID Port List Specifies a port or list of ports to be configured Click Apply to implement changes DHCP Server Screening Settings This function allows the user to not only restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packet by any specified DHCP client it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients The first time the DHCP filter is enabled it will create both an access profile entry and an access rule per port entry it will also create other access rules These rules are used to block all DHCP server packets In addition to a permit DHCP entry it will also create one access profile and one access rule eniry the first time the DHCP client MAC address is used as the client MAC address The Source IP address is the same as the DHCP server s IP address UDP port number 67 These rules are used to permit the DHCP server packets with specific fileds which the user has configured When DHCP Server filter function is enabled all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port The DHCP Server Screening fol
36. 1X Global Settings window This window allows you to set the following features Parameter Description Authentication The Authentication Mode allows the user to choose among Disabled Port Based or MAC Mode Based Authentication Mode When choosing MAC Based Host based Network Access Control will be enabled on the port Authentication Choose the Authentication Protocol either RAD US EAP or Local Protocol Forward EAPOL This enables or disables the Switch retransmit EAPOL PDU Request PDU Max User 1 Specify the maximum number of users that can be learned via 802 1X authentication 1536 Click Apply to implement your configuration changes 802 1X Port Settings This window is used to configure the 802 1X Port Settings To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Port Settings as shown below 302 1 Port Access Control From Port To Part GuietPeriod 0 65535 SuppTimeout 1 655357 Sererlimedut 1 565535 MaxReg 1 10 TxPeriod 1 65535 ReAuthPeriod 1 65535 ReAuthentication Disabled Port Control w Capability None v Direction Ww Forward EAPOL PDU On Port Disabled Max User On Port 1 128 CI No Limit Port uiet ReAuth i Forward EAPOL Max Users On Port amor opencnDir a TxPeriod A SuUpp Timeout Server Timeout MaxR eg Bead ReAuth Capability PDU On Port Port 1 Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 500 Disabled Mone Disabled 125 2 Both Both Auto 30 BO
37. 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 128 3 Both Both Auto 30 BO 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 125 4 Both Both Auto 30 BO 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 128 5 Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 125 a Both Both Auto 30 BO 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 128 T Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 125 Ej Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 125 3 Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 128 10 Both Both Auto 30 BO 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 125 11 Both Both Auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 Disabled Mone Disabled 125 60 30 30 2 12 Bath Bath Auto 30 3600 Disabled More Disabled 128 Figure 5 23 802 1X Port Settings window 160 This window allows you to set the following features Parameter Description From Port To Port Enter the port or ports to be set QuietPeriod 0 65535 following a failed authentication exchange with the client The default setting is 60 seconds SuppTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the 1 65535 client The default setting is 30 seconds ServerTimeout 1 65535 This allows you to set the number of seconds that t
38. 7 is generally only used for data associated with video or audio applications which are sensitive to even slight delays or for data from specified end users whose data transmissions warrant special consideration The Switch allows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network Using queues to manage priority tagged data allows you to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network There may be circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently tagged packets into the same queue Generally however it is recommended that the highest priority queue Queue 7 be reserved for data packets with a priority value of 7 Packets that have not been given any priority value are placed in Queue O and thus given the lowest priority for delivery Strict mode and weighted round robin system are employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues are emptied of packets The ratio used for clearing the queues is 4 1 This means that the highest priority queue Queue 7 will clear 4 packets for every 1 packet cleared from Queue 0 Remember the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports and all devices connected to the Switch will be affected This priority queuing system will be especially beneficial if your network employs switches with the capability of assigning priority tags VLAN Description A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology con
39. 802 1X and cause the port to begin in the unauthorized state allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port The authentication process begins when the link state of the port transitions from down to up or when an EAPOL start frame is received The Switch then requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication server The default setting is Auto Capability This allows the 802 1X Authenticator settings to be applied on a per port basis Select Authenticator to apply the settings to the port When the setting is activated A user must pass the authentication process to gain access to the network Select None disable 802 1X functions on the port Sets the administrative controlled direction to either in or both If in is selected control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port you selected in the first field If both are selected control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the controlled port selected in the first field Forward EAPOL This enables or disables the Switch retransmit EAPOL PDU Request on a per port basis PDU On Port Max User On Port Specify the maximum number of users that can be learned via 802 1X authentication 1 128 Click Apply to implement your configuration changes 161 802 1X User To create a new 802 1X User enter a user name and password then reconfirm the password and click
40. Access Controller Access Control System Provides password checking and authentication and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission Extended TACACS XTACACS An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus Provides detailed access control for authentication for network devices TACACS is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers The TACACS protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS daemon using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery In order for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security function to work properly a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch called an Authentication Server Host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication the Switch contacts the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify and the server will respond with one of three messages The server verifies the username and password and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch The server will not accep
41. Access ID 1 Profile Type VLAN ID 3 Action Ports 802 1P Show All Rules Figure 6 39 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for Ethernet 213 To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile To configure the Access Rules for IP open the CPU Access Profile List window and click Add View Rules for an IP entry This will open the following window Profile ID Access JO Action Fermit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 40 CPU Access Rule List window for IP To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding Delete Rules button To add a new Access Rule click the Add Rule button Profile Information Profile ID 2 Profile Type Owner Type CPU ACL DSCP ICMP Yes Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 100 icmp O Rule Action Action Permit e Time Range Name C Figure 6 41 Add Access Rule window for IP To set the Access Rule for IP adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine t
42. Address 0 16384 selected switch and group of ports Click Apply to implement changes made Port Security VLAN Settings This table is used to set the maximum port security entries that can be learned on a specific VLAN To view this window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Security FDB Entries as shown below VLAN Name fT O VLAN ID e g 1 4 6 po Max Learning Address 0 16384 No Limit Port Security VLAN Table Only VLANs with limitation are displayed ID VLAN Name Max Learning Address Next gt gt Figure 5 10 Port Security VLAN Settings window The following parameters can be set 152 Parameter Description VLAN Name Specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN Name VLAN ID e g 1 4 6 Specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN ID Max Learning Specifies the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned by this VLAN If Address this parameter is set to 0 no user can get authorization on this VLAN If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on the VLAN the command will be rejected The default value is No Limit Click Apply to implement changes Port Security Entries This window is used to configure port security entries by MAC address port number and VLAN ID To view this window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Security Entries as shown below Clear Port Lock Entries By Port VLAN Name po O WLANID egit Port List 2 9
43. Apply the new user will be displayed in the lower half of the table To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X User as shown below 8021xXLiser Password Confirm Password Apply Note Passwordlser Marne should be less than 15 characters 802 1X User Table Total Entries 0 Liser Mame Figure 5 24 802 1X User window Authentication RADIUS Server The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows you to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing protection against a sniffing active hacker To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Authentication RADIUS Server as shown below Index IPv4 Address Co fe 10 90 90 90 O IPv Address A A Authentic Port 1 65535 Accounting Port 1 65535 Timeout 1 255 sec Retransmit 1 255 2 tires Key hlax32 characters a RADIUS Server List IF Address Auth Port AccEPort Timeout Retransmit Figure 5 25 Authentication RADIUS Server window This window displays the following information Parameter Description Index Choose the desired RADIUS server to configure 7 2 or 3 IPv4 Address Select either IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address to set the RADIUS Server IP IPv6 Address Authentication Port Set the RADIUS authentication server s UDP port The default port is 1872 1 65535 Accounting Port Set the RADIUS account server s UDP port The default port is 1873 1 655
44. CASE PI a a a a 226 trans NGG lua tds 227 EMOS ti nd dd dienes Cantata iets 230 Received RX assaia O ote 230 A e TCR eed eee eT te eet ee 231 e A e o e PEE e a eea E 233 RADIUS Autentica lO escitas li TA 233 AS o A o o A O rene ta err ere er eee eee eer eee ee 234 PUTING MIC ALON lali Sn 236 Amen ao Rota SOS iia 237 Authenticator Session ett tdt 238 Authenticator Diagnostics as ai 239 DIOWSC ARP Table ranaminias inicias 241 A etn an cetera men Ps tare ease an sane tes tate etn eas ea es netien en ebemim ete 242 ESOS Or VEAN tt da 242 SNOW VLAN PONS ct li ocio eae 243 IOMP SNOOP AN NC PAoU U0y A PP gt Pmm O tate 243 Browse IGMP Router Poland A A AA lia 243 IGIMIP SMOOD ING AU e 243 IGMP SmOoping Rorwatdina FADE irani sti io 244 Browse IE MP SADO CO edi 244 MED SNOGODING parco reco co ola 245 Browse IVIL FROLIC Tle OM io ode ea ealleades 245 Yi Mil HE SY giao 9 MA GOUD aaiae lao o ae lo o RE eaten dl o ds anne eee 245 MLD SNGODINO Forwarding A aia 246 Browse MLD SHODNO Ce OUI tai e td Ak e tad e td teca o le fdo cas 247 Browse Session Tala AA ie 247 TIN A A A 247 CEM PACKE GOUMEN UR Lo aremenertre a ere wee eh eee re ee 247 GEM Packer Coume r CGM Lists E A N 248 Browse CFEM Fault WME Paerata o te guvescics 248 BrOwWSS CFM PFO MP CIS iraani a a a aT 248 MAG Address Tables AA a a O A A E 249 Browse VEAN COUMGE Statis iC S arica diria 249 Ethem OAM meee te reer ad 250 Browse Ethernet OAM Event LOO cur dis ana 250 B
45. D Link managed switch can effectively mitigate it via its unique Packet Content ACL For that reason the basic ACL can only filter ARP packets based on packet type VLAN ID Source and Destination MAC information there is a need for further inspections of ARP packets To prevent ARP spoofing attack we will demonstrate here using Packet Content ACL on Switch to block the invalid ARP packets which contain fake gateway s MAC and IP binding IP 10 90 90 90 MAC 01 02 03 04 05 006 IP 10 90 90 100 MAC 00 00 00 00 CD EF MA X f COEF lt OcOcOcOd0d0d 10 90 90 90 is at OcOcOcOdOdOd IP 10 90 90 110 MAC 0c 0c 0c 0d 0d 0d Example topology Configuration The configuration logic is listed below 1 Only when the ARP matches the Source MAC address in Ethernet the Sender MAC address and Sender IP address in the ARP protocol can pass through the switch In this example it is the gateway s ARP 2 The switch will deny all other ARP packets which claim they are from the gateway s IP The design of Packet Content ACL on the DGS 3700 Series enables users to inspect any offset_chunk An offset_chunk is a 4 byte block in a HEX format which is utilized to match the individual field in an Ethernet frame Each profile is allowed to contain up to a maximum of 4 offset_chunks Furthermore only one single profile of Packet Content ACL can be supported per switch In other words up to 16 bytes of total offset_chunks c
46. Dynamic Entries VLAN Name MAC Address O0 00 00 00 00 00 Total Entries 317 VLAN Name MAC Address default O0 00 30 28 00 04 default O0 00 32 00 28 04 default O0 00 81 00 00 04 default O0 00 81 94 F 2 F 4 default 00 00 E2 2F 44 EC default 00 00 EB 44 50 545 default o0 00 FO 78 EB 00 default 00 01 11 22 33 02 default O0 01 6C CE 62 E0 default O0 02 45 F D 66 97 Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Eg Eg Eg Eg E i n i n A a hh cn cn 0 Figure 7 43 MAC Address Table window The functions used in the MAC address table are described below Parameter Description Pot The port to which the MAC address below corresponds VLAN Name Enter a VLAN Name for the forwarding table to be browsed by MAC Address Enter a MAC address for the forwarding table to be browsed by Allows the user to move to a sector of the database corresponding to a user defined port VLAN or MAC address Clear Dynamic Clicking this button will allow the user to delete all dynamic entries of the address table Entries View All Entry Clicking this button will allow the user to view all entries of the address table Clear All Entry Clicking this button will allow the user to delete all entries of the address table Browse VLAN Counter Statistics This window is used to view the VLAN properties including received packets and received byte statistics To view this window click Mo
47. Figure 7 29 Show VLAN Ports window IGMP Snooping The following windows are used to configure the IGMP Snooping settings of the Switch Browse IGMP Router Port This window displays which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D while a Forbidden port is designated by F Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button To view this window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping gt Browse IGMP Router Port as shown below Note S Static Router Port D Dynamic Router Port F Forbidden Router Port Figure 7 30 Browse IGMP Router Port window IGMP Snooping Group This window allows the Switch s IGMP Snooping Group Table to be viewed IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and the corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch The number of IGMP reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reports field To view this window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Group as shown below 243 TIP Snoophina GroUb VLAN Name VLAN List e g 1 4 6 Group IF Address Clear Data Driven View All Clear All Data Driven IGMP Snooping Group Table Total Entries 0 VID VLAN Name
48. From Port To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured This is the highest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the alarm will be taken Low Alarm This is the lowest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the alarm is taken High Warning This is the highest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the warning is taken Low Warning This is the lowest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the warning is taken Click Apply to implement changes made 65 L2 Features Jumbo Frame 802 10 VLAN Subnet VLAN QinQ 802 1v Protocol VLAN RSPAN Settings GVRP Settings GVRP Global Settings MAC based VLAN Settings PVID Auto Assign Settings Port Trunking LACP Port Settings Traffic Segmentation BPDU Tunneling Settings IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Port Mirror Loopback Detection Settings Spanning Tree Forwarding amp Filtering LLDP CFM Ethernet OAM The following section will aid the user in configuring Layer 2 functions for the Switch The Switch includes various functions all discussed in detail in the following section Jumbo Frame This window will enable or disable the Jumbo Frame function on the Switch The default is Disabled When enabled jumbo frame
49. IN a ALAR i 5 Apply system Up Time 00 Days 00 14 54 Logged in as Administrator Anonymous 10 73 21 1 TD ogout ry Tools 1GS 3700 12 E je Configuration H L2 Features Device Information A a QoS Device Type DGS 3700 12 Gigabit Ethernet Switch MAC Address 00 21 91 AF 37 DO H Security System Name IP Address 10 24 73 21 Static p a System Location Mask 255 0 0 0 i System Contact Gateway 0 0 0 0 Boot PROM Version Build 1 00 B002 Management VLAN default Firmware Version Build 1 00 8031 Login Timeout Minutes Never Hardware Version Al Dual Image Supported Serial Number System Time 22 01 2009 05 12 15 Device Status and Quick Configurations SNTP Disabled Settings Jumbo Frame Disabled Settings Spanning Tree Disabled Settings MLD Snooping Disabled Settings SNMP Disabled Settings IGMP Snooping Disabled Settings Safeguard Engine Disabled Settings MAC Notification Disabled Settings System Log Disabled Settings 802 1 Disabled Settings SSL Disabled Settings SSH Disabled Settings GYRP Disabled Settings Port Mirror Disabled Settings Password Encryption Disabled Settings Single IP Management Disabled Settings Telnet Enabled TCP 23 Settings Clipaging Enabled Settings Web Enabled TCP 80 Settings HOL Blocking Prevention Enabled Settings Figure 1 2 Main Web Manager page Area Function Select the folder or window to be displayed The folder icons can be opened to display the hyper linked window buttons and subfolders
50. INI l bm VA Forwarding amp Filtering This folder contains windows for Unicast Forwarding Multicast Forwarding and Multicast Filtering Mode Unicast Forwarding To view this window click L2 Features gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Unicast Forwarding as shown below Unicast Forwarding Settings WLAN ID 1 4084 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Total Entries 0 VLAN ID VLAN Mame MAC Address Figure 3 63 Unicast Forwarding window To add or edit an entry define the following parameters and then click Apply Parameter Description Click Apply to implement the changes made The new entries will be displayed on the Unicast Forwarding Table on the bottom half of the screen Multicast Forwarding The following figure and table describe how to set up Multicast Forwarding on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Forwarding as shown below Multicast MAC Address Select All None Egress Egress Forts Total Entries O MAC Address Mode Egress Ports Figure 3 64 Multicast Forwarding window 115 The following parameters can be set Parameter Description The VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the corresponding MAC address belongs Multicast MAC The MAC address of the static source of multicast packets This must be a multicast MAC Address address Port Settings Allows the selection of ports that will be members of the static mul
51. Meter Monitoring Features information about the monitoring functions on the Switch including Cable Diagnostic CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packet Size Memory Utilization Packets Errors Port Access Control Browse ARP Table Browse VLAN IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Browse Session Table CFM MAC Address Table Browse VLAN Counter Statistics Ethernet OAM and Historical Counter Utilization and System Log NOTE Be sure to configure the user name and password in the User Accounts window before connecting the Switch to the greater network Configuration Device Information System Information Serial Port Settings IP Address Interface Settings IPv6 Route Settings IPv6 Neighbor Settings Port Configuration Static ARP Settings User Accounts System Log Configuration System Severity Settings DHCP Relay Out of Band Management Settings External Alarm Settings DHCP Auto Configuration Settings MAC Address Aging Time Web Settings Telnet Settings Password Encryption Clipaging Settings Firmware Information Dual Configuration Settings Ping Test Local Loopback Ports Settings VLAN Counter Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings SNMP Settings Time Range Settings sFlow Single IP Management DDM Device Information This window contains the main settings for all major functions on the Switch and appears automatically when you log on To return to the Device Information window click the DGS 3700
52. NOTE The Switch supports up to 4k static VLAN entries VLAN List Add Edit WLAN Find WLAN WLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 VID VLAN Mame default Name should be less than 32 characters Advertisement Enabled 1 Tagged Untagged e Forbidden Mot Member Tagged Ports 11 Untagged Ports 1234567841012 Forbidden Ports Figure 3 8 802 1Q VLAN window Edit window The following fields can then be set in either the Add Edit VLAN or Edit 802 1Q VLAN windows Parameter Description VID Allows the entry of a VLAN ID or displays the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN in the Edit window VLANs can be identified by either the VID or the VLAN name VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for a new VLAN or modifying the VLAN name in the Edit window VLAN Name should be no more than 32 characters in length 19 Advertisement Enabling this function will allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources notifying that they may join the existing VLAN Port Settings Allows an individual port to be specified as member of a VLAN Tagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q tagged Checking the box will designate the port as Tagged Untagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will designate the port as untagged Forbidden elect this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Not Member Allows an individual po
53. Password Enter the password for the RADIUS server which is to be used for packets being sent requesting authentication The default password is default Guest VLAN ID the name of the previously configured Guest VLAN being used for this function Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the MAC based Access Control function on individual ports select Host Based or Mac Based mode Aging Time 1 1440 The time period during which an authenticated host will be kept in an authenticated state When the aging time is timed out the host will be moved back to an 181 o unauthenticated state The range is between 1 and 1440 minutes The default is 1440 Hold Time 1 300 If a host fails to pass authentication the next authentication will not started within hold time unless the user clears the entry state manually The default is 300 Click Apply to implement changes MAC based Access Control Local Settings The following window is used to set a list of MAC addresses along with their corresponding target VLAN which will be authenticated for the Switch Once a queried MAC address is matched in this table it will be placed in the VLAN associated with it here The switch administrator may enter up to 128 MAC addresses to be authenticated using the local method configured here To view this window click Security gt MAC based Access Control gt MAC based Access Control Local Settings as shown below macadres mania van
54. Port List LO y Oea O VLAN List A fe 1 34 Rate Limit 1 1000 P No Limit PortList O VLAN List Total Entries 1 Rate Limitation No Limitation Next gt gt Figure 3 31 IGMP Snooping Rate Limit Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Port List Specifies a port or range of ports that will be configured VLAN List Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs that will be configured Rate Limit 1 1000 Configures the rate of IGMP control packets that are allowed per port or VLAN Click Apply to implement changes made IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings This table is used to configure the current IGMP snooping static group information on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings as shown below Group Setting E VLAN Name Wax 32 characters O VLAN List Po O eaaa IPv4 Address te g 2241 1 View All Total Entries 0 VLAN Mame IP Address static Member Port Figure 3 32 IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description VLAN Name The name of the VLAN for which to create IGMP snooping static group information VLAN List The list of the VLAN IDs for which to create IGMP snooping static group information IPv4 Address The static group address for which to create IGMP snooping static group information Click Apply to impl
55. Priority 0 7 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Replace Tos Precedence 0 77 Rx Rate 1 15624 Time Range Name Counter C auto Assign fe g 0 258 fe g OFF FFF DlTer No Limit lv Disabled w d e q 01 4 69 Figure 6 19 Access Profile IPv6 The following parameters may be configured for the IP IPv6 filter Parameter Description Access ID 1 128 Enter a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 128 Specifies the IPv6 Class Enter a value between 0 255 Flow Label Specifies the IPv6 Flow Label Enter a value between 0 FFFFF Priority 0 7 Replace Priority Replace DSCP Replace ToS Precedence Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its
56. Profile Details Profile ID 3 Profile Type IPv6 CPU ACL Yes Yes Figure 6 34 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for IPv6 The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for Packet Content Select Profile ID Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL O IPv 4 ACL O IPv6 ACL 5 Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask Packet Content Dlofiseto 15 mask P0000000 p0000000 sooonoony O offset 16 31 mask oonnnnnn Lloffset32 47 mask oonnnnnn Llonset 48 62 mask 20000500 60009005 00000500 60059055 Dofiset64 79 mask Figure 6 35 Add CPU ACL Profile window for Packet Content The following parameters may be configured for the Packet Content filter Parameter Description Select Profile Use the drop down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can ID be set from 7 to 5 Select ACL Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 or packet content mask Type This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header This field will
57. Relay State This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu lt is used to enable or disable the DHCP Relay service on the Switch The default is Disabled DHCP Relay Hops This field allows an entry between 7 and 16 to define the maximum number of router hops Count Limit 1 16 DHCP messages can be forwarded across The default hop count is 4 DHCP Relay Time Allows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds and defines the maximum time limit for Threshold 0 65535 routing a DHCP packet If a value of O is entered the Switch will not process the value in the seconds field of the DHCP packet If a non zero value is entered the Switch will use that value along with the hop count to determine whether to forward a given DHCP packet DHCP Relay Option This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is 82 State used to enable or disable the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 on the Switch The default is Disabled Enabled When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients When the relay agent receives the DHCP request it adds the option 82 information and the IP address of the relay agent if the relay agent is configured to the packet Once the option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server When the DHCP server receives the packet if
58. SNMP View Table Access Right Read Only Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Read Write Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can read from and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch To implement the new settings click Apply To delete an entry from the SNMP Community Table click the corresponding Delete button 44 SNMP Host Table The SNMP Host Table window is used to set up SNMP trap recipients To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Host Table as shown below Add Host Table Liserbased Security Model SMP w Security Level MoAuthMoF riw Community String SNMPY3 User Name Total Entries O HostiP Address SMMP Version Community MamelshhiPys User Name Figure 2 50 SNMP Host Table window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Host IP Address Type the IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch User based Security SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used Model SNMPV2c Specifies that SNMP version 2 will be used SNMPV3 To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used Security Level NoAuthNoPriv To specify a NoAuthNoPriv security level AuthNoPriv To specify an AuthNoPriv security level AuthPriv To specify an AuthPriv security level Com
59. Source Group Member Port Router Port Group Type UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Figure 7 31 IGMP Snooping Group window Enter the appropriate information and click Find the information will be shown in the IGMP Snooping Group Table The following field can be viewed Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN ID of the multicast group VLAN List The VLAN ports of the multicast group e g 1 4 6 Group IP Address The IP address of the multicast group NOTE To configure IGMP snooping for the Switch go to the L2 Features folder and select IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Settings IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table This window will display the current IGMP forwarding information on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table as shown below Mr ShAoOopiIng Forwarding tape VLAN Name Omang t46 L VLAN Name Source IP Multicast Group Port Member Figure 7 32 IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table window Enter the VLAN Name or VLAN ID you wish to view and click Find the information will be displayed in the lower half of the window Browse IGMP Snooping Counter This window is used to view the current IGMP snooping statistics on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping gt Browse IGMP Snooping Counter as shown below 244 VLAN Name VLAN List e g 1 4 6 Port List e g 1 4 6 View All VLAN Name Fig
60. Time Leave All Time should be greater than Leave Time Figure 3 20 GVRP Timer Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Join Time The time in milliseconds that specifies the amount of time between the Switch receiving the 100 100000 information about becoming a member of the group and actually joining the group The default is 200 Leave Time The time in milliseconds that specifies the maximum amount of time between the Switch 100 100000 receiving a leave group message from a host and the Switch issuing a group membership query The default is 600 The Leave Time must be greater than 2 join times 85 Leave All Time The time in milliseconds that specifies the amount of time the Switch will take to Leave All 100 100000 groups The default is 10000 The Leave All Time must be greater than the Leave Time NNI BPDU This specifies the GVRP s pdu MAC address of the NNI port Address Dot1d Specifies GVRP s pdu MAC address of NNI port using 802 14 Dotlad Specifies GVRP s pdu MAC address of NNI port using 802 1ad Click Apply to implement changes made MAC based VLAN Settings This table is used to create MAC based VLAN entries on the switch A MAC Address can be mapped to any existing static VLAN and multiple MAC addresses can be mapped to the same VLAN When a static MAC based VLAN entry is created for a user the traffic from this user is able to be serviced under the specified
61. VIDs on the network The Switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VIDs are different the Switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VIDs as the Switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Tagging and Untagging Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into and out of it If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact Other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions can then use the VLAN information in the tag Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into and out of
62. a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally The IEEE 802 1Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to the VLAN of which the receiving port is a member The main characteristics of IEEE 802 1Q are as follows 802 1Q Packet Forwarding Assigns packets to VLANs by filtering Assumes the presence of a single global spanning tree Uses an explicit tagging scheme with one level tagging Packet 802 1Q VLAN Packet Forwarding Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the f following three types of rules Ingress Rules Applied Ingress rules rules relevant to the classification of lt received frames belonging to a VLAN Forwarding Process Forwarding rules between ports decides whether to filter or forward the packet Egress rules determines if the packet must be sent re tagged or untagged Database Port State Tagging or Untagging Applied Figure 3 2 IEEE 802 1Q Packet Forwarding 68 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the EtherType field When a packet s EtherType field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for
63. all dynamically configured neighbor devices which are IPv6 neighbors of the IP interface previously created Click Add to add a new entry click Find to search for a specific entry or click Clear to remove an entry Port Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for individual physical ports including port speed and flow control Port Settings To view this window click Configuration gt Port Configuration gt Port Settings as shown below To configure switch ports Choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From Port To Port port pull down menus Use the remaining pull down menus to configure the parameters described below From Port To Part State Speed Duplex Flow Control Address Learning Medium Type Part State SpeediDuplex Flow Control Connection Address Learning 01 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 02 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 03 Enabled Auto Disabled TOOMIF ulliMone Enabled 04 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 05 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Of Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled oF Enabled Auto Disabled TOOOMF ulone Enabled 08 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Dow Enabled 09 05 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 09 Fy Enabled Auto Disabled Link Dow Enabled 10 ft Enabled Auto Disabled Link Dow En
64. allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host therefore speeding up the negotiation process The default setting is 600 seconds 166 SSL Ciphersuite Settings RSA with This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 RC4 128 MD5 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default RSA with 3DES EDE This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES EDE CBC SHA encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default DHE DSS with 3DES This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher EDE CBC SHA 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default RSA EXPORT with This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange and stream cipher RC4 encryption RC4 40 MD5 with 40 bit keys Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is enabled by default SSL Certificate Download Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the TFTP server where the certificate files are located Certificate File Name Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c cert der Key File Name Enter
65. as shown below defaultleb 83 32 idefaulbeb 85 32 9 defaulted 10 014 A 9 9 2 09 00 Es 13 00 a 24 04 Es 41 00 default o5 26 4 _ ps bos Figure 2 64 Port Speed Utilizing the Tool Tip 96 Right Click Right clicking on a device will allow the user to perform various functions depending on the role of the Switch in the SIM group and the icon associated with it Group Icon default A default35 25 a0 Figure 2 65 Right Clicking a Group Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Property Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a Dece Name single icon Expand To expand the SIM group in detail Module Marne OG6 3700 12 L2 Switch Property To pop up a window to display the group information Mac Address O00 21 91 AF 37 D0 Remote Pon Ho Local Port Mo Port Speed Close Figure 2 66 Property window This window holds the following information Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Module Name Displays the full module name of the switch that was right clicked MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch Local Port No Displays the number of the physica
66. authentication and encrypting packets over the network SNMP v3 adds Message integrity ensures that packets have not been tampered with during transit Authentication determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source Encryption scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it being viewed by an unauthorized source Security Level When SNMPvV3 is in use it is necessary to choose the security level Use the drop down menu to select from the following noauth_nopriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_nopriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_priv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted Community Enter an alphanumeric string that will be used to authorize a remote SNMP manager to String SNMPv3 User access the Switch s SNMP agent Alternatively enter the SNMPv3 user name Name Click Apply to implement changes made SNMP Engine ID The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMP V3 implementations This is an alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Engine ID as shown below Engine ID SOO0000abOS0021 91 af
67. been recognized by the CS as a member of the SIM group A SIM group can only have one Commander Switch CS All switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet broadcast domain Members of a SIM group cannot cross a router A SIM group accepts up to 33 switches numbered 0 32 including the Commander Switch numbered 0 There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet broadcast domain however a single switch can only belong to one group If multiple VLANs are configured the SIM group will only utilize the system VLAN on any switch SIM allows intermediate devices that do not support SIM This enables the user to manage switches that are more than one hop away from the CS The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity SIM switches may take on three different roles 1 Commander Switch CS This is a switch that has been manually configured as the controlling device for a group and takes on the following characteristics lt has an IP Address It is not a commander switch or member switch of another Single IP group It is connected to the member switches through its management VLAN 2 Member Switch MS This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS and it takes on the following characteristics It is not a CS or MS of another Single IP group It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN 3 Candidate Switc
68. button which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped Or the user may opt to 33 choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by entering a number between 1 and 255 Timeout Select a timeout period between 7 and 10 seconds for this Ping message to reach its destination If the packet fails to find the IPv4 address in this specified time the Ping packet will be dropped IPv6 Ping Test Target IP Address Enter the Target IPv6 Address of the host Interface Name Enter the Target Interface Name of the host Repeat Pinging for Check the Infinite times radio button which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped Or the user may opt to choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by entering a number between 1 and 255 Use this parameter to set the datagram size of the packet or the number of bytes in each ping packet Users may set a size between 1 and 6000 bytes with a default setting of 100 bytes Timeout Select a timeout period between 1 and 10 seconds for this Ping message to reach its destination If the packet fails to find the IPv6 address in this specified time the Ping packet will be dropped Click Start to initiate the Ping program Local Loopback Ports Settings The Local Loopback Ports Settings are used to start or stop the in
69. contained within them Click the D Link logo to go to the D Link website Presents a graphical near real time image of the front panel of the Switch This area displays the Switch s ports and expansion modules showing port activity duplex mode or flow control depending on the specified mode Various areas of the graphic can be selected for performing management functions including port configuration Areas Presents switch information based on your selection and the entry of configuration data NOTICE Any changes made to the Switch configuration during the 5 current session must be saved in the Save Changes web menu explained below or use the command line interface CLI command save Web Pages When you connect to the management mode of the Switch with a web browser a login window is displayed Enter a user name and password to access the Switch s management mode 4 Below is a list and description of the main folders available in the web interface Configuration A detailed discussion about configuring some of the basic functions of the Switch accessing the System information Serial Port Settings IP Address Interface Settings IPv6 Route Settings IPv6 Neighbor Settings Port Configuration Static ARP Settings User Accounts System Log Configuration System Severity Settings DHCP Relay Out of Band Management Settings External Alarm Settings DHCP Auto Configuration Settings MAC Address Aging Time Web Settings
70. create filtering mask i i E i y i i i i i i j E a E Ei i i MAC Address Source MAC Mask C Destination MAC Mask lt 802 1P Ethernet Type C Ethernet Type Figure 6 4 Add Ethernet ACL Profile window Click on the boxes at the top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the correct information and click Create To return to the Access Profile List page click Back The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Ethernet ACL To configure this profile select the Ethernet ACL and use the drop down menu to choose between tagged or untagged Source MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address Destination MAC Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address Mask Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 or packet content mask This will change the menu te de to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select Pv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the lPv4 address in each frame s header Select Pv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of ea
71. destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below 205 CPU Access Profile List In the following window the user may globally enable or disable the CPU Interface Filtering State mechanism by using the radio buttons to change the running state To view this window click ACL gt CPU Access Profile List as shown below Choose Enabled to enable CPU packets to be scrutinized by the Switch and Disabled to disallow this scrutiny CPU Interface Filtering State Disabled Enabled Add CPU ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 500 Profile ID Profile Type Owner Type Figure 6 28 CPU Access Profile List window This window displays the CPU Access Profile List entries created on the Switch one CPU access profile of each type has been created for explanatory purposes To view the configurations for an entry click the corresponding Show Details button To add an entry to the CPU Acces Profile List click the Add CPU ACL Profile button This will open the Add CPU ACL Profile window as shown below To remove all CPU Access Profile List entries click the Delete All button The Switch supports four CPU Access Profile types Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration IP IPv4 address based profile configuration IPv6 address based profile configuration and Packet Content Mask The wind
72. device will assign User privilege to this user RADIUS Accounting Settings The Accounting feature of the Switch uses a remote RADIUS server to collect information regarding events occurring on the Switch The following is a list of information that will be sent to the RADIUS server when an event triggers the Switch to send these informational packets e Account Session ID e Username e Account Status Type e Service Type e Account Terminate Cause e NAS IP Address e Account Authentication e NAS Identifier e Account Delay Time e Calling Station ID e Account Session Time There are three types of Accounting that can be enabled on the Switch Network When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when network events occur on the Switch Shell When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when a user either logs in logs out or times out on the Switch using the console Telnet or SSH System When enabled the Switch will send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when system events occur on the Switch such as a system reset or system boot Remember this feature will not work properly unless a RADIUS Server has first been configured This RADIUS server will format store and manage the information collected here To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt RADIUS Accounting Settings as shown below 179
73. et bo 175 OG IVS A res tse se ee a a tate a aeadeiegea aes ecueseut eee nee 176 Enable Metodista A e 177 Local ENE PASSION dde Lio a 178 RADIOS ACCOUNTING SENGS ere en a dla al OL ale es caf 179 MAG Dased Access COMO unta aaa dos 180 Notes About MAC based Access Control ccccccccccccceececeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseaaaausaeseeeeeeeeseseeseaaaaaagseeeeees 180 MAC based Access Contra SellingS id dl os 180 MAC based Access Control Local SettingS ccccccoonoooconnccnnncnonononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 182 VVED AUINOMUCATION andadas cin 183 CONAIOAS ANG AS A 184 Web based Access Control SEUS oca 184 Web based Access Control User Selina cata iii tt 185 A e 186 NetBIOS Filt rng SUN A A E A A eed aunls 186 1a O E E E E E A T 187 ACE Configuration Wizard ii da 187 ACCOSS PTOS orse od wuts suneataslegeteteceantades adeucecn oun vages eE ONENEN 188 GRUIMe taco FENNO anen aaa ented Goren eerste aecolets 205 CPRULACCESS Prole St a dies 206 PGI TAINO Cl rr PROA Pee E OO En fonds a bea enatetentenisnmauctieuee der tesnccb endl Zeneseomencaniieat 217 PIG THIOW Mete Facial aaa val te aaian aaan bel dtarameadimeiet 217 MONITONMO siria ii id 220 DeVCE StU S ias 220 Cable Diaqnostlicetus cari an en 220 CRU OUNSI asne en edi 221 PoR UI A a r eae eee 222 Packet SIZ Cs ais italia dada coito 222 Memory Uli e od dudo 224 A O iat nee 224 AA OCT A OS 224 UMB
74. fault verification and isolation as defined by 802 1ag Ethernet CFM frames have a special Ether Type 0x8902 All CFM messages are confined to a maintenance domain per VLAN basis There are different message types which are identified by unique Opcode of the CFM frame payload CFM message types that are supported include Continuity Check Message CCM Loopback Message and Response LBM LBR and Linktrace Message and Response LTM and LTR CFM Port Settings This table is used to enable or disable the connectivity fault management function on a per port basis CFM is disabled on all ports by default To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Port Settings as shown below 123 State Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 78 CFM Port Settings window Enter the port list you wish to Enable and click Apply CFM CCM PDUs Forwarding Mode This window is used to configure the CFM CCM PDU forwarding mode on the Switch By default the CCM message is handled and forwarded by software The software can handle the packet based on behaviour defined by the standard Under a strict environment there may be substantial amount of CCM packets and it will consume a substantial amount of CPU resources To meet the performance requirement the handling of CCM can be changed to hardware mode To view this window click L2 Featur
75. gt link up lt link state gt Informational Port link down Port lt portNum gt link down Informational Successful login through Successful login through Console Username Informational Warning unsuccessful Console Console lt username gt lt username gt Successful login through Web Successful login through Web Username eb Informational lt username gt Login failed through Web Login failed through Web Username lt username gt Warning Logout through Web Logout through Web Username lt username gt Informational SSL Successful login through Successful login through Web SSL Username Informational Web SSL lt username gt Login failed through Login failed through Web SSL Username Warning Web SSL lt username gt Logout through Web SSL Logout through Web SSL Username lt username gt _ Informational Web SSL session timed out Web SSL session timed out Username Informational lt username gt Telnet Successful login through Successful login through Telnet Username Informational Telnet lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Telnet Login failed through Telnet Username lt username gt Warning IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Logout through Telnet Logout through Telnet Username lt username gt IP _ Informational lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Telnet session timed out Telnet session timed out User
76. implement changes made DDM Bias Current Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the threshold of the bias current for specific ports on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt DDM gt DDM Bias Current Threshold Settings as shown below From Port To Port High Alarm Low Alarm High Warning Low Warning High Alarm ma Low Alarm mA High Warning ma Low Warning mA Figure 2 81 DDM Bias Current Threshold Settings window The following fields can be configured Parameter Description This is the highest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the alarm will be taken This is the lowest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the alarm is taken 63 Low Warning This is the lowest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the warning is taken High Warning This is the highest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the warning is taken Click Apply to implement changes made DDM Tx Power Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the threshold of Tx power for specific ports on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt DDM gt DDM Tx Power Threshold Settings as shown below From Port To Port High Alarm Low Alarm Hi
77. information information timeout and information updates The changing type includes any data update insert remove This functions controls the local LLDP agent and allows it to send and receive LLDP frames on the ports This option contains TX RX TX And RX or Disabled TX the local LLDP agent can only transmit LLDP frames RX the local LLDP agent can only receive LLDP frames TX And RX the local LLDP agent can both transmit and receive LLDP frames Disabled the local LLDP agent can neither transmit nor receive LLDP frames The defaut value is TX And RX Subtype Used to specify the type of address that will be used either Pv4 or IPv6 Action Used to Enable or Disable the advertise management address function based on port Address Enter the Pv4 or IPv6 address as previously specified For multi IP addresses you can enter any IP or create a new IP interface that you want to add Click Apply to implement changes made 118 LLDP Management Address List This window is used to find the LLDP management address information on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Management Address List as shown below Address Subtype Advertising Ports 10 24 73 21 Unknown eds A UA Figure 3 68 LLDP Management Address List window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Address Use the drop down menu to select either the Pv4 or IPv6 Address Enter the management
78. instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified e 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to 211 the 15th byte 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window CPU ACL Profile Details Profile ID Profile Type Owner Type Offset 0 15 Show All Profiles Figure 6 36 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for Packet Content To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile To configure the Access Rules for Ethernet open the CPU Access Profile List window and click Add View Rules for an Ethernet entry This will open the following window Action Ethernet Permit Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 37 CPU Access Rule List window for Ethernet To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding Delete Rules button To add a new Access Rule click the Add Rule button sda Access Rule Profile Information Prof
79. is an IPv6 function used similarly to IGMP snooping in IPv4 It is used to discover ports on a VLAN that are requesting multicast data Instead of flooding all ports on a selected VLAN with multicast traffic MLD snooping will only forward multicast data to ports that wish to receive this data through the use of queries and reports produced by the requesting ports and the source of the multicast traffic MLD snooping is accomplished through the examination of the layer 3 part of an MLD control packet transferred between end nodes and a MLD router When the Switch discovers that this route is requesting multicast traffic it adds the port directly attached to it into the correct IPv6 multicast table and begins the process of forwarding multicast traffic to that port This entry in the multicast routing table records the port the VLAN ID and the associated multicast IPv6 multicast group address and then considers this port to be a active listening port The active listening ports are the only ones to receive multicast group data MLD Control Messages Three types of messages are transferred between devices using MLD snooping These three messages are all defined by three ICMPv6 packet headers labeled 130 131 and 132 1 Multicast Listener Query Similar to the IGMPv2 Host Membership Query for IPv4 and labeled as 130 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message Is sent by the router to ask if any link is requesting multicast data There are two types
80. menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header IPv6 Class Checking this field will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 IPv6 Flow Label Checking this field will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets IPv6 Address IPv6 Source Address Enter an IPv6 address to be used as the source address mask IPv6 Destination Address Enter an IPv6 address that will be used as the destination address mask NOTE At any one time the user can only choose IPv6 class and IPv6 Flow Label together or IPv6 Address by itself Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory 210 To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window CPU ACL
81. might cause restrictions on some of their configurations requiring intense processing of VLAN mapping tables which may exceed the VLAN mapping limit Q in Q uses a single service provider VLAN SPVLAN for customers who have multiple VLANs Customer s VLAN IDs are segregated within the service provider s network even when they use the same customer specific VLAN ID Q in Q expands the VLAN space available while preserving the customer s original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each new frame To view this window click L2 Features gt QinQ gt QinQ Settings as shown below 19 Apply Apply Add Inner Tagthex Os Os ox Cl Disabled QinQ Global Settings Disabled Enabled Inner TPID Ox 8100 hex gt 0x1 Or From Port To Port Role Missdrop Outer TPID Lise Inner Priority Disabled Ox 18100 Disabled Missdrop Outer TPID Lise Inner Priority Add Inner Tag Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled OxeeAG Oxeg AG OxeeAG OxeGAG OxeGAG OxeaAG OxeGAG OxeGAG OxeGAG OxeGAG OxeGAG OxGGAG Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 13 QinQ Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Fro
82. number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server AccessAccepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessRejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessChallenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or known types are not included as malformed access responses Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout UnknownType
83. number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface was delayed because the medium was busy 232 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual CRC Error Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary LateColl Counts the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet ExColl Excessive Collisions The number of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions SingColl Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision An estimate of the total number of collisions on this network segment Show Hide Check whether or not to display ExDefer CRCError LateColl ExColl SingColl and Collision errors Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphi Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Port Access Control The following windows are used to monitor 802 1X statistics of the Switch on a per port basis RADIUS Authentication This table contains information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authentication client
84. on the client side of the RADIUS authentication protocol To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Authentication as shown below RADIUS Authentication _ Figure 7 18 RADIUS Authentication window The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left hand corner The following information is displayed Parameter Description InvalidServerAddresses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets received from unknown addresses identifier The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS authentication client This is not necessarily the same 233 Tas yaar in MIB Serverlndex The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client shares a secret with AuthServerAddress The conceptual table listing the RADIUS authentication servers with which the client shares a secret ServerPortNumber The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server RoundTripTime The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server AccessRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions AccessRetransmissions The
85. packet storm packet storm Login failed through SSH from Login failed through SSH from lt userlP gt due to AAA user due to AAA server server timeout or improper configuration Username timeout or improper lt username gt MAC lt mac gt configuration Q Q x 5 5 5 5 IP MAC Unauthenticated IP address Unauthenticated IP MAC address and discarded by PORT and discard by IP MAC port IP MAC port binding IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macadar gt a 5 5 Binding binding Port lt portNum gt 273 Unauthenticated IP address Unauthenticated IP MAC address and discarded by encountered and discarded by IP MAC port binding IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macadar gt IP MAC port binding Port lt portNum gt Loop back LBD loop occurred Port lt portNum gt LBD loop occurred Port blocked Critical Detection LBD port recovered Loop Port lt portNum gt LBD port recovered Loop detection Informational detection restarted restarted LBD loop occurred Packet Port lt portNum gt VID lt vid gt LBD loop occurred Packet Critical discard begun discard begun LBD recovered Loop Port lt portNum gt VID lt vid gt LBD recovered Loop Informational detection restarted detection restarted Loop VLAN number overflow Loop VLAN number overflow Informational DOS Spoofing attack Possible spoofing attack from lt mac gt Port lt portNum gt Critical JWAC JWAC login successful User
86. parameter to set the Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally on the switch RSTP Select this parameter to set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally on the Switch MSTP Select this parameter to set the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP globally on the Switch Forwarding BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Disabled Bridge Max Age The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate 6 40 Sec through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has Spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 Bridge Hello Time The Hello Time can be set from 7 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two 1 10 Sec transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge Bridge Forward Delay The Forward Delay can be from
87. port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost 100Mbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 value 1 200000000 Define a value between 1 and 200000000 to determine the external cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 111 Setting this parameter as Yes will set the ports to send out BPDU packets to other bridges requesting information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP the port will be capable to migrate from 802 1D STP to 802 1w RSTP Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being upgraded to 802 1w RSTP on all or some portion of the segment Choosing the True parameter designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status Choosing the Auto parameter will indicate that the port will be able to automatically enable edge port status if needed Choosing the True parameter indicates a point to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A p2p value of false indicat
88. power threshold settings Browse DDM Status List This window displays the current operating digital diagnostic monitoring parameters and their values on the SFP module for specified ports To view this window click Configuration gt DDM gt Browse DDM Status List as shown below Port List e g 1 3 9 SC Dat Ports a un E Temperature Celsius Voltage Vv Bias Current mi Tx Power rv Re Power rv ll 1 p 3 a a A p 2 E 3 E E E 4 a E a 5 E E E F E E E 7 r E E a r E E E 3 g 5 r 5 E z z 5 E z E Ri Figure 2 77 Browse DDM Status List window To view the status for a specific port or list of ports enter the port list and click Find To display the status for all ports check the All Ports box and click Find DDM Settings The DDM settings window allows the user to configure the action that will occur for specific ports when an exceeding alarm threshold or warning threshold event is encountered To view this window click Configuration gt DDM gt DDM Settings as shown below 61 Trap Enabled Log Enabled From Port 01 ad To Port 01 Enabled shutdown DOM State Shutdown Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Hote The Portis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 istare not SFP Portis Figure 2 78 DDM Settings
89. select the priority and click Apply SRED Simple random early detection SRED is a simplified RED mechanism based on ASIC capability Random Early Detection RED is a congestion avoidance mechanism at the gateway in packet switched networks RED gateways keep the average queue size low while allowing occasional bursts of packets in the queue The switch provides support for SRED through active queue management by probabilistic dropping of incoming colored packets Active queue management is a class of algorithms that attempt to proactively drop or mark frames before congestion becomes excessive The goal is to detect the onset of persistent congestion and take proactive action so that TCP sources contributing to the congestion back off gracefully insuring good network utilization while minimizing frame loss This proactive approach starts discarding specific colored packets before the packet buffer becomes full If this queue depth is less than the threshold there is minimal or no congestion and the packet is enqueued If congestion is detected the packet is dropped or queued based on the DSCP SRED Settings To view this window click QoS gt SRED gt SRED Settings as shown below ae SRED Global Settings Disabled Enabled From Port To Port Class ID Drop Green Threshold Low 0 100 Threshold Highf0 100i Drop Rate Low Drop Rate High Jan Disabled Y Drop Green Threshold Low Threshold High Drop Rate Low Drop Rate High Disabled
90. send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been both detected and cleared by the Switch This function cannot be implemented in the Hardware mode When Drop is chosen in the Action field Click Apply to implement the settings made NOTE Traffic Control cannot be implemented on ports that are set for Link Aggregation Port Trunking 135 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual NOTE Ports that are in the Shutdown forever mode will be seen as Discarding in Spanning Tree windows and implementations though these ports will still be forwarding BPDUs to the Switch s CPU NOTE Ports that are in Shutdown Forever mode will be seen as link down in all windows and screens until the user recovers these ports 802 1p Default Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802 1p priority to each port on the Switch To view this window click QoS gt 802 1p Default Priority as shown below 602 1p Default Priority Settings From Port To Fort Priority 602 1p Default Priority Table Port Priority Effective Priority 0 _ AA 2 2 J o f E o 0 f AAA AAA CI A A A F A B o D f 0 0 j 0 O 0 O O 0 0 0 Figure 4 5 802 1p Default Priority window This window allows you to assign a default 802 1p priority to any given port on the Switch The priority queues are numbered from 0 the lowest priority to 7 the highest priority Click Apply to i
91. send notifications to configured SNMP trap receiver s when Interval 5 3600 an LLDP change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor To set the LLDP Notification Interval enter a value in seconds 5 to 3600 Click Apply to implement changes made 117 LLDP Port Settings This window is used to display the LLDP port settings on the Switch The ports can be individually configured to send notifications to configured SNMP trap receivers To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Port Settings To Part Notification Admin Status 01 v Disabled Action Address Note The IPy4ilPyv6 Address should be the Switch s Address Motification Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Admin Status Tx and Rix Tx and Rix Tx and Rix Tx and Rix Tx and Rix Tx and Rix Tx and Rix Tx and Rix TH and Rix TH and Rix TH and Rix TH and Rix Figure 3 67 LLDP Port Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the pull down menu to select a range of ports to be configured Notification Use the pull down menu to Enable or Disable each port for sending change notifications to the configured SNMP trap receiver s when an LLDP data change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor The notification will include new available
92. sends MLD query packets It the state is Disabled then the switch cannot play the role as a querier Data Driven Learning Aged Used to Enable or Disable the aging out of MLD Snooping data driven learning for Out the specified VLAN Version Used to configure the version of MLD used on switch The default value is 2 Querier Role This read only field describes the current querier state of the Switch whether Querier which will send out Multicast Listener Query Messages to links or Non Querier which will not send out Multicast Listener Query Messages 99 r yan M7 AN A 1OIJIDNCOCOCOC AFTAN 3 EMO a N a J mo MY f innlk Je hknaur at O af A 2 lanar Na s UU 1Z UCG S 53 00 1201 Series aver z 11qa0 11 inernerl switcn User Manu a L J VUU I1Z DGO 9 U0 IZG DEC eS Layer z GI g abit Ethernet owltcn User Manual Click Apply to implement any changes made and lt lt Back to return to the MLD Snooping Settings window To modify the router port settings click the hyperlinked Modify Router Port as shown below LAN Name default Router IP Table Router IF Figure 3 43 MLD Snooping Router IP Settings Modify window MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings This window is used to configure the rate of MLD control packets that are allowed per port or per VLAN To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings as shown below Port List Po 13 8 OVLAN List Po 09 1 3 6 Rat
93. ta O EE CI a A E f ION TI IO DA II IO o Upload Firmware upgraded Download successfully Firmware upgraded by lt console telnet WEB SSH Informational SNMP SIM gt successfully Username lt username gt Firmware upgrade by lt console telnet WEB SSH Warning SNMP SIM gt was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Configuration successfully downloaded by lt console Informational telnet WEB SSH SNMP SIM gt Username lt username gt Firmware upgrade was unsuccessful Configuration successfully downloaded Configuration download was unsuccessful Configuration download by lt console telnet WEB SSH SNMP SIM gt was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Configuration successfully uploaded Configuration successfully uploaded by lt console Informational telnet WEB SSH SNMP SIM gt Username lt username gt Configuration upload by lt console telnet WEB SSH Warning SNMP SIM gt was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Configuration upload was unsuccessful Informational Log message successfully uploaded Log message successfully uploaded by lt console telnet WEB SSH SNMP SIM gt Username lt username gt 267 Log message upload was Log message upload by lt console telnet WEB SSH SNMP SIM gt was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Interface Port link up Port lt portNum
94. the client to the stated web page If the client does not reach this web page yet does not receive a Fail message the client will already be authenticated and therefore should refresh the current browser window or attempt to open a different web page Web based Access Control User Settings This window is used to configure the Switch for Web Authentication Settings To view this window click Security gt Web Authenication gt Web based Access Control User Settings as shown below Uye eL Create User User Mame VLAN Mame Password Confirmation ee Total Entries 0 Wiser Name VLAN Name Figure 5 47 Web based Access Control User Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description 185 Enter the username of up to 15 alphanumeric characters of the guest wishing to access the web through this process This field is for administrators who have selected local as their web based authenticator VLAN Name Enter the VLAN name of a previously configured VLAN to which the successfully authenticated web user will be mapped Password Enter the password the administrator has chosen for the selected user This field is case sensitive and must be a complete alphanumeric string This field is for administrators who have selected local as their web based authenticator Confirmation Re enter the password Click Apply to implement changes NetBIOS Filtering NetBIOS is an application programmi
95. the path and the filename of the key file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c pkey der NOTE Enabling the SSL command will disable the web based switch management To log on to the Switch again the header of the URL must begin with https Entering anything else into the address field of the web browser will result in an error and no authentication will be granted 167 SSH SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services over an insecure network It allows a secure login to remote host computers a safe method of executing commands on a remote end node and will provide secure encrypted and authenticated communication between two non trusted hosts SSH with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today s networking environment It is a powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH client and the Switch the SSH server are as follows 1 Create a user account with admin level access using the User Accounts window in the Configuration folder This is identical to creating any other admin level User Account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to logon to the Switch once a secure communication path has been established using the SSH prot
96. the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Click Apply to implement changes made 17 Subnet VLAN Subnet VLAN Settings The subnet VLAN settings are used to create find or delete a subnet VLAN entry A subnet VLAN entry is an IP subnet based VLAN classification rule If an untagged or priority tagged IP packet is received on a port its source IP address will be used to match the subnet VLAN entries If the source IP is in the subnet of an entry the packet will be classified to the VLAN defined for this subnet To view this window click L2 Features gt Subnet VLAN gt Subnet VLAN Settings as shown below Create Subnet VLAN VLAN Mame IPyd Metwork Address fe 9 10 90 90 90 255 0 0 0 of 10 490 90 908 Find Delete Subnet VLAN VLAN Name fe O IPvs Network Address O VLAN List EA O IPv6 Network Address e 9 8FFE 164 Total Entries O IPAddress subnet hask Priority Figure 3 11 Subnet VLAN Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name to be associated with the subnet VLAN ID The VLAN ID to be associated with the subnet IPv4 Network Is used to specify an IPv4 network address The format is ipaddress prefix length The prefix Address length of the IPv4 network address cannot be greater than 64 IPv6 Network Is used to specify an IPv6 network address The format is ipaddre
97. those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Ingress Filtering A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an ingress port If ingress filtering is enabled for a port the Switch will examine the VLAN information in the packet header if present and decide whether or not to forward the packet If the packet is tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will first determine if the ingress port itself is a member of the tagged VLAN If it is not the packet will be dropped If the ingress port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN If it is not the packet is dropped If the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to its attached network segment If the packet is not tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will tag the packet with its own PVID as a VID if the port is a tagging port The switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the same VLAN has the 70 same VID as the ingress p
98. to which other switches in the group including the CS do not belong 91 The Upgrade to v1 6 To better improve SIM management the DGS 3700 Series has been upgraded to version 1 6 in this release Many improvements have been made including 1 The Commander Switch CS now has the capability to automatically rediscover member switches that have left the SIM group either through a reboot or web malfunction This feature is accomplished through the use of Discover packets and Maintain packets that previously set SIM members will emit after a reboot Once a MS has had its MAC address and password saved to the CS s database if a reboot occurs in the MS the CS will keep this MS information in its database and when a MS has been rediscovered it will add the MS back into the SIM tree automatically No configuration will be necessary to rediscover these switches There are some instances where pre saved MS switches cannot be rediscovered For example if the Switch is still powered down if it has become the member of another group or if it has been configured to be a Commander Switch the rediscovery process cannot occur 2 The topology map now includes new features for connections that are a default 0 27 00 member of a port trunking group It will display the soeed and number of Ethernet connections creating this port trunk group as shown in the adjacent picture Port Speed 2xC default 38 29 00 3 This version will support multip
99. to this server RoundTripTime The time interval between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent This does not include retransmissions Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct Delay have been updated as well as those in which they remain the same The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server MalformedResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets which contained invalid authenticators received from this server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or a retransmission Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout it may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server i
100. using SPVLANs thus greatly regulating traffic and routing on the Service Provider switch This information is then routed to the Service Provider s main network and regarded there as one VLAN with one set of protocols and one routing behavior Regulations for Double VLANs Some rules and regulations apply with the implementation of the Double VLAN procedure 1 2 All ports must be configured for the SPVID and its corresponding TPID on the Service Provider s edge switch All ports must be configured as Access Ports or Uplink ports Access ports can only be Ethernet ports while Uplink ports must be Gigabit ports Provider Edge switches must allow frames of at least 1522 bytes or more due to the addition of the SPVID tag Access Ports must be an un tagged port of the service provider VLANs Uplink Ports must be a tagged port of the service provider VLANs The switch cannot have both double and normal VLANs co existing Once the change of VLAN is made all Access Control lists are cleared and must be reconfigured Once Double VLANs are enabled GVRP must be disabled All packets sent from the CPU to the Access ports must be untagged The following functions will not operate when the switch is in Double VLAN mode e Guest VLANs 13 e Web based Access Control e IP Multicast Routing e GVRP e All Regular 802 1Q VLAN functions 802 1Q VLAN The 802 1Q VLAN window lists all previously configured VLANs by VLAN ID and VLAN Name
101. where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch A 5 A NOTE The Factory default IP address for the Switch is 10 90 90 90 This opens the management module s user authentication window as seen below DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Connect to 10 24 73 21 The server 10 24 73 21 at requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection Remember my password Figure 1 1 Enter Network Password dialog Enter admin in both the User Name and Password fields and click OK This will open the Web based user interface The Switch management features available in the web based manager are explained below Web based User Interface The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management windows allows you to view performance statistics and permits you to graphically monitor the system status Areas of the User Interface The figure below shows the user interface The user interface is divided into three distinct areas as described in the table C ft Y 10 24 73 21 gt Br amp LA a 3 y 56 on a E E DAI DGS 370012 12 34 56 7 SICA MGMT 48VDC 164 MAX 4 R y y ore Refresh Interval y i Building Networks for People o 4 acn pee b gt ia AC OFF AC LINE 100 240 VAC O 50 60H2 1 54 MAX DC
102. window The following fields can be configured Parameter Description Trap Log Specifies whether or not to send the trap and log when the operating parameter exceeds the alarm or warning threshold From Port To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured Specifies to Enable or Disable the DDM settings state Specifies whether or not to shutdown the port when the operating parameter exceeds the Alarm or Warning threshold Click Apply to implement changes made DDM Temperature Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the DDM Temperature Threshold Settings for specific ports on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt DDM gt DDM Temperature Threshold Settings as shown below From Port To Port High Alarm Low Alarm High Warning Low Warning Celsius Low Alarm Celsius High Warning Celsius Low Waring Celsius Figure 2 79 DDM Temperature Threshold Settings window The following fields can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured This is the highest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the alarm will be taken Low Alarm This is the lowest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the alarm is taken High Warning This is the highest threshold for the warning When the oper
103. 00 255 Flow Label __ e g 0 FFFFF Rule Action Action Time Range Name Figure 6 44 Add Access Rule window for IPv6 To set the Access Rule for IPv6 adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Enter a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered Enter an IPv6 Class The class can be between O 255 Flow Label Configuring this field in hex form will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non 215 Time Range Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Rule List window to view the following window IPv6 Class Show All Rules Figure 6 45 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for IPv6 To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile To configure the Ac
104. 0000 Rx Rate No Limited Show All Rules Figure 6 27 Access Rule Detail Information Packet Content NOTE Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard for finding a host s hardware address MAC Address However ARP is vulnerable as it can be easily spoofed and utilized to attack a LAN For a more detailed explanation on how ARP works and how to employ D Link s advanced unique Packet Content ACL to prevent ARP spoofing attack please see Appendix B at the end of this manual CPU Interface Filtering Due to a chipset limitation and needed extra switch security the Switch incorporates CPU Interface filtering This added feature increases the running security of the Switch by enabling the user to create a list of access rules for packets destined for the Switch s CPU interface Employed similarly to the Access Profile feature previously mentioned CPU interface filtering examines Ethernet IP and Packet Content Mask packet headers destined for the CPU and will either forward them or filter them based on the user s implementation As an added feature for the CPU Filtering the Switch allows the CPU filtering mechanism to be enabled or disabled globally permitting the user to create various lists of rules without immediately enabling them Creating an access profile for the CPU is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP
105. 1 4094 GYRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type 01 v 01 v Disabled v Enabled vw All v Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Disabled Enabled All Figure 3 19 GVRP Settings window 84 The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port These two fields allow you to specify the range of ports that will be included in the Port based VLAN that you are creating using the 802 1Q Port Settings window GVRP The Group VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enables the port to dynamically become a member of a VLAN GVRP is Disabled by default PVID The read only field in the 802 1Q Port Table shows the current PVID assignment for each port which may be manually assigned to a VLAN when created in the 802 1Q Port Settings table The Switch s default is to assign all ports to the default VLAN with a VID of 1 The PVID is used by the port to tag outgoing untagged packets and to make filtering decisions about incoming packets If the port is specified to accept only tagged frames as tagging and an untagged packet is forwarded to the port for transmission the port will add an 802 1Q tag using the PVID to write the VID in the tag When the packet arrives at its destinatio
106. 12 DGS 3700 12G Web Management Tool folder The Device Information window shows the Switch s MAC Address assigned by the factory and unchangeable the Boot PROM Version Firmware Version Hardware Version and Serial Number as well as other information about different settings on the Switch This information is helpful to keep track of PROM and firmware updates and to obtain the Switch s MAC address for entry into another network device s address table if necessary In addition this window displays the status of functions on the Switch to quickly assess their current global status Some functions are hyper linked to their configuration window for easy access from the Device Information window Device Information Device Type system Mame System Location System Contact Boot PROM Version Firmware Version Hardware Version serial Murmber OGS 3700 12 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Build 1 00 6002 Build 1 00 8031 Al Device Status and Quick Configurations SNTF Spanning Tree SHhiP Safeguard Engine System Log SSL GVRP Password Encryption Telnet Web System Information Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled TCP 23 Settings Enabled TCP 80 Settings settings settings Settings settings Settings settings settings settings MAC Address IP Address Wask Gateway Management LAN Login Timeout Minutes Dual Image system Time Jumbo Frame MLD Snooping IGMP Snoo
107. 2 1 1 2 100 1 2 0 3 swL2PortLoopRestart 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 102 1 1 2 100 1 2 0 A swL2VlanLoopOccurred 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 102 1 1 2 100 1 2 0 5 swL2VlanLoopRestart 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 102 1 1 2 100 1 2 0 6 swPowerStatusChgSeverity V2 EQUIPMENT Warning MIB swFanFailureSeverity V2 EQUIPMENT Warning MIB MIB swMacBasedAuthLoggedSucc ess o SwMacBasedAuthLoggedFail MBA MIB SwMacBasedAuthAgesOut MBA MIB swExternalAlarm V2 EQUIPMENT Warning MIB swDdmAlarmTrap DDM MIB swDdmWarningTrap DDM MIB swL2PortLoopOccurred swL2PortLoopRestart swL2VlanLoopOccurred swL2VlanLoopRestart 277 Appendix C Glossary 1000BASE SX A short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 500 meters 1000BASE LX A long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 kilometers 1000BASE T 1000Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5E cable 100BASE FX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over fiber 100BASE TX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5 and Type 1 Twisted Pair cabling 10BASE T The IEEE 802 3 specification for Ethernet over Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cabling aging The automatic removal of dynamic entries from the Switch Database which have timed out and are no longer valid ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode A connection oriented transmission protocol based on fixed length cells packets ATM is designed to carry a complete range of user traffic i
108. 2 Features gt PVID Auto Assign Settings as shown below PVID Auto Assign State Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 3 22 PVID Auto Assign Settings window 86 Port Trunking Understanding Port Trunk Groups Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data pipeline DGS 3700 Series supports up to 6 port trunk groups with 2 to 8 ports in each group A potential bit rate of 8000 Mbps can be achieved An Example of Link Aggregation Ethernet Backbone Uplink PU Fm Port Trunk Group ass mom a Soo ME 4 coososscosscoc TS Re A A A A A A Co 3p ccocorcos ococococooodo co pes 2 aston tus ten y pay pa q weap yoa e tin D Legg ia tegt Comte Contar om bre teat kgl del Deol Legal bel hogd Le hol bead hogt Last hapi bosd hapi ag laa beget baa leo D J eee Gia 100 Mbps 100 Mbps 100 Mbps m e pe 10 100 Mbps Connection 10 100 Mbps Connection 10 100 Mbps Connection oY 5 End Station Clients Figure 3 23 Example of Port Trunk Group The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port Data transmitted to a specific host destination address will always be transmitted over the same port in a trunk group This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the same order they were sent NOTE If any ports within the trunk group become disconnected packets intended for the disconnected ports will be load shared among the other unlinked ports of the li
109. 2 byte 10 90 offset chunk 5 Ox2A 540000 adr IP Last 2 bytey 90 90 port 1 27 deny Create access profile 1 To match Ethernet Type and source MAC address Configure access profile 1 Only ifthe gateway s ARP packet that contains the correct Source WAC in Ethernet frame can pass through the switch Create access profile 2 The first Chunk starts from Chunk 3 mask for Ethernet Type Blue in Table 6 13 14 bytes The second Chunk starts from Chunk 7 mask for sender IP First 2 byte in ARP packet Green in Table 6 29th amp 30 bytes The third Chunk starts from Chunk mask for sender IP Last 2 byte in ARP packet Brown in Table 6 31 amp 32 bytes Configure access profile 2 The rest ARP packets whose sender IP claim they are the gateway s IP will be dropped 266 Appendix B System Log Entries The following table lists all possible entries and their corresponding meanings that will appear in the System Log of this Switch Configuration saved to flash Configuration saved to flash Username lt username gt Informational System log saved to flash System log saved to flash Username lt username gt log System log saved to flash Username lt username gt to flash Username lt username gt Informational Configuration and log saved pisco and log saved to flash Username Informational to flash lt username gt internat Power failed Internal Power failed Power failed Crtica A A erapos
110. 35 Timeout 1 255 Enter the timeout value in seconds 7 to 255 the default value is 5 Retransmit 1 255 Set the retransmit value in seconds 7 to 255 the default value is 2 Key Set the key the same as that of the RADIUS server Maximum length of the entry is 32 Max 32 characters bytes 162 Confirm Key Re enter the previously entered Key Click Apply to implement changes Initialize Port s This window allows you to initialize ports for the 802 1X Settings This window will appear in the folder when the enable 802 1x command is entered into the command line interface or when the authentication mode is changed to Port Based or MAC Based in the 802 1X Global Settings window To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s as shown below Sala From Port To Port Initialize Port Table Backend_State Figure 5 26 Initialize Port s window To initialize port s use the drop down menu to select the port s and click Apply Reauthenticate Port s This window allows you to reauthenticate ports for the 802 1X Settings This window will appear in the folder when the enable 802 1x command is entered into the command line interface or when the authentication mode is changed to Port Based or MAC Based in the 802 1X Global Settings window To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s as shown below Bap FEAF Par _ i mr E Reauthentic
111. 4 to 30 seconds Any port on the Switch spends this 4 30 Sec time in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state TX Hold Count 1 10 Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval The count can be specified from 7 to 10 The default is 6 109 Max Hops 1 20 Used to set the number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU bridge protocol data unit packet sent by the Switch will be discarded Each switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero The Switch will then discard the BPDU packet and the information held for the port will age out The user may set a hop count from 7 to 20 The default is 20 NNI BPDU Address Configure NNI port address dot1d Specifies GVRP s bpdu MAC address of NNI port using the definition of 802 1d dotlad Specifies GVRP s pdu MAC address of NNI port using the definition of 802 1ad Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age lt 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age gt 2 x Hello Time 1 second 110 STP Port Settings This window is used to configure the STP Port Settings on the Swtich STP can be set up on a port per port basis To view this window click L2 Features gt Sp
112. 6 3 1 Included Figure 2 46 SNMP View Table window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP view being created Subtree OID Type the Object Identifier OID Subtree for the view The OID identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager View Type Select Included to include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Select Excluded to exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access To implement the new settings click Apply To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete bution 41 SNMP Group Table An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous menu To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Group Table as shown below Add Group Group Mame Read View Mame Write View Marne Motity View Marne Userbased Security Model Security Level SMM Py w SoAuthhoP riw Total Entries 9 Read View Name write View Mame Notify View Mame Wserbased Security Model Security Level initial private private ReadSroup ReadSroup Write Group Write Group Community Community restricted Community Community Community Community Community Community Community Co
113. 8 Connection Allows the user to set the connection timeout The use may set a time between 120 and 600 Timeout 120 600 seconds The default setting is 120 seconds Authfail Attempts Allows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on 2 20 to the SSH Server utilizing the SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts has been exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login The number of maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20 The default setting is 2 Rekey Timeout Using the pull down menu uses this field to set the time period that the Switch will change the 168 Click Apply to implement changes made SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings The SSH Algorithm window allows the configuration of the desired types of SSH algorithms used for authentication encryption There are four categories of algorithms listed and specific algorithms of each may be enabled or disabled by checking the boxes All algorithms are enabled by default To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings as shown below 55H Authentication Mode Settings Password Encryption Algorithm 3DES C BC ARCA Data Integrity Algorithm HMAC MDS Public Key Algorithm HMAC RSA Public Key Host Based Casti 78 CEC Twofish256 AES256 CBC Twofish192 AES192 0BC Twofish128 AES128 CAC Blow fish CAC H
114. 9 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 80 C8 90 BC F6 00 80 C8 CD 25 34 00 05 5D F 9 16 76 D00 0E 46 01 D6 D1 00 50 BA 66 77 56 00 0E A6 F6 A3 16 00 E0 18 D4 63 1 00 13 D4 94 FB 08 00 0 2 6E F 8 30 36 00 03 1B 58 41 56 00 1D 60 E7 B5 CO D00 50 BA F4 C 4 57 Ma Ta Ma AN dAd Ma Local Broadcast Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic s cm mm oe Figure 7 27 Browse ARP Table window VLAN The following windows are used to configure the VLAN settings of the Switch Browse VLAN This window allows the VLAN status for each of the Switch s ports to be viewed by VLAN Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button To view this window click Monitoring gt VLAN gt Browse VLAN as shown below Browse VLAN vo C WLAN ID 1 VLAN Name default VLAN Type Static Advertisement Enabled Total Entries 2 Note T Tagged Port U Untagged Port F Forbidden Port Figure 7 28 Browse VLAN window 242 Show VLAN Ports This window allows the VLAN status for each of the Switch s ports to be viewed by VLAN Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button To view this window click Monitoring gt VLAN gt Show VLAN Ports as shown below Untagged Tagged Dynamic Forbidden
115. AC lt macaddr gt 269 Login failed through Telnet Login failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local authenticated by AAA local method Username method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through SSH Successful login through SSH from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA local authenticated by AAA local method Username method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through SSH Login failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated Warning authenticated by AAA local by AAA local method Username lt username gt MAC method lt macadar gt Successful login through Successful login through Console authenticated by Informational Console authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt AAA none method Successful login through Web Successful login through Web from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA none authenticated by AAA none method Username method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through Successful login through Web SSL from lt userlP gt Informational Web SSL authenticated by jauthenticated by AAA none method Username AAA none method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through Successful login through Telnet from lt userlP gt Informational Telnet authenticated by AAA jauthenticated by AAA none method Username none method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Su
116. ACACS TACACS server or none method the user privilege level is assigned only If the user wants to get admin privilege level the user must use the Enable Admin window to promote his privilege level See the Enable Admin part of this section for more detailed information But when the user logins to the device successfully through RADIUS server or local method 3 kinds of privilege levels can be assigned to the user and the user cannot use the Enable Admin window to promote to admin privilege level To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Login Method Lists as shown below 176 Method List Mame ax 15 characters Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Po M Priority 4 Apply Total Entries 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 default Delete Figure 5 40 Login Method Lists window The Switch contains one Method List that is set and cannot be removed yet can be modified To delete a Login Method List defined by the user click the corressponding Delete button To modify a Login Method List click on its corresponding Edit button To define a Login Method List set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Method List Name Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters Priority 1 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list tacacs Adding this param
117. D Link Building Networks for People User Manual Product Model DGS 3700 Seres Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch Release 1 00 Copyright 2009 All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice O 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of D Link Corporation is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text D Link and the D LINK logo are trademarks of D Link Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products D Link Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own July 2009 P N 651370012005G Table of Contents A daa teecslus Xi Mende RCA COTS rar ol der ed la dt eae 1 eso loo A ae acecacecaaamacaudusa nual seunste dneenencccseance suocauate cuiendeeasaecuecanceacsedsed 1 Notes Notices and C AUTON S sra road 1 Web based Switch Configuration iii 2 o o 2 LOJN Web Manager ops an A a A A NOS 2 Web based Usera a a a aa 3 WEDE A A A OOR RY EA MeO IN ECE S a Pe Ree Pe 4 GOntigUrta lO aaa 6 Device TORI QUOI aria AAA a 7 SY SUS EM OVUM etc A A A ep ateas 7 CARRO PEIN Scarce ts cia 8 PROC SS a ocd Mea a a eee as ie ita act ge ae Aa ad il 9 Setting the Swith s IP Address using the Cons
118. D Snooping gt IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings as shown below TRV Mias MIUT ST GPFOLD jhilale stes Total Entries 2 VLAN ID Max Multicast Group Number Infinite Infinite Figure 3 54 IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings window To add a new lPv6 Max Multicast Group enter the information and click Apply to search for an entry enter the information and click Find 104 Port Mirror The Switch allows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port You can attach a monitoring device to the mirrored port such as a sniffer or an RMON probe to view details about the packets passing through the first port This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting purposes To view this window click L2 Features gt Port Mirror as shown below Pan hirror Target Port Settings State Disabled Enabled Target Port Source Port Sniffer Mode Source Port Settings Sniffer Mode 1 Figure 3 55 Port Mirror window To configure a mirror port 1 Change the status to Enabled 2 Select the Source Port from where you want to the frames to come from 3 Select the Target Port which receives the copies from the source port 4 Click Apply to let the changes take effect NOTE You cannot mirror a fast port onto a slower port For example if you try to mirror the traffic from a 100 Mbps port onto a 10 Mbps port this can cause throughput problems The port you are copying
119. DP State Used to Enable or Disable LLDP on the Switch LLDP Forward When LLDP is disabled this function controls the LLDP packet forwarding It will flood the Message received LLDP packet to all ports that have the same VLAN and will advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN When LLDP is enabled this function does not take effect Message TX This interval controls how often active ports retransmit advertisements to their neighbors To Interval 5 32768 change the packet transmission interval enter a value in seconds 5 to 32768 Message TX Hold This function calculates the Time to Live for creating and transmitting the LLDP advertisements Multiplier 2 10 to LLDP neighbors by changing the multiplier used by an LLDP Switch When the Time to Live for an advertisement expires the advertised data is then deleted from the neighbor Switch s MIB LLDP Reinit The LLDP reinitialization delay interval is the minimum time that an LLDP port will wait before Delay 1 10 reinitializing after receiving an LLDP disable command To change the LLDP Reinit Delay enter a value in seconds 7 to 70 LLDP TX Delay LLDP TX Delay allows the user to change the minimum time delay interval for any LLDP port 1 8192 which will delay advertising any successive LLDP advertisements due to change in the LLDP MIB content To change the LLDP TX Delay enter a value in seconds 7 to 8792 LLDP Notification LLDP Notification Interval is used to
120. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled system Capabilities Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Use the drop down menus to enable or disable the settings for the Basic TLVs Settings Click Apply to implement changes made The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the pull down menu to select a range of ports to be configured 119 Port Description Use the drop down menu to enable or disable port description Use the drop down menu to enable or disable system name System Name System Use the drop down menu to enable or disable system description Description Use the drop down menu to enable or disable system capabilities Capabilities Click Apply to implement changes made LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings LLDP Doti TLVs are organizationally specific TLVs which are defined in IEEE 802 1 and used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of the IEEE 802 1 organizational port vlan ID TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings as shown below EAPOL Doti TL P ID Dott TL Protocol VLAN Doti TL WYLAN Doti TU Protocol Identity
121. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Mis ahala a h h A M M M M meses a a a se se se se se se ss se se se se se se se es es es eC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 E a F A 2 2 a 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 A Figure 4 10 SRED Settings window The following parameters may be set Parameter Description 140 From port To port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Class ID Select the Class ID from 0 7 to configure for the SRED parameters Selecting all will set the parameters configured here for all CoS queues Drop Green Enabled Pobabilistic drop yellow and red colored packets if the queue depth is above the lower threshold and pobabilistic drop green colored packets if the queue depth is above the upper threshold Disabled Pobabilistic drop red colored packets if the queue depth is above the lower threshold and probabilistic drop yellow colored packets if the queue depth is above the upper threshold Green packets will not be dropped even it reach the threshold Threshold Low Threshold Low refers to the drop red packets it might also include yellow packets 0 100 Threshold High Threshold High refers to the drop
122. EEE 802 1p are mapped to the Switch s priority tags as follows Priority O is assigned to the Switch s Q2 queue Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch s QO queue Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 queue Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 queue Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s Q4 queue Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q5 queue Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q6 queue Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q7 queue 131 For strict priority based scheduling any packets residing in the higher priority queues are transmitted first Multiple strict priority queues empty based on their priority tags Only when these queues are empty are packets of lower priority transmitted For weighted round robin queuing the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight For a configuration of 8 CoS queues A H with their respective weight value 8 1 When each queue has 10 outbound packets they are sent in the following sequence A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 A4 B4 C4 D4 ES A5 B5 C5 D5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 A8 AY B8 C7 D6 E5 F4 G3 H2 A10 B9 C8 D7 E6 F5 G4 B10 C9 D8 E7 F6 C10 D9 E8 D10 E9 F7 G5 H3 E10 F8 G6 F9 F10 G7 H4 G8 G9 H5 G10 H6 H10 For weighted round robin queuing if each CoS queue has the same weight value then each CoS queue has an equal opportu
123. GMP Snooping This field is Disabled by default Report Select Enable or Disable for IGMP Snooping report suppression for specified VLANs Suppression Data Driven Allows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping data driven learning for the specified VLAN Learning State Data Driven Allows users to enable or disable aged_out of IGMP Snooping data driven learning for the Learning Aged Out specified VLAN Allows the user to configure the IGMP version used on the Switch The default value is 3 Querier Role This read only field describes the behavior of the router for sending query packets Querier will denote that the router is sending out IGMP query packets Non Querier will denote that the router is not sending out IGMP query packets This field will only read Querier when the Querier State and the State fields have been Enabled To modify the IGMP Snooping Router IP Settings click on the hyperlinked Modify Router Port which will show the following window for the user to configure VLAN Mame default Select All Clear All E L L Select All Clear All 12 Router IP Table NO Router IF Figure 3 30 IGMP Snooping Router IP Settings Edit window 93 IGMP Snooping Rate Limit Settings This table allows the user to configure the rate of IGMP snooping control packets that are allowed per port or VLAN To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Rate Limit Settings as shown below
124. Global State Settings as shown below sFlow Global State Disabled Enabled Apply sFlow Version 1 00 sFlow Address 10 24 73 21 sFlow State Disabled Figure 2 55 Time Range Settings window Select Disabled or Enabled and click Apply sFlow Analyzer Server Settings This window is used to configure the sFlow analyzer server settings You can specify more than one analyzer server with the same IP address but with different UDP port numbers You can have up to four unique combinations of IP address and UDP port numbers To view this window click Configuration gt sFlow gt sFlow Analyzer Server Settings as shown below Analyzer Server ID 1 4 po Owner Mame Timeout 1 2000000 O infinite Collector Address Collector Port 1 65535 6343 Max Datagram Size 300 1400 Total Entries O server ID Owner Timeout DE Collector Address Collector Port hax Datagram Size CCT means Current Countdown Time Figure 2 56 sFlow Analyzer Server Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Analyzer Server ID 1 4 Up to four sFlow Analyzer Servers can be configured Owner Name The entity making use of this sflow analyzer server When owner is set or modified the 48 timeout value will become 400 automatically Timeout 1 2000000 The length of time before the server is timed out When the analyzer server times out all of the flow samplers and counter pollers associated with this a
125. I deebaadtentaa stant caeseseennennamaaesddwmenieannatase 134 902 MO DSTI Proy aa ceietandetictetect commie a nasties cena tadeemataacna amt es 136 vi 802 IP E FIO RI nn A 137 OSS CSC IAG IVS TAA SIMs otitis eee te erect Sd 137 Cos Shedding enera a isis 138 m Band Manage Seling rine ca 139 E a E D A EET ER I A SN ANANI NEE EAI ee T E A E E E T 140 ORED GEUN S sd a ee een ee et 140 SED ROC OUI Aeran E s pel iida ticics 142 DS TTUSESCO MINOS in il da e e el dl EOS eE 142 DSGP Map SeN cod 142 380210 Map 2S SUING S dales wenaacenrees 144 DOCU Vinci beat lwb best dleue awh slash teat seutlmtctettenms 145 LU CN AE A a dos Recents atic emaniac ut a a a 145 Mn E A E E tisvevalgernechsoaddusuanateeenastdelauenicecbees tea A cnetetals 147 PMA Porr BINGIN srar a bd E E A ed 147 IMP Bmdmo Global Seting essene id 147 IMIP BGG Port SUIS at iaids 148 IMP Bnano Enty Seng eara id 150 DIG PSO 0 DINGUERIN SS coreo sae E E O EE E tenors 151 MAC BOCK A AN 151 OTT SOC UIE Vetere a A A AA A tasad due Medd Cates 151 POTS ECU ON do dd a o eee ere ee 151 Pori Secunty VLAN SCHNOS sosen r 152 PO OCCUND EME Saaie a O err rer a a a a e er eee eee ae 153 DHCP Server Screening SettingS cccccccssssssscececccceesessseceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeuaseeeeeeeeseaeaseeeeeeeessaaaaaeeeeeeessessaaaaseeeeness 153 DHCP Screening FOr Settings a 154 DHCP ONErFIRENNO onanan n e a E N 154 O a a a a a a ee eC eee 155 802 1X Port Based and Host Based Access Control
126. IP IPv4 filter Parameter Description Access ID 1 128 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 128 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Replace Priority Enter a replace priority manually if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the 196 IA E Replace DSCP Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the D
127. IPv6 features click the corresponding IPv6 Edit button Interface Mame System VLAN Name IPv6 Network Address sf te SF E21 234 128 IPv6 State NS Retransmit time 0 4294967295 o o ms Automatic Link Local Address Disabled ka Link Local Address Total Entries O IPyb Global Unicast Address Figure 2 8 IPv6 Interface Settings Edit window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Interface Name Displays the interface being edited VLAN Name Enter the name of the VLAN corresponding to the interface IPv6 Network Enter the IPv6 Network Address to be configured The interface can have multiple IPv6 addresses Address defined Configuration of IPv6 addresses must be done through the command config ipif IPv6 State Allows the user to enable or disable the IPv6 state on the interface NS Retransmit This field is used to set the interval in milliseconds that the Switch will produce neighbor time 0 Solicitation packets to be sent out over the local network This is used to discover IPv6 neighbors 4294967295 on the local network The user may select a time between 0 and 4294967295 milliseconds The default is 0 12 Automatic Link Enables or disables the automatic configuration of link local addresses when there are no IPv6 Local Address addresses explicitly configured When an IPv6 address is explicitly configured the link local address will be automatically configured and the IPv6
128. Informational enabled Authentication Policy is Authentication Policy is disabled Module AAA disabled Successful login through Successful login through Console authenticated by Informational Console authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt AAA local method Login failed through Console Login failed through Console authenticated by AAA authenticated by AAA local local method Username lt username gt Informational method successful login through Web Successful login through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local authenticated by AAA local method Username method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Web Login failed failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local authenticated by AAA local method Username method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through Successful login through Web SSL from lt userlP gt Web SSL authenticated by lauthenticated by AAA local method Username AAA local method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Login failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt Web SSL authenticated by lauthenticated by AAA local method Username AAA local method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through Successful login through Telnet from lt userlP gt Informational Telnet authenticated by AAA authenticated by AAA local method Username local method lt username gt M
129. L Profile Click on the boxes at the top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the correct information and click Create To return to the Access Profile List page click Previous Page The following parameters can be set for Packet Content Parameter Description Allows users to examine up to 4 specified offset_chunks within a packet at one time and specifies the frame content offset and mask There are 4 chunk offsets and masks that can be configured A chunk mask presents 4 bytes 4 offset_chunks can be selected from a possible 32 predefined offset_chunks as described below offset_chunk_1 offset_chunk_2 offset_chunk_3 offset_chunk_4 Example offset_chunk_1 0 Oxffffffff will match packet byte offset 126 127 0 1 offset_chunk_10 Oxffff will match packet byte offset 0 1 Note Only one packet_content_mask profile can be created With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL the D Link switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is why the Packet Content ACL is 202 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual A able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers Click Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry i
130. LAN will be queried for authentication by the local method or through a RADIUS server Once accepted the user will be placed in a target VLAN on the Switch where it will have rights and privileges to openly access the Internet If denied access no packets will pass through to the user and thus that user will be returned to the authentication VLAN from where it came and the authentication procedure will have to be reattempted by the user Once a client has been authenticated on a particular port that port will be placed in the pre configured VLAN and any other clients on that port will be automatically authenticated to access the specified Redirection Path URL as well as the authenticated client Here is an example of the basic six step process all parties of the authentication go through for a successful Web based Access Control process Client 6 2 E 1 3 Client placed in HTTP access Switch redirects Client authentication sent from Client enters to preset redirecbon VLAN and Client to the login path URL The user is HTML login is Switch information to now free to access the prompted for be processed Internet the user 5 St r Client information extracted and sent to RADIUS server or local authenticator A for processing Authentication accepted by local authenticator or RADIUS server Client is placed in the pre configured Target VLAN gt RADIUS Authentication Server 183 Conditions and Li
131. MAC SHAT HMAC DOSA Figure 5 32 SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings window The following algorithms may be set Parameter Public Key Host based 3DES CBC Blow fish CBC AES128 CBC AES192 CBC AES256 CBC ARC4 Description SSH Authentication Mode Settings This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch The default is enabled This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a public key configuration set on a SSH server for authentication on the Switch The default is enabled This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed The default is enabled Encryption Algorithm Check the box to enable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Check the box to enable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Check the box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Check the box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is en
132. N mirroring will only work when RSPAN Global Settings are enabled RSPAN redirect function will work when RSPAN is enabled and at least one RSPAN VLAN has been configured with redirect ports To view this window click L2 Features gt RSPAN Settings as shown below RSPAN Global Settings Disabled Enabled VLAN Name Maaa characters O vio 1 4094 Total Entries 1 Rx Source Ports Tx Source Ports Redirect Ports Figure 3 17 RSPAN Settings window Enter the VLAN Name or VID and click Create To remove an entry click Delete to modify an entry click the corresponding Modify button RSPAN Settings Table IO LAN Mame source Ports ieg 1 4 Add Delete Redirect Port Ml Add Delete Figure 3 18 RSPAN Settings window Edit Enter the Source Ports or Redirect Ports you wish to Add or Delete and click Apply To return to the RSPAN Settings window click lt lt Back GVRP Settings The table allows the user to determine whether the Switch will share its VLAN configuration information with other GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enabled switches In addition Ingress Checking can be used to limit traffic by filtering incoming packets whose PVID do not match the PVID of the port Results can be seen in the table under the configuration settings as seen below To view this window click L2 Features gt GVRP Settings as shown below GVRP State Settings Disabled O Enabled From Port PWYID
133. Option 61 Default Po e 9 10 90 90 90 Default Servers Drop Figure 2 25 DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description DHCP Relay Option Use the pull down menu to choose either Relay or Drop When drop is specified the packet 61 Default with no matching rules found will be dropped without further process When relay is selected the packet will be relayed based on the relay rules Enter the IP Address of the entry you wish to configure Click Apply to implement changes made 2 DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings This command is used to add a rule to the relay server based on option 61 The matching rule can be based on either the MAC address or by using a user specified string Only one relay server can be specified for a MAC address or a string If the existing relay servers are determined based on option 60 and one relay server is determined based on option 61 the final relay servers will be the union of these two sets of servers To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings as shown below Client ID MAC Address ff fe D1 11 22 33 44 55 Relay Rule C lennossa Total Entries 0 Relay Rule Figure 2 26 DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description Client ID Use the drop down menu to select the method of identification for the Client ID ei
134. P Snooping Rate Limit SetngS s cdi A Socnsetied a ae aage ten id Gelveaneles a iA taleaat pate a bacseuetceaeeatectaean 94 IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings ninia root oa 94 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings ccccccccoocononnncnonococononnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnninnnnnass 95 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings ccccccsssssececcceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaaaeceeeeeaaeceesseaaeceeessaaeceseseaecessssageeeesssaneeess 95 IPVA Molicast PROMOS CUINGS ri andes nid tostada adidas 96 IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings iscscccseccwc a ni 97 IPVA Max MUINGaSt Group Set Sussie debacle Acad deoncdeiecdacahadadebiincts toad teonoduieulhatatsnededjande Meneses 97 UAB AA a E alco an et ueecaieiaatiina alse clint aaron dna acerca demad Pateineitueny saan 98 MEBDSAD0P Md gt CUNAS a dd ea dto sami ae ee 98 MED Snooping Rate RISAS e e ed e ed 100 MLD Snooping Static Group Settings siii see tanneecateloccadfesmentareldanlennede etalon Gennaciel E 101 MED MultiGast Group Profile Settings sosire E a O 101 MED Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings sust llac 102 IPVG MUNG aS Prole Settings ia e ans deca 103 IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Setas ici a Eaa eri 104 Pvo MaxMultic astro Seti Scsi ii E aa 104 PONE NITO aia aiii 105 Hojejalscle AD eo AAA A e A eae ee eee ee ee eee 106 A ee eee eee ee 107 SP Bridge Global S tinS miis a tl 109 Pre OMG oe INS A A A A tas
135. P works by allowing you to implement parallel paths for network traffic and ensure that redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operational and enabled if the main paths fail stack A group of network devices that are integrated to form a single logical device standby port The port in a resilient link that will take over data transmission if the main port in the link fails switch A device which filters forwards and floods packets based on the packet s destination address The switch learns the addresses associated with each switch port and builds tables based on this information to be used for the switching decision TCP IP A layered set of communications protocols providing Telnet terminal emulation FTP file transfer and other services for communication among a wide range of computer equipment Telnet A TCP IP application protocol that provides virtual terminal service letting a user log in to another computer system and access a host as if the user were connected directly to the host TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Allows you to transfer files such as software upgrades from a remote device using your switch s local management capabilities UDP User Datagram Protocol An Internet standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another device VLAN Virtual LAN A group of location and topology independent devices that communicate as if they
136. Priority 0 7 w a m a C lr ML me y Delete All Total Entries O Action Priority Figure 3 14 VLAN Translation Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports that are part of the VLAN configuration starting with the selected port CVID 1 4094 The customer VLAN ID List to which the tagged packets will be added Specify if you want SPVID packets to be added or replaced SPVID 1 4094 This configures the VLAN to join the Service Providers VLAN as a tagged member Priority 0 7 Select a priority for the VLAN ranging from 0 7 With 7 having the highest priority Click Apply to make a new entry and Delete All to remove a VLAN Translation entry Q in Q and VLAN Translation Rules For ingress untagged packets at UNI ports 1 The switch does not reference the VLAN translation table 2 Check switch VLAN tables The sequence mac based VLAN gt subnet based VLAN gt protocl based VLAN gt port based VLAN If matched the matched VLAN will become this packet s SPVLAN For ingress tagged packets at UNI ports 1 The switch will look up the VLAN translation table If matched the VLAN tag will be translated replace CEVLAN with SVLAN or add SPVLAN 2 Otherwise check switch VLAN tables The sequence is the same as above The matched VLAN will become this packet s SPVLAN 81 802 1v Protocol VLAN 802 1v Protocol Group Setting
137. Properties menu option under the Port menu option that is located under the Device menu Notes Notices and Cautions fa A A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your device Cy A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death Web based Switch Configuration Introduction Login to Web Manager Web based User Interface Web Pages Introduction All software functions of the Switch can be managed configured and monitored via the embedded web based HTML interface The Switch can be managed from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Opera Netscape Navigator Communicator or Microsoft Internet Explorer The browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol The Web based management module and the Console program and Telnet are different ways to access the same internal switching software and configure it Thus all settings encountered in web based management are the same as those found in the console program Login to Web Manager To begin managing the Switch simply run the browser you have installed on your computer and point it to the IP address you have defined for the device The URL in the address bar should read something like http 123 123 123 123
138. RP Settings User Accounts System Log Configuration System Severity Settings DHCP Relay Out of Band Management Settings External Alarm Settings DHCP Auto Configuration Settings MAC Address Aging Time Web Settings Telnet Settings Password Encryption Clipaging Settings Firmware Information Dual Configuration Settings Ping Test Local Loopback Port Settings VLAN Counter Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings SNMP Settings Time Range Settings sFlow Single IP Management and DDM Section 3 L2 Features A discussion of the Layer 2 features on the Switch including Jumbo Frame 802 1Q VLAN Subnet VLAN QinQ 802 1v Protocol VLAN RSPAN Settings GVRP Settings GVRP Global Settings MAC based VLAN Settings PVID Auto Assign Settings Port Trunking LACP Port Settings Traffic Segmentation BPDU Tunneling Settings IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Port Mirror Loopback Detection Settings Spanning Tree Forwarding amp Filtering LLDP CFM and Ethernet OAM Section 4 QoS Features information on Switch QoS functions including HOL Blocking Prevention Bandwidth Control Traffic Control 802 1P Default Priority 802 1P User Priority QoS Scheduling Mechanism QoS Scheduling In Band Manage Settings and SRED Section 5 Security Features information on Switch security functions including Safeguard Engine Trusted Host IP MAC Port Binding Port Security DHCP Server Screening 802 1X SSL Settings SSH Access Authentication
139. SCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Replace ToS Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet Precedence header VLAN Mask Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN VLAN ID Allows the entry of a VLAN ID for a previously configured VLAN DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the criteria or part of the criterion for forwarding ICMP Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Rx Rate 1 15624 Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured This rate is implemented using the following equation 1 value 64Kbit sec ex If the user selects an Rx rate of 10 then the ingress rate is 640Kbit sec The user many select a value between 7 and 15624 or tick the No Limit check box The default setting is No Limit Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Enable or disable the counter settings Ports Specifies that the access rule will take effect on one port or a range of ports VLAN Name Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN Name sp
140. Settings The DHCP auto configuration function on the Switch will load a previously saved configuration file for current use When DHCP auto configuration is Enabled on the Switch the DHCP reply will contain a configuration file and path name lt will then request the file from the TFTP server specified in the reply To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Auto Configuration Settings as shown below Auto Configuration State Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 2 30 DHCP Auto Configuration Settings window 29 When DHCP autoconfiguration is Enabled the Switch becomes a DHCP client automatically after rebooting The DHCP server must have the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name and be configured to deliver this information in the data field of the DHCP reply packet The TFTP server must be running and have the requested configuration file in its base directory when the request is received from the Switch Consult the DHCP server and TFTP server software instructions for information on loading a configuration file If the Switch is unable to complete the autoconfiguration process the previously saved local configuration file present in Switch memory will be loaded MAC Address Aging Time This table specifies the length of time a learned MAC Address will remain in the forwarding table without being accessed that is how long a learned MAC Address is allowed to remain idle To change this enter a value represe
141. To view this window click L2 Features gt 802 1Q VLAN as shown below OUZ Po YLA WLAN List Add Edit WYLAN Find WLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 VID WYLAN Name Advertisement Tagged Forts Untagged Forts Forbidden Forts 1 default Enabled Delete Figure 3 6 Current 802 1Q Static VLANs Entries window To create a new 802 1Q VLAN entry or edit an existing one click the Add Edit VLAN tab at the top of the 802 1Q VLAN window A new window will appear as shown below to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new window NOTE After all IP interfaces are set for your configurations VLANs on the switch can be routed without any additional steps 74 VLAN List Add EditWLAn Find WLAN WLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 VID VLAN Mame Mame should be less than 32 characters Advertisement Disabled Select All 1 Tagged Untagged Forbidden Mot Member Tagged Ports Untagqed Ports Forbidden Ports Figure 3 7 802 1Q VLAN window Add Edit VLAN Tab To return to the 802 1Q VLAN window click the VLAN List Tab at the top of the window To change an existing 802 1Q VLAN entry click the corresponding Edit button A new window will appear to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new menu
142. Type the UDP port number used for sending Syslog messages The default is 574 514 or 6000 65535 Severity This drop down menu allows you to select the level of messages that will be sent The options are Warning Informational and All Facility Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the local use facilities or they may use the user level Facility Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following Bold font indicates the facility values that the Switch is currently employing Numerical Facility Code Numerical Facility Code kernel messages NTP subsystem user level messages log audit mail system log alert system daemons clock daemon security authorization messages local use 0 local0 messages generated internally by local use 1 local1 syslog line printer subsystem local use 2 local2 network news subsystem local use 3 local3 UUCP subsystem local use 4 local4 clock daemon local use 5 local5 security authorization messages local use 6 local6 FTP daemon local use 7 local7 11 Status Choose Enabled or Disabled to activate or deactivate To add a new entry enter the appropriate information and click Apply 21 System Severity Settings The Switch can be configured to allow alerts be logged or sent as a trap to an SNMP agent or both The level at which the aler
143. U Rx Unique Event Notification OAMPOL Tx Unique Event Notification OAMPDLU Rix Duplicate Event Notification OAMPOU Tx Duplicate Event Notification OAMPOL Rox Loopback Control OAMPOLI Rx Variable Request OAMPDU Rx Variable Response QAMPOL Rx Organization Specific OAMPOUs Rx Unsupported GAMP DOI Rx SoS O Ml O eS O le Ci O Ml O Ml O Ml Loopback Control DAMPO Tx Variable Request OAMPDOL Tx Variable Response OAMPDL Tx Organization Specific OAMPDUs Tx Unsupported OAMP OIJ Tx Frames Lost Due To OAM SoS O Ml oS O Ml Cote O Ml O Ml O Mal Information GAMP OIJ Tx Information OAMIPDU Rx LUinique Event Notification CAMPO Tx Linique Event Notification GAMPO Rx Duplicate Event Notification OAMPOL Tx Duplicate Event Notification GAMPO Rx Loopback Control OAMPDL Tx Loopback Control GAMP OIJ Rx Variable Request OAMPDL Tx Variable Request OAMPDU Rix Variable Response OAMPDL Tx Variable Response OAMPOU Rx Organization Specific OAMPDOUs Tx Organization Specific OAMPOWs Rx Unsupported DAMPO Tx Unsupported CAMPO Rx Frames Lost Que To OAM Information GAMP OLU Tx Information OAMPDU Rx AOS BUEN APMIS EEE OAMPOL Tx TOS Seti PEE OAMPDL Rx m makimnmi n e AAA AA O Ml O Ml O eS oO eS ote O Ml O Ml O Mal Figure 7 46 Browse Ethernet OAM Statistics window 251 Historical Counter amp Utilization This folder contains two windows to view statistics about packets sent and received by the Switch and Historical Utilization of the CPU a
144. VLAN regardless of the authentiucation function operated on the port Therefore each entry specifies a relationship of a source MAC address with a VLAN To view this window click L2 Features gt MAC based VLAN Settings as shown below Delete All Total Entries 0 MAC Address VLAN Mame Figure 3 21 MAC based VLAN Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description MAC Address Specify the MAC address to be reauthenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field VLAN Name Enter the VLAN name of a previously configured VLAN Click Find Add or Delete All for changes to take affect PVID Auto Assign Settings This commands Enables or Disables PVID Auto Assign on the Switch PVID is the VLAN that the switch will use for forwarding and filtering purposes If PVID Auto Assign is Enabled PVID will be possibly changed by previously set PVID or VLAN configurations When a user configures a port to VLAN X s untagged membership this port s PVID will be updated with VLAN X In the form of a VLAN list command PVID is updated with the last item on the VLAN list When a user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID s VLAN the port s PVID will be assigned to a default VLAN When PVID Auto Assign is Disabled PVID can only be changed by PVID configuration user changes explicitly The VLAN configuration will not automatically change the PVID The default setting is Enabled To view this window click L
145. VLANs are basically VLAN tags placed within existing IEEE 802 1Q VLANs which we will call SPVIDs Service Provider VLAN IDs These VLANs are marked by a TPID Tagged Protocol ID configured in hex form to be encapsulated within the VLAN tag of the packet This identifies the packet as double tagged and segregates it from other VLANs on the network therefore creating a hierarchy of VLANs within a single packet Here is an example Double VLAN tagged packet Destination Source SPVLAN TPID 802 1Q CEVLAN Tag Ether Payload Address Address Service Provider TPID Customer VLAN Type VLAN Tag Consider the example below 72 Customer A CEVID 190 Customer B gt AS CEVID 10 CA aa j q Pa q as SPVID 100 SPVID 200 customer B Customer A CEVID 10 CEVID 10 SN e pra Z hn _ a Customer B o e CEVID 10 Customer A CEVID 10 Figure 3 5 Double VLAN Example In this example the Service Provider Access Network switch Provider edge switch is the device creating and configuring Double VLANs with different SPVIDs for specific customers say Customer A and Customer B Both CEVLANs Customer VLANs CEVLAN 10 are tagged with the SPVID 100 for Customer A and SPVID 200 for Customer B on the Service Provider Access Network thus being a member of two VLANs on the Service Provider s network In this way the Customer can retain their normal VLAN ID s and the Service Provider can seperate multiple Customer VLANs
146. X XXX XXX XXX where each xxx is a number represented in decimal between 0 and 255 The value should be 255 0 0 0 for a Class A network 255 255 0 0 for a Class B network and 255 255 255 0 for a Class C network but custom subnet masks are allowed Gateway IP address that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet should be sent This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway If your network is not part of an Intranet or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your local network you can leave this field unchanged Click Apply to implement changes made 10 Setting the Swith s IP Address using the Console Interface Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress
147. XXX XXX XXX XXX yyy yyy yyy yyy where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Alternatively you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z where the x s represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent The system message Success indicated that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management agent using the above ip address to connect to the Switch Interface Settings This window allows the user to create and configure interfaces on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt Interface Settings as shown below Interface Mame fe VLAN Mame Interface Admin State Enabled we Delete All Total Entries 1 Interface VLAN Mame Admin State System IPv Edit 1Pw6 Edit Delete Figure 2 5 Interface Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Interface Name Enter the name you wish to give the IP Interface VLAN Name Enter the name of the VLAN corresponding to the System interface Interface Admin Allows the user to enable or disable the interface administr
148. a previously configured method list To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Application Authentication Settings as shown below ADD ALON AL E BITING Application Login Method List Enable Method List Console default default Telnet default default 55H default default HTTP default default Figure 5 36 Application s Authentication Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Application Lists the configuration applications on the Switch The user may configure the Login Method List and Enable Method List for authentication for users utilizing the Console Command Line Interface application the Telnet application SSH and the WEB HTTP application Login Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing 173 a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Login Method Lists window in this section for more information Enable Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Enable Method Lists window in this section for more information Click Apply to implement changes made Authentication Server Group This wind
149. abled Check the box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES 256 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled Check the box to enable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled 169 Cast128 CBC Check the box to enable the Cast128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is enabled HMAC SHA1 Check the box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Secure Hash algorithm The default is enabled HMAC MD5 Check the box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm The default is enabled Public Key Algorithm HMAC RSA Check the box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the RSA encryption algorithm The default is enabled HMAC DSA Check the box to enable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Digital Signature Algorithm encryption The default is enabled Click Apply to implement changes made SSH User Authentication Lists The following windows are used to configure parameters for users attempting to access the Switch through SSH To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH User Authentication Lists as shown below Auth Mode Host Name Hast IP Password Hote Maximum 8 entries and Host Mame should be less than 32 characters Figure 5
150. abled 10 Fi Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 11 05 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled 11 iF Enabled Auto Disabled Link Dow Enabled 12 2 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Dow Enabled 12 Fi Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Figure 2 11 Port Settings window The following parameters can be configured 14 Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the pull down menus to select the port or range of ports to be configured State Toggle this field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports Speed Duplex Toggle the Speed Duplex field to either select the speed and duplex half duplex state of the port Auto denotes auto negotiation between 10 and 100 Mbps devices in full or half duplex The Auto setting allows the port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the port is connected to can handle and then to use those settings The other options are Auto 10M Half 10M Full 100M Half and 100M Full 1000M Full_M 1000M Full_S and 1000M Full There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto The Switch allows the user to configure two types of gigabit connections 1000M Full_M and 1000M Full_S Gigabit connections only support full duplex connections and take on certain characteristics that are different from the other choices listed The 1000M Full M master and 1000M Full S slave parameters refer to connections
151. access rule will be implemented on the Switch Enable or disable the counter settings Pos Specifies that the access rule will take effect on one port or a range of ports VLAN Name Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN Name specified VLAN ID Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN ID specified Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window Time Range Name Profile ID Access ID Profile Type Action Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 20 Access Rule List IPv6 To view the configurations for previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following Access Rule Details window ACL Rule Details ID Profile Access ID Profile Type 5 1 IPv6 Action Ports Priority IPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label Rx Rate Show All Rules Figure 6 21 Access Rule Detail Inforamtion IPv6 To configure the Packet Content ACL select Packet Content in the Add ACL Profile window enter the Profile ID and Profile Name into the top half of the screen in the Add ACL Profile window and click Select the following window will appear 201 Select Profile ID Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL IPv ACL IPv6 ACL 2 Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask Packet Content Cichunk10 31 Cchunk2 0 31 Cichunk30 31 Ocenka Figure 6 22 Add Packet Content AC
152. ame gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Web authenticated by AAA server Successful login through Web SSL authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Web SSL authenticated by AAA server configuration Successful login through Successful login through Telnet from lt userlP gt Informational Telnet authenticated by AAA authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username 270 server lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt MN Login failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA server Successful login through SSH authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt Warning authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through SSH from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username Login failed through SSH authenticated by AAA server Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA local enable method Enable Admin failed through Web authenticated by AAA local_enable method Successful Enable Admin through Telnet authenticated by AAA local_enable method Enable Admin failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA local_enable method Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenti
153. an be applied to each profile and a switch Therefore careful consideration is needed for planning the configuration of the valuable offset_chunks In Table 6 you will notice that the Offset_ChunkO starts from 127 and ends at the 2 byte It can also be found that the offset_chunk is scratched from 1 but not zero 264 ne cee ot OS gt gt EC BEC BEC ES jejejejejeje Tolo n en ele a 00 0 0 we ajo rm uo oe 9000010 ve v6 v Fle le gt rlels lela e m ww ne ww le mf fm ew oe 02 ef 0 e ve ve 10 Table 6 Chunk and Packet offset Indicates a completed ARP packet contained in the Ethernet frame which is the pattern for the calculation of packet offset Ethernet ARP 01 02 03 04 05 06 0806 10 90 90 90 Table 7 A completed ARP packet contained in Ethernet frame 265 Arana Y en create access profile profile id ethernet source mac FE EF FF FF FF FF ethernet type config access profile profile id 1 add access 1d1 ethernet source mac 01 02 03 04 05 06 ethernet type DxsD port 1 27 permit create access profile profile id packet content mask offset chunk 1 3 Ox0000EFFE Ethernet Typet2 byte offset chunk 2 7 0x0000FF FE adr IP First 2 byte offset chunk 3 5 xFFFFOOOO Sdr IP Last 2 byte config access profile profile id 2 add access id 1 packet content offset chunk 1 UxU0U0Us06 Ethernet Typet2 bytey ARP offset chunk 2 Ux0Q0U00A5A adr TPC First
154. anning Tree gt STP Port Settings as shown below From Port 01 ka To Part or pel es ka P2P Port STR Enabled Restricted Role Restricted TON Forward BPDU Enabled Apply o Port External Cost Edge PAF Port STP Restricted Role Restricted TCH Forward BPOL Hello Time Autor200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Auto200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Auto 200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Autoz 00000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Auto 200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Autos200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Autor200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Autor200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled Autor200000 False False Auto True Disabled False False Disabled 10 Auto 200000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled 11 Autoz 00000 False False Auto True Enabled False False Disabled 12 Auto 200000 FalsefFalse Auto True Enabled False False Disabled ee AS A Port field M Trunk Master T Trunk Member External Cost Edge P2P and Hello Time fields Valuet Value faluet Contigured value Value2 Actual value Figure 3 58 STP Port Settings window In addition to setting Spanni
155. are on a common physical LAN VLT Virtual LAN Trunk A Switch to Switch link which carries traffic for all the VLANs on each Switch VT100 A type of terminal that uses ASCII characters VT100 screens have a text based appearance 279 Appendix D Password Recovery Procedure This section describes the procedure for resetting passwords on D Link Switches Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important The basic authentication method used to accept qualified users is through a local login utilizing a Username and Password Sometimes passwords get forgotten or destroyed so network administrators need to reset these passwords This section will explain how the Password Recovery feature can help network administrators reach this goal The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D Link devices to easily recover passwords Complete these steps to reset the password 1 For security reasons the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device lt is necessary for the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the switch 2 Power on the switch After the runtime image is loaded to 100 the Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey Shift 6 to enter the Password Recovery M
156. as al lol e lo ol et nl o a Sey NT Be YAO Figure 4 1 Mapping QoS on the Switch The picture above shows the default priority setting for the Switch Class 7 has the highest priority of the eight priority queues on the Switch In order to implement QoS the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag tagged Then the user may forward these tagged packets to designated queues on the Switch where they will be emptied based on priority For example lets say a user wishes to have a videoconference between two remotely set computers The administrator can add priority tags to the video packets being sent out utilizing the Access Profile commands Then on the receiving end the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets for this tag acquires the tagged packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch Then in turn the administrator will set a priority for this queue so that will be emptied before any other packet is forwarded This results in the end user receiving all packets sent as quickly as possible thus prioritizing the queue and allowing for an uninterrupted stream of packets which optimizes the use of bandwidth available for the video conference Understanding QoS The Switch has eight priority queues These priority queues are labeled from 0 7 with 7 being the highest priority and O the lowest priority queue The eight priority tags specified in I
157. ased Network Access Control The original intent behind the development of 802 1X was to leverage the characteristics of point to point in LANs As any single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it one of which is a Bridge Port The Bridge Port detects events that indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link or an active device becoming inactive These events can be used to control the authorization state of the Port and initiate the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized This is the Port Based Network Access Control Port Based Network Access Control RS RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port JI Network access uncontrolled port Figure 5 20 Example of Typical Port Based Configuration Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated the Port then becomes Authorized and all subsequent traffic on the Port is not subject to access control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to become Unauthorized Hence if the Port is actually connected to a shared media LAN segment with more than one attached device successfully authenticating one of the attached devices effectively provides access to the LAN for all devices on the shared segment Clearly t
158. ast packets for five seconds After another five second checking interval arrives the Switch will again check the ingress flow of packets If the flooding has stopped the Switch will again begin accepting all packets Yet if the checking shows that there continues to be too many packets flooding the Switch it will still only accept a small amount of ARP and IP broadcast packets for double the time of the previous stop period This doubling of time for stopping ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets will continue until the maximum time has been reached which is 320 seconds and every stop from this point until a return to normal ingress flow would be 320 seconds For a better understanding examine the following example of the Safeguard Engine 145 60 Iren Checking intervals occur every 5 seconds 0 10 20 30 io s0 Stop Ratel interval lf the second checking lf the third checking D reveals there are interval reveals there are stil too many Ingress still too many ingress will rate limt all ingress packets the Switch will packets the Switch will ARP and IP broadcast rate limit all ARP and IP rate limit all ARP and IP ate ES j broadcast packets for 10 packets tor 9 Seconds seconds 5 10 broadcast packets for 20 seconds 10 2 20 lf the fourth interval reveals the packet flooding has subsided the Switch will return to accepting ARP and IP broadcast packets safeguard En
159. ate Port Table Figure 5 27 Reauthenticate Port s window To reauthenticate port s use the drop down menu to select the port s and click Apply 163 Guest VLAN Configuration On 802 1X security enabled networks there is a need for non 802 1X supported devices to gain limited access to ENABLE GUEST the network due to lack of the proper 802 1X software or VLAN incompatible devices such as computers running Windows 98 or lower operating systems or the need for guests to gain access to the network without full authorization To supplement these circumstances this switch now implements 802 1X Guest VLANs These VLANs should have limited access rights and features a _ Authentication separate from other VLANs on the network Authentication AE To implement 802 1X Guest VLANs the user must first create a VLAN on the network with limited rights and then Q enable it as an 802 1X guest VLAN Then the VLAN administrator must configure the guest accounts maaan accessing the Switch to be placed in a Guest VLAN when ee trying to access the Switch Upon initial entry to the oe Switch the client wishing services on the Switch will need to be authenticated by a remote RADIUS Server or local dadia ee authentication on the Switch to be placed in a fully j operational VLAN If authenticated and the authenticator n pr A posseses the VLAN placement information that client will i j be accepted into the fully oper
160. ate and the Auto Logout settings To view this window click Configuration gt Serial Port Settings as shown below Baud Rate 115200 ka Data Bits a Parity Bits Mone stop Bits 1 Apply Figure 2 3 Serial Port Settings window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description Baud Rate This field specifies the baud rate for the serial port on the Switch There are four possible baud rates to choose from 9600 19200 38400 and 115200 For a connection to the Switch using the CLI interface the baud rate must be set to 115200 which is the default setting Auto Logout Select the logout time used for the console interface This automatically logs the user out after an idle period of time as defined Choose from the following options 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes or Never The default setting is 10 minutes Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE If a user configures the serial port s baud rate the baud rate will take effect and save immediately Baud rate settings will not change even if the user resets or reboots the Switch The Baud rate will only change when the user configures it again The serial port s baud rate setting is not stored in the Switch s configuration file Resetting the Switch will not restore the baud rate to the default setting IP Address The IP address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet I
161. ating parameter rises above this value action associated with the warning is taken Low Warning This is the lowest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the warning is taken Click Apply to implement changes made 62 DDM Voltage Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the DDM Voltage Threshold Settings for specific ports on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt DDM gt DDM Voltage Threshold Settings as shown below From Port ToPort High Alarm Low Alarm High Warning Low Warning Low Alarm Volt High Warning Volt Low Warning Volt Figure 2 80 DDM Voltage Threshold Settings window The following fields can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured This is the highest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the alarm will be taken This is the lowest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the alarm is taken High Warning This is the highest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the warning is taken Low Warning This is the lowest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the warning is taken Click Apply to
162. ation state State Click Create to create the entry or Delete All to delete all the current IP Interface entries To edit the VLAN Name or Admin State click the IPv4 Edit or IPv6 Edit button as shown below Interface Marne A YLAN Mame Interface Admin State Enabled w Delete All Total Entries 1 Interface LAN Mame Admin State System default Enabled Delete Figure 2 6 Interface Settings Edit window 11 Enter the new VLAN Name and Admin State and click Apply To edit an entry for IPv4 features click the corresponding IPv4 Edit button Ha j a Interface Mame System LAN Mame efault IPv4d Address 0 24 73 21 Subnet task 55 0 0 0 IPvd State Enabled Apply Figure 2 7 IPv4 Interface Settings Edit window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Interface Name Displays the interface being edited VLAN Name Enter the name of the VLAN corresponding to the interface IPv4 Address Enter an alternative IPv4 address Currently an interface can only have one IPv4 address defined Therefore multinetting configuration of IPv4 must be done through creation of a secondary interface on the same VLAN instead of directly configuring multiple IPv4 addresses on the same interface Subnet Mask Enter the corresponding subnet mask IPv4 State This function allows user to enable the IPv4 address on the IP interface Click Apply to implement changes made To edit an entry for
163. ational target VLAN and lemmlacedin camspecinedby Originaing VLAN normal switch functions will be open to the client If the de E e AA authenticator does not have target VLAN placement A a A i Fete information the client will be returned to its originating VLAN Yet if the client is denied authentication by the Figure 5 28 Guest VLAN Authentication Process authenticator it will be placed in the Guest VLAN where it has limited rights and access The adjacent figure should give the user a better understanding of the Guest VLAN process Limitations Using the Guest VLAN 1 Guest VLANs are only supported for port based VLANs MAC based VLANs cannot undergo this procedure 2 Ports supporting Guest VLANs cannot be GVRP enabled and vice versa 3 A port cannot be a member of a Guest VLAN and a static VLAN simultaneously 4 Once a client has been accepted into the target VLAN it can no longer access the Guest VLAN 164 Guest VLAN This window is used to configure the Guest VLAN on the Switch To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt Guest VLAN as shown below Apply Current Guest YL4N Ports Figure 5 29 Guest VLAN window The following fields may be modified to enable the 802 1X Guest VLAN Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter the pre configured VLAN name to create as an 802 1X Guest VLAN Port List Set the port list of ports to be enabled for the 802 1X Guest VLAN Click Apply to im
164. authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v 1 and v 2 management access are e public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects e private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMPv1 while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting read write privileges using SNMPvs Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional laye
165. before using the default or previously entered settings IP Interface This field displays the IP Interface that is currently being used on the Switch Management This allows the entry of a VLAN Name from which a management station will be allowed to VLAN Name manage the Switch using TCP IP in band via web manager or Telnet Management stations that are on VLANs other than the one entered here will not be able to manage the Switch in band unless their IP addresses are entered in the Security IP Management window If VLANs have not yet been configured for the Switch the default VLAN contains all of the Switch s ports There are no entries in the Security IP Management table by default so any management station that can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a management VLAN is specified or Management Station IP Addresses are assigned Interface Admin This field enables or disables the Interface Admin State When the state is enabled the IPv4 processing will be started when the IPv4 address is configured on the IPIF The IPv6 processing will be started when the IPv6 address is explicitly configured on the IPIF IPv4 Address The address should specify a host address and length of the network prefix There can be multiple IPv4 addresses defined on an interface Thus as a new address is defined it is added on this IP Interface A Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on Should be of the form XX
166. ber of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout authTimeout TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure authFail TRUE Auth Reauth Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant Auth LogOff Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant Authed Reauth Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to 240 PAN CONNECTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE Authed Start Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant Authed LogOff Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Su
167. bps J 0 15624 TCM CBS Kbyte sf 0 16384 PBS Kbyte oes CIR 64Kbps sd ms Osrtcm CBS Kbyte EO o 16384 EBS Kbyte i hoea C Replace DSCP sds 0 63 A a a M Counter Disabled v C Replace DSCP sd 0 63 Counter Disabled H O Replace DSCP sd 63 Counter Disabled w Conform Exceed Permit Drop Violate Permit Drop Figure 6 51 ACL Flow Meter Add window The following fields may be configured Parameter Description Profile ID Use the drop down menu to select the pre configured Profile ID that will be used to configure the Flow Metering parameters Profile Name Use the drop down menu to select the pre configured Profile Name 218 Access ID 1 128 Enter the Access ID that will be used to configure the Flow Metering parameters enter a value between 7 and 128 Select the mode to be used either trT CM or srTCM and enter the corresponding information trTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker marks packets green yellow or red based on two rates and two burst sizes It is useful when peak rates need to be enforced e CIR 64Kbps value 0 15624 Specifies the Committed Information Rate of the packet The unit is 64Kbps That is to say 1 means 64Kbps PIR 64Kbps value 0 15624 Specifies the Peak Information Rate of the packet The unit is 64Kbps That is to say 1 means 64Kbps CBS Kbyte value 0 16384 Specifies the Co
168. by this Authenticator 23 EN A Na NILA J 7 VIadriUdal Rx Resp The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Y Li EA rad NE N f Aes rs siqanit Ethernet Switcn User Ec re UIgabd It CUICCE OWICII UOCI The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Authenticator Session Statistics This window contains the session statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Session Statistics as shown below a Sat Apply Frames Rx Frames Tx Authenticator Session Statistics Time null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null null as null null null null SO0Menicalor Le 1151 usar
169. c configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button a Add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 1 1535 Profile ID Profile Mame Profile Type Owner Type 1 RG AC 3 DG Ethernet L IP AGL Show Details Add ey Ruled Delete Show Details Add wey Ruled Delete Figure 6 11 Access Profile List IPv4 To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following window 195 ACL Profile Details Profile ID Profile Mame Profile Type Owner Type VLAN Mask DSP Show All Profiles Figure 6 12 Access Profile Details IPv4 To return to the Access Profile List click Show All Profiles to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules which will reveal the following window Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type VLAN Mask Profile Mame Owner Type DSCF Rule Detail Keep an inputfield as blank to treatthe corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 1 28 WLAN Wask WLAN IC DSCP e g 0 63 Rule Action Action Priority 0 77 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Replace Tos Precedence 0 7 Rx Rate 1 15624 Time Range Mame Counter 2 1 4 69 Figure 6 13 Access Profile IPv4 The following parameters may be configured for the
170. cated by AAA local enable method Enable Admin failed through SSH authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA none method Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA none method Successful Enable Admin through Telnet authenticated by AAA none method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated Warning by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through Console Informational authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by Warning AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Enable Admin failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from Informational lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt MAC lt macadar gt Enable Admin failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through SSH from lt userlP gt In
171. cates that LLDP agents should transmit Link Aggregation TLV This indicates the current link aggregation status of IEEE 802 3 MACs More precisely the information should include whether the port is capable of doing link aggregation whether the port is aggregated in an aggregated link and what is the aggregated port ID The default state is Disabled Maximum Frame The Maximum Frame Size indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Maximum frame size size TLV The default state is Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made LLDP Statistics System LLDP Statistics System allows you an overview of neighbor detection activity LLDP Stastics and the settings for individual ports on the Switch Use the drop down menu to check a specific port and click Find the information will be displayed in the lower half of the table 121 To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Statistics System as shown below Or Sis Ste lr LLDP Statistics Last Change Time Number of Table Insert Humber of Table Delete Number of Table Drop Number of Table Ageout LLDP Statistics Ports Total Tx Frames Total Discarded Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Total Rx Frames Total Discarded Rx TUVS Total Unrecognized Rx TLYs Total Aged out Neighbor Information Figure 3 72 LLDP Statistics System window LLDP Local Port Information LLDP Local Port Information window displays the information on a per port basis currently available for popu
172. ccessful login through SSH Successful login through SSH from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA none _ jauthenticated by AAA none method Username method lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through Successful login through Console authenticated by Informational Console authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt AAA server Login failed through Console Login failed through Console authenticated by AAA Warning authenticated by AAA server server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Successful login through Web Successful login through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server Informational authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated Warning by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful login through Web SSL from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt Warning authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through Login failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt due to Warning Web SSL due to AAA server AAA server timeout or improper configuration timeout or improper Username lt usern
173. cess Rule Details window CL Rule Details Profile 10 1 Access ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet VLAN ID 3 Action Permit Ports 3 4 Priority a Rx Rate Mo Limited Show All Rules Figure 6 9 Access Rule Detail Information Ethernet To create an IPv4 ACL select IPv4 enter the Profile ID and Profile Name into the top half of the screen in the Add ACL Profile window and click Select the following window will appear 193 Select Profile ID Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Pwd ACL Pve ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask L2 Header IPv4 DSCP lPvd Address 802 10 VLAN LI VLAN Mask IPv4 DSCP PETE IPv4 Address L Source IP Mask O Destination IP Mask ICMP Dl ICMP MP Type IMP Code Figure 6 10 Add IPv4 ACL Profile Click on the boxes at the top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry enter the correct information and click Create To return to the Access Profile List page click Back The following parameters can be set for IP Parameter Description VLAN selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwardin
174. cess Rules for IP open the CPU Access Profile List window and click Add View Rules for a Packet Content entry This will open the following window Profile ID Profile Type Action Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 46 CPU Access Rule List window for Packet Content To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding Delete Rules button To add a new Access Rule click the Add Rule button Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type Packet Content 0x00000000 0x00050000 l i El x Owner Type CPU ACL Offset 0 15 0x00000000 0x00000000 Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 100 O offset 0 15 900000 o0000000 ooo00000 o0000000 Time Range Name L Po Negas Figure 6 47 Add Access Rule window for Packet Content To set the Access Rule for Packet Content adjust the following parameters and click Apply 216 Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified Offset 0 15 Enter a value in hex form
175. ch packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding 802 1P Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1p priority value of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding 190 Ethernet Type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List table shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button to view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button Add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 1536 Profile ID Profile Mame Profile Type Owner Type 1 RG Ethernet ACL Add view Rulea Delete Figure 6 5 Access Profile List Ethernet To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following window ACL Profile Details Profile ID 1 Profile Mame RG Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type ACL VLAN Mask Yes Ethernet Type Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 6 Access Profile Details Ethernet To return to the Access Profile List click Show All Profiles to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Ad
176. cket Count CCM List window Browse CFM Fault MEP This window will display the fault conditions detected by the MEPs on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt Browse CFM Fault MEP as shown below MD Name MA Name f MD Name MA Name MEPID Status Note MD Max22 characters Maintenance Domain MA Max22 characters Maintenance Association MEP Maintenance Endpoint Figure 7 41 Browse CFM Fault MEP window Browse CFM Port MP List This window is used to browse the CFM port MP list on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt Browse CFM Port MP List as shown below Level 0 7 Direction MD Name MA Name MEPID Direction Note MD Maintenance Domain MA Maintenance Association MEP Maintenance Endpoint Figure 7 42 Browse CFM Port MP List window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description The direction of the MEP Inward indicates an inward facing MEP Outward indicates an outward facing MEP Click Find to see the entry displayed in the table 248 MAC Address Table This allows the Switch s dynamic MAC address forwarding table to be viewed When the Switch learns an association between a MAC address and a port number it makes an entry into its forwarding table These entries are then used to forward packets through the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt MAC Address Table as shown below 1 ki e i jal Fort Clear
177. cket header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding 802 1P Selecting this option instructs the Switch to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Ethernet Type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window 207 CPU ACL Profile Details Profile ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type CPU ACL VLAN Mask Yes 802 1P Yes Show All Profiles Figure 6 30 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for Ethernet The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for IP IPv4 Select Profile ID Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL 2 Pv4 ACL ICMP v IPv6 ACL O Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask L2 Header VLAN IPv4 DSCP EN SS ICMP 802 10 VLAN VLAN Mask IPv4 DSCP Llpscp IPv4 Address O Source IP Mask C Destination IP Mask ICMP O icmp ICMP Type ICMP Code Figure 6 31 Add CPU ACL Profile window for IP IPv4 The following parameters may be configured for the IP IPv4 filter Parameter Description Select Profile ID Use the drop down menu to select a unique identifier number for
178. cncraanset ans voloa samen antec uatensansamal vauaieauans voreds tenets teamed denaca wine R E E E a A 33 Weavers Mere e ore ell PONS Scuola 34 VEAN COUNTER SO UINOS a aa 35 SNTE SS apa a ee a leh a sca le ec ane 36 A A o eee eRe eee ee eee eee ee eee see er 36 Nil aate Ae aro poy 1a 6 Lopemmeter teeter eee ceth eee ret Taine cre Serr dd a e de ol eee ee en id eee 37 MAG INGUTIGAT SA li a edo 38 MAC Notification lA E O E E 38 MAG Notification POr Setin S 10 knees terete A R lee dos 39 A A A 40 SNMP Global Stale Sel A E S 41 SNMP WIGW TA oia 41 SNMP GOUD Tabletas dipicidos 42 SNMP US Tarda oa delito dildo 43 o A E ad ances ate gdteda tem ecus asada duaasen ast aetedede E E E 44 INI OSU alo le A e a a a a eer 45 A A O nO ne Meco Mr Be eee cemeteries 45 A A eee eee 46 SNMP Trap COn HUT ON A A tada 47 TM ande SUIS acia 47 PPP E Usted a aed eaeataaadnntiiaut hahaa cues alan pauanen aa umtee 48 SFlow Globalotate SENS sio cate scree ens eda saccade ems omen Ei mesa Oia 48 SFlOW Analy Zer Server SelINGS oi A oi hat hae os 48 SFIOW FIOW Sampler Set MOS ie A A aa E acid 49 SFlow Counter Poller Settings A A A A A to 50 SINS Manage mentar N E 51 Single lA SEMI A A ic 52 AA a A o A II A Senate ea a a one 53 TOO le CPC apace E o CC he POE E II A eee eee 56 o A O o o PE A ae eee 57 A mate ntaatadoncttsca pinata cemmucnateeteni aden umuesaehate tudes att pegaagee ct uesatoate A E 59 A A O AA 60 Sontiguration File Backup Restor
179. configuration Login failed through Web from user due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Enable Admin failed through Web from user due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Login failed through Web SSL from user due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful Enable Admin through SSH from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through Console Informational authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by Warning AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Enable Admin failed through Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from Informational lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Enable Admin failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt Warning authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through SSH from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA server
180. configuration or firmware To backup the configuration file enter the Server IP either IPv4 or IPv6 interface name file path name desired Configuration ID and click Backup To restore the configuration file enter the Server IP either IPv4 or IPv6 interface name file path name desired Configuration ID and click Restore O Configuration ID Figure 8 5 Configuration File Backup 8 Restore window Upload Log File A history and attack log can be uploaded from the Switch to a TFTP server To upload a log file enter a Server IP address Interface Name and file path name and then click Upload or Upload Attack Log O e Figure 8 6 Upload Log File window Reset The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch Some of the current configuration parameters can be retained while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults NOTE Only the Reset System option will enter the factory default parameters into the Switch s non volatile RAM and then restart the Switch All other options enter the factory defaults into the current configuration but do not save this configuration Reset System will return the Switch s configuration to the state it was when it left the factory NOTE The serial port s baud rate will not be changed by the reset command It will not be restored to the factory default setting Reset gives the option of retaining the Switch s User Accounts and History L
181. contains five windows IMP Binding Global Settings IMP Binding Port Settings IMP Binding Entry Settings DHCP Snooping Entries and MAC Block List IMP Binding Global Settings This window is used to enable or disable the ACL mode Trap Log State and DHCP Snoop state on the switch When the user enables the ACL Mode for IP MAC Binding it will create two Access Profile Entries on the Switch The Trap Log field will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC binding When enabled the 147 Switch will send a trap message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC binding configuration set on the Switch To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Binding Global Settings ACL Mode Disabled Trap Log Disabled DHCP Snoop State Disabled Figure 5 4 IMP Binding Global Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description ACL Mode This field will enable and disable the ACL mode for IP MAC binding on the Switch without altering previously set configurations When enabled the Switch will automatically create two ACL packet content mask entries which will aid the user in processing certain IP MAC binding entries created The ACL entries created when this command is Enabled can only be automatically installed if the Access Profile table has two entries available of the possible six entries allowed Trap Log This f
182. d choose the protocol associated with the IP address of the Authentication Server Host and click Add to add this Authentication Server Host to the group NOTE The user must configure Authentication Server Hosts using the Authentication Server Hosts window before adding hosts to the list Authentication Server Hosts must be configured for their specific protocol on a remote centralized server before this function can work properly NOTE The four built in server groups can only have server hosts running the same TACACS daemon TACACS XTACACS TACACS protocols are separate entities and are not compatible with each other Authentication Server This window will set user defined Authentication Server Hosts for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with Authentication Policy enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server as shown below
183. d Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 0 1536 Profile ID Profile Name Profile Type Owner Type Figure 6 2 Access Profile Lists To add an ACL Profile click the Add ACL Profile button which will display the window below There are four Access Profile Configuration pages one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration one for IPv4 address based profile configuration one for the Packet Content and one for IPv6 You can explore the four Access Profile Configuration options by entering a Profile ID and Profile Name and using the radio button to select an ACL Type and click Select The user may remove all Access Profiles by clicking the Delete All button This button will not clear Address Binding ACL entries which can only be deleted through the IP MAC Binding window The page shown below is the Ethernet Access Profile Configuration page 188 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual de i r A Select Profe ID Profile Name id Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Tagged O IPy4 ACL O IPv6 ACL O Packet Content ACL Figure 6 3 Add Access Profile Ethernet If creating an Ethernet ACL enter the Profile ID and Profile Name and click Select the following window will appear 189 k i k aye a Select Profile ID Profile Name C Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Tagged O IPy4 ACL O IPv6 ACL O Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to
184. d View Rules which will reveal the following window 191 Add Arras m Profile Information Profile ID 1 Profile Mame Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type WYLAN Mask Yes Ethernet Type Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 128 C auto Assign WLAN Mask VLAN ID ee Ethernet Type 0 FFFF f Rule Action Priority 0 7 Replace Priority JE Replace DSCP 0 63 O JE Replace Tos Precedence 0 7 Time Range Mame Po D Rx Rate 1 15624 NoLimit counter Disabled Jess Figure 6 7 Access Profile Ethernet To setthe Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Access ID 1 128 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 128 Auto Assign Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created VLAN Mask Allows the entry of a VLAN Mask for a previously configured VLAN VLAN ID Allows the entry of a VLAN ID for a previously configured VLAN 802 1p 0 7 Enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profi
185. d click Apply Parameter Description Method List Name Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters Priority 1 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list local_enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local enable password database on the Switch The user in the next section entitled Local Enable Password must set the local enable password none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server server_group Adding a previously configured server group will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch Local Enable Password Settings This window will configure the locally enabled password for the Enable Admin command When a user chooses the local_enable method to promote user l
186. d this configuration file Unknown users will be displayed as Anonymous Boot Click the Boot button under this heading to use this configuration file as the boot up firmware for the Switch This will apply upon the next reboot of the Switch Click the Active button to enable the configuration file settings Click the Delete button under this heading to delete this configuration file from the Switch s memory Ping Test Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IPv6 or IPv4 address you specify The destination node then responds to or echoes the packets sent from the Switch This is very useful to verify connectivity between the Switch and other nodes on the network To view this window click Configuration gt Ping Test as shown below IPvd Ping Test Enter the IP address of the device or station you wantto ping then click Start Target IF Address 0 0 0 0 Repeat Pinging for Infinite times Ol 1 255 times Timeout 1 99 sec IPv6i Ping Test Enter the IP address ofthe device or station you wantto ping then click Start Target IF Address DO Interface Name Repeat Pinging for Infinite times Of 1 255 times Size 1 6000 Timeout 1 10 sec Figure 2 38 Ping Test window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description IPv4 Ping Test Target IP Address Enter the Target IPv4 Address of the host Repeat Pinging for Check the Infinite times radio
187. de requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October 3 From Which Week Enter the week of the month that DST will start of the Month From Day of the Enter the day of the week that DST will start on Week From Month Enter the month DST will start on From Time in Enter the time of day that DST will start on HH MM To Which Week of Enter the week of the month the DST will end the Month To Day of the Enter the day of the week that DST will end Week To Month Enter the month that DST will end To Time in HH MM Enter the time DST will end DST Annual Settings Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 From Month Enter the month DST will start on each year Enter the day of the week DST will start on each year From Time in Enter the time of day DST will start on each year HH MM To Month Enter the month DST will end on each year Enter the date DST will end on each year To Time in HH MM Enter the time of day that DST will end on each year Click Apply to implement changes made to the Time Zone and DST window MAC Notification Settings MAC Notification is used to mo
188. dence header Time Range Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Rx Rate 1 15624 Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured This rate is implemented using the following equation 1 value 64Kbit sec ex If the user selects an Rx rate of 70 then the ingress rate is 640Kbit sec The user many select a value between 7 and 15624 or tick the No Limit check box The default setting is No Limit Counter Specifies whether counter feature will be enabled disabled This is optional the default is disabled If the rule is not binded with flow_meter then all packet matched will be countered If the rule is binded with flow_meter then counter here will be overrided Ports sd Specifies the access rule will take effect on one port or a range of ports VLAN Name Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN Name specified VLAN ID Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN ID specified Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window Action Ethernet Permit Show Details Delete Rules lt lt Back Next gt gt Figure 6 8 Access Rule List Ethernet To view the configurations for previously configured rules click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following Ac
189. der contains two windows DHCP Screening Port Settings and DHCP Offer Filtering 153 DHCP Screening Port Settings The Switch supports DHCP Server Screening a feature that denies access to rogue DHCP servers When the DHCP server filter function is enabled all DHCP server packets will be filtered from a specific port To view this window click Security gt DHCP Server Screening gt DHCP Screening Port Settings as shown below From Port State Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 5 12 DHCP Screening Port Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port State Choose Enabled to enable the DHCP server or Disabled to disable The default is Disabled After setting the previous parameters click Apply to allow your changes to be implemented The DHCP Port Information Table shows which ports are enabled or disabled for DHCP Sever Screening DHCP Offer Filtering This function allows the user not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packet by any specified DHCP client it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients The first time the DHCP filter is enabled it
190. dit button to see the STP Instance Operational Status of a previously configured setting click View the following window will be displayed 113 e 7 STP Priority Settings Total Entries 1 Instance Status Instance Priority Disabled 4096 Bridge Priority 4096 SYS ID Ext 0 View STP Instance Operational Status MSTP ID Designated Root Bridge External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Max Age Forward Delay Remaining Hops Last Topology Change Topology Changes Count Figure 3 61 STP Instance Settings View window MSTP Port Information This window displays the current MSTP Port Information and can be used to update the port configuration for an MSTI ID If a loop occurs the MSTP function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first In instances where the priority value is identical the MSTP function will implement the lowest MAC address into the forwarding state and other interfaces will be blocked Remember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets To view this window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt MSTP Port Information as shown below MSTP Port Setting Instance ID Internal Path Cost 1 200000000 Priority Port 1 Settings Designated Bridge Internal Path Cost Priority 200000 Forwarding
191. dow The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description VLAN Name Specifies the name of the VLAN for which to configure the MLD snooping static group information VLAN List Specifies the list of the VLAN IDs for which to configure the MLD snooping static group information IPv6 Address Specifies the static group IPv6 address for which to configure the MLD snooping static group information Click Create to create a new entry To search for an entry enter the information and click Find To view all previously configured entries click View All MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings This table allows the user to create MLD multicast group profiles and specify multicast address lists on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings as shown below 101 AO irasi rollo Profile Mame fo Of hax 32 characters Delete All Total Entries 1 Frofile Mame Group List Figure 3 47 MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings window To configure the group list once a profile has been created click on the hyperlinked Group List to reveal the following window Profile Mame 1 RB Multicast Address List Ple FFA E 1 FF1E 3 Multicast Address Group List O HO Multicast Address List Figure 3 48 Multicast Group Profile Multicast Address Settings window Group List Enter the Multicast Address List and click Add the new informat
192. dress 01 05 5D 00 00 00 01 02 a a i a a E GVRP Tunnel Multicast Address 01 05 5D 00 00 21 01 02 d d 01 02 Apply Figure 3 27 BPDU Tunneling window Select the ports and port types on which the BPDU tunneling will be enabled or disabled and click Apply 91 IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping allows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent between network stations or devices and an IGMP host When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific device based on IGMP messages passing through the Switch In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch see the DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Switch Series Web Management Tool You may then fine tune the settings for each VLAN using the IGMP Snooping link in the L2 Features folder When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific multicast group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa The Switch monitors IGMP messages and discontinues forwarding multicast packets when there are no longer hosts requesting that they continue IGMP Snooping Settings Use the IGMP Snooping Settings window to enable or disable IGMP Snooping on the Switch To modify the settings click the Edit button under Parameter Settings and a new table will appear for the user to configure To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP S
193. e 1 15624 Time Range Name Counter Disabled i No Limit lv Hi d 2 9 1 4 69 Figure 6 25 Access Profile Packet Content The following parameters may be configured for the Packet Content filter Parameter Description Access ID 1 128 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 128 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority 0 7 Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Replace DSCP Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Replace ToS Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet Pr
194. e scan sica 60 Ho A AE 61 A e T ee ee eee eee eee 61 Browse DDM Status stas cada Ni 61 DOM SEINO A e E ESO E A T T 61 DDM Temperature Threshold Settings sorniera a a E 62 D M Voltage Threshold NINOS ias 63 DDM Bias Current Threshold SSuddS eranen a a irscia 63 DDMDbePowerThresnold SOUS atari a at ai ad E dai 64 DBM RX Fower Threshold Setas msrsttsra A A ar 64 ELFOS dd a 66 JUMDO RAMO iaa aaa 66 VEAN dd 67 Understanding IEEE 302 10 FANON tai dt ca tds indi ado 67 VEAN DESC ION a ee a E rd e a e er a le iat 67 EEESIZIOVULAN aaa 68 Double VEANS ti cloaca 72 SOZ UEEVIEAN id rol idas 74 SUGNO VLAN a As 78 Super VLAN SEWNOS sessed o O 78 VEAN Precedence Se tn add lidia 78 A OOO O O RN 79 OMO Seng a ed ld dd td lc 79 VLAN TranslallOniSetnG Srta lt tc suntcg E eooatemaasemtoe cages ateasaueageteate case cmtennerecceteaiaueaententeacemateetoes 80 O in rand VLAN Translation RULES idad 81 802 TV IE FOTOGON VAIN aida 82 S02 1V Protocol GrOUD SENOS o A A eta eee ede eee oe ese o a 82 802 1 V7 Protool VLAN Se TING Sick ste ee ee eet Gey esl ei ee E e eta i ee eo adeeb eed a 83 ROFAN se OS abi cdias 84 GVA SCN laa 84 Cd mek GIO EHHO Leen ere ergs ete Smet ine cis 85 MAC Dased VLAN SEUNG S oor riran oa cadets o did 86 PVID Auto AS SIGM CUINA er A 86 EI AAA NO 87 LACA PI o el o le 89 ele lo y OA o A E O cecsheeasoacteeen ds 90 BPDU Te ENS TN Che cun Sanar lo 91 GM SNOOP MO tia laa a 92 IGMP SNOOP ING SEUNS iria ista 92 IGM
195. e Limit 1 1 000 Po No Limit Port List O VLAN List Total Entries 2 Rate Limitation No Limitation No Limitation Next gt gt Figure 3 44 MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings window The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description Specifies a port or range ports to configure or display Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs to configure or display Specifies the rate of MLD control packets that the switch can process on a specific port The rate is specified in packets per second The packet that exceeds the limited rate will be dropped The default setting is No Limit Click Apply to implement new changes To modify the rate limit click the corresponding Edit button 100 Port List Pod O VLAN List Po te 1 83 Rate Limit 1 1000 o No Limit Port List O VLAN List AA Total Entries 2 A No Limit Mo Limitation Figure 3 45 MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings Edit window Enter the new rate limit and click Apply MLD Snooping Static Group Settings This window is used to configure the MLD Snooping static group information on the Swtich To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Static Group Settings as shown below VLAN Name axe 32 characters OVLAN List Fests 6 Address ess reseca View All Total Entries 0 LAN Mame IF Address Static Member Port Figure 3 46 MLD Snooping Static Group Settings win
196. e and configure IPv6 Neighbor settings on the Switch The Switch s current IPv6 neighbor settings will be displayed in the table at the bottom of this window To view this window click Configuration gt IPv6 Neighbor Settings as shown below Interface Mame Meighbor IPvb Address Link Layer MAC Address Interface Mame State Total Entries 0 Link Layer Address Interface Figure 2 10 IPv6 Neighbor Settings window The following parameters can be configured 13 Parameter Description Interface Name Enter the interface name of the IPv6 neighbor you wish to configure Neighbor IPv6 Enter the neighbor IPv6 address of the entry you wish to configure Address Link Layer MAC Enter the MAC address of the neighbor device to be added as an IPv6 neighbor on the IP Address interface Interface Name IN order to search for a previously configured Interface name enter the appropriate information and click Find To remove a previously configured Interface enter the Interface name and click Clear To find or delete specific entries use the pull down menu to select All Address Static or Dynamic All Select All to view all configured neighbor devices which are IPv6 neighbors of the IP interface previously created Address Select Address and enter the IPv6 address of the entry you wish to find Static Select Static to view all statically entered IPv6 neighbors on the Switch Dynamic Select Dynamic to view
197. e referred to as tag unaware 802 1Q devices are referred to as tag aware Prior to the adoption of 802 1Q VLANs port based and MAC based VLANs were in common use These VLANSs relied upon a Port VLAN ID PVID to forward packets A packet received on a given port would be assigned that port s PVID and then be forwarded to the port that corresponded to the packet s destination address found in the Switch s forwarding table If the PVID of the port that received the packet is different from the PVID of the port that is to transmit the packet the Switch will drop the packet Within the Switch different PVIDs mean different VLANs remember that two VLANs cannot communicate without an external router So VLAN identification based upon the PVIDs cannot create VLANs that extend outside a given switch or switch stack Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the Switch If no VLANs are defined on the Switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLANs are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVIDs within the Switch to
198. easure for authorizing and authenticating users to gain access to various wired or wireless devices on a specified Local Area Network by using a Client and Server based access control model This is accomplished by using a RADIUS server to authenticate users trying to access a network by relaying Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL packets between the Client and the Server The following figure represents a basic EAPOL packet Ethernet Frame Destination 094 5020000031 Preasa Vere i Packet body 1 Facket Type length Packet Body EAPOL packet Figure 5 14 The EAPOL Packet Utilizing this method unauthorized devices are restricted from connecting to a LAN through a port to which the user is connected EAPOL packets are the only traffic that can be transmitted through the specific port until authorization is granted The 802 1X Access Control method holds three roles each of which are vital to creating and upkeeping a stable and working Access Control security method Authentication Client Authenticator Server NIC Card Network Port AAA Server Mostly RADIUS Wireless PC Card etc Access Point Ethernet Switch etc EAP Over LAN Encapsulated EAP EAP Over Wireless Messages typically on RADIUS 802 3 or 802 11 Figure 5 15 The three roles of 802 1X The following section will explain the three roles of Client Authenticator and Authentication Server in greater detail
199. ecedence header This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified Rx Rate 1 15624 Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured This rate is implemented using the following equation 1 value 64Kbit sec ex If the user selects an Rx rate of 10 then the ingress rate is 640Kbit sec The user many select a value between 7 and 15624 or tick the No Limit check box The default setting is No Limit Time Range Name Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch 204 Enable or disable the counter settings Ports Specifies that the access rule will take effect on one port or a range of ports VLAN Name Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN Name specified VLAN ID Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN ID specified Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window Profile ID Profile Type Action Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 26 Access Rule List Packet Content To view the configurations for previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following Access Rule Details window Profile ID 2 Access ID 1 Profile Type Packet Content Action Permit Ports 5 6 Chunk 1 3 Value 0x0000
200. ecified VLAN ID Specifies the access rule will take effect on the VLAN ID specified Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window Action Permit Show Details Delete Rules lt Back Next gt gt Figure 6 14 Access Rule List IPv4 To view the configurations for previously configured rule click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following Access Rule Details window LCL Rule Details Profile ID 3 Access ID 1 Profile Type IP WLAN ID 4 Action Permit Ports 2 8 Priority 2 Rix Rate Mo Limited Replace Tos Precedence 3 Show All Rules Figure 6 15 Access Rule Detail Information To configure the IPv6 ACL select IPv6 in the Add ACL Profile window enter the Profile ID and Profile Name into the top half of the screen in the Add ACL Profile window and click Select the following window will appear 197 A A E oie TU Select Profile ID Profile Name Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Pwd ACL IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPvb Class IPv Flow Label IP UOP IPvE Address IPv6 Class CliPyv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label DC IPv6 Flow Label TCP DlTer source Port Mask 0 FFFF OE Destination Port Mask 0 FFFF OOOO O Figure 6 16 Add IPv6 ACL Profile Click on the boxes at the top of the table which will then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration To create a new entry en
201. econd Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 A The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 223 excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 1024 1518 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Show Hide Check whether or not to display 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 and 1024 1518 packets received Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch
202. ed Traffic Control implementations The possible time settings for this field are O 5 30 minutes O is disable forever state port will not enter shutdown forever mode Time Interval 5 30 The Interval will set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the Switch s chip to the Traffic Control function These packet counts are the determining factor in deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value The Interval may be set between 5 and 30 seconds with the default setting of 5 seconds Threshold Specifies the maximum number of packets per second that will trigger the Traffic Control 0 255000 function to commence The configurable threshold range is from O to 255000 with a default setting of 131072 Storm Control Type Select the type of Storm Type to detect either Broadcast Multicast or Unicast Once selected use the pull down menu to enable or disable this storm detection Traffic Trap Setting Traffice Trap Enable sending of Storm Trap messages when the type of action taken by the Traffic Control Settings function in handling a Traffic Storm is one of the following None Will not send any Storm trap warning messages regardless of action taken by the Traffic Control mechanism Storm Occurred Will send Storm Trap warning messages upon the occurrence of a Traffic Storm only Storm Cleared Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been cleared by the Switch only Both Will
203. ement Protocol SNMP to contain attributes of their managed systems The Switch contains its own internal MIB multicast Single packets copied to a specific subset of network addresses These addresses are specified in the destination address field of the packet protocol A set of rules for communication between devices on a network The rules dictate format timing Sequencing and error control resilient link A pair of ports that can be configured so that one will take over data transmission should the other fail See also main port and standby port RJ 45 Standard 8 wire connectors for IEEE 802 3 10BASE T networks RMON Remote Monitoring A subset of SNMP MIB II that allows monitoring and management capabilities by addressing up to ten different groups of information RPS Redundant Power System A device that provides a backup source of power when connected to the Switch server farm A cluster of servers in a centralized location serving a large user population SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol A protocol which allows IP to run over a serial line connection SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol originally designed to be used in managing TCP IP internets SNMP is presently implemented on a wide range of computers and networking equipment and may be used to manage many aspects of network and end station operation Spanning Tree Protocol STP A bridge based system for providing fault tolerance on networks ST
204. ement changes made To search for an entry enter the appropriate information and click Find to remove and entry enter the appropriate information and click Delete 94 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings This table allows the user to create igmp multicast group profiles and specify multicast address lists on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings as shown below Tene Mulicas Grob Profile meting Profile Mame fo te 32 characters Delete All Total Entries 1 Profile Mame Group List Figure 3 33 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window To configure the multicast address list once a profile has been created click on the hyperlinked Group List to reveal the following window Profile Mame dg Multicast Address List Poo le 2352 21 235222 Multicast Address Group List 1 HO Multicast Address List 236 3 3 1 236 3 3 2 Figure 3 34 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window Group List Enter the Multicast Address List and click Add the new information will be displayed in the table Click lt lt Back to return to the IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window and click Delete to remove an entry IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings This window is used to configure the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings as
205. encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLANs can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained IEEE 802 10 Tag Octets g 1 2 3 4 Bestination Address 6 octets Source Address 6 octets EtherType Gx6I00 Tag Contr Information Begining of Data Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 octets Fear oy crr VLAN To VIB G2 bi y 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits Figure 3 3 IEEE 802 1Q Tag The EtherType and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original EtherType Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE 602 103 Tag Figure 3 4 Adding an IEEE 802 1Q Tag 69 Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLANs to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Unfortunately not all network devices are 802 1Q compliant These devices ar
206. enu The choices are Drop Utilizes the hardware Traffic Control mechanism which means the Switch s hardware will determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until the issue is resolved Shutdown Utilizes the Switch s software Traffic Control mechanism to determine the Packet Storm occurring Once detected the port will deny all incoming traffic to the port except STP BPDU packets which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Switch If the Countdown timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues the port will be placed in Shutdown Forever mode and is no longer operational until the user manually resets the port using the Port Configuration window in the Administration folder and selecting the disabled port and returning it to an Enabled status Choosing this option obligates the user to configure the Interval setting as well which will provide packet count samplings from the Switch s chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring Count Down The Count Down timer is set to determine the amount of time in minutes that the Switch will 0 or 5 30 wait before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm Only the switch continues to experience a traffic storm during this countdown period and the switch will shutdown the port This parameter is only useful for ports configured as Shutdown in their Action field and therefore will not operate for Hardware bas
207. er or not the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet s header These criteria can be specified on a basis of Packet Content MAC address or IP address Due to a chipset limitation the Switch supports a maximum of 12 access profiles The rules used to define the access profiles are limited to a total of 1536 rules for the Switch ACL Configuration Wizard The ACL Configuration Wizard will aid with the creation of access profiles and ACL rules The ACL Wizard will create the access rule and profile automatically To view this window click ACL gt ACL Configuration Wizard as shown below General ACL Rules Type Profile Mame C Profile ID 1 12 Access ID 1 128 From Action Option Apply To pf 214 8 Hote ACL Vizard will create the access profile and rule automatically For advanecd access profilefrule setting you can manually configure itin Access Profile List Figure 6 1 ACL Configuration Wizard window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Type Select the tyoe of ACL you wish to create either normal or CPU Profile Name Select a unique Profile Name for this profile set Profile ID 1 12 Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 12 Access ID 1 128 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 128 187 Use the drop down menu to select from MAC Addr
208. er the current date in day month and year to update the system clock Time in HH MM SS Enter the current time in hours minutes and seconds Click Apply to implement changes made 36 TimeZone Settings The following window is used to configure time zones and Daylight Savings time settings for SNTP To view this window click Configuration gt SNTP Settings gt TimeZone Settings as shown below Daylight Saving Time State Daylight Saving Time Offset In Minutes Time Zone Offsettram GMT In HH DST Repeating Settings From Which Week Of The Month From Day Of Week From Month From Time In HH hh ToMhich eek Of The Month To Day Of Week To Month To Time In HH hiti DST Annual Settings From Mort From Day From Time In HH wiil To Month To Day To Time In HH hihi Apply Figure 2 42 Time Zone and DST Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Time Zone and DST Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to enable or disable the DST Settings Time State Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to specify the amount of time that will constitute your local DST offset Time Offset in 30 60 90 or 120 minutes Minutes Time Zone Offset Use these pull down menus to specify your local time zone s offset from Greenwich Mean from GMT in Time GMT HH MM DST Repeating Settings Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mo
209. es gt CFM gt CFM CCM PDUs Forwarding Mode as shown below JA POL OPYaPFGIRd Node 3 Salequer Hote Cm Continuity Check Message Figure 3 79 CFM CCM PDUs Forwarding Mode window Use the drop down menu to forward by Software or Hardware and click Apply CFM MPs Reply LTRs This window is used to enable the CFM maintenance point reply Linktrace Response on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM MPs Reply LTRs as shown below All MPs Reply LTRs O Disabled Enabled Hote MP Maintenance Point Figure 3 80 CFM MPs Reply LTRs window Select Enable or Disable and click Apply CFM MIPCCM List This window is used to display the CFM maintenance intermediate point and continuity check message on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM MIPCCM List as shown below 124 Total Entries 0 A MAC Address Note MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point CCM Continuity Check Message Figure 3 81 CFM MIPCCM List window Connectivity Fault Management Settings This window is used to configure the CFM settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt Connectivity Fault Management Settings as shown below CFM State Disabled Enabled Connectnaty Fault Management Create MDj I N o Connectnaty Fault Management Settings MD Total Entries 0 Maintenance Domain s MD Mare MIP Creation sender TL Figure 3 82 Connectivity Faul
210. es of cryptology algorithms e Stream Ciphers There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch RC4 with 40 bit keys and RC4 with 128 bit keys These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use e CBC Block Ciphers CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block The Switch supports the 3DES EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard DES to create the encrypted text 3 Hash Algorithm This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks The Switch supports two hash algorithms MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host The user may implement any one or combination of 165 the ciphersuites available yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate Th
211. es that the port cannot have p2p status Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were true If the port cannot maintain this status for example if the port is forced to half duplex operation the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were False The default setting for this parameter is True The default value True is equivalent to the Auto value Port STP Allows STP to be Enabled or Disabled for the ports Restricted Role Toggle between True and False to set whether this port is restricted to be selected as a root port The default value is False Restricted TCN Toggle between True and False to set whether this port is restricted to be selected as a propagate topology change The default value is False Forward BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Click Apply to implement changes made MST Configuration Identification The following windows in the MST Configuration Identification section allow the user to configure a MSTI instance on the Switch These settings will uniquely identify a multiple spanning tree instance set on the Switch The Switch initially possesses one C ST or Common Internal Spanning Tree of which the user may modify the parameters for but cannot change the MSTI ID for and cannot be deleted To view this window click L2 Features gt Spanni
212. ess IPv4 Address or IPv6 Use the drop down menu to select from MAC Address IPv4 Address or IPv6 When IPv6 is selected the user can only enter the IPv6 source address or the IPv6 destination address at any one time Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Use the pull down menu to select an option the user can choose between Rate Limiting Change 1P Priority Replace DSCP and Replace ToS Precedence Apply To Use the pull down menu to select an option the user can choose between Ports VLAN Name or VLAN ID and enter the appropriate information Click Apply to implement changes made Access Profile List Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below in two parts To view this window click ACL gt Access Profile List as shown below Add ACL Profile Total Use
213. eter Description System Log To activate the System Log select Enabled or Disabled Save Mode Use this drop down menu to specify the method that will trigger a log entry You can choose between On Demand Time Interval and Log Trigger On Demand This method will only save log files when they manually tell the Switch to do so using the Save Log link in the Save folder Time Interval This method configures a time interval by which the Switch will save the log files The user may set a time between 7 and 65535 minutes Log Trigger This method will save log files to the Switch every time a log event occurs on the Switch Minutes 1 65535 Enter a time interval in minutes for which you would like a log entry to be made To add a new entry enter the appropriate information and click Apply System Log Server The Switch can send Syslog messages to up to four designated servers using the System Log Server To view this window click Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log Server as shown below Add System Log Server server ID Severity Server IP Address Facility UDP Port 514 or 6000 65535 Status Disabled System Log Server List Server ID Server P Address Facility LIDP Port Figure 2 18 System Log Server window The following parameters can be set 20 Parameter Description Syslog server settings index 1 4 Server IP Address The IP address of the Syslog server UDP Port
214. eter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server server_group Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch Enable Method Lists The Enable Method List Settings window is used to set up Method Lists to promote users with user level privileges to Administrator Admin level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined by the Administrator A maximum of eight Enable Method Lists can be implemented on the Switch one of which is a default Enable Method List This default Enable Method List cannot be deleted b
215. etransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the server does not respond Click Apply to add the server host Entries will be displayed in the table on the lower half of this window NOTE More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other Login Method Lists This command will configure a user defined or default Login Method List of authentication techniques for users logging on to the Switch The sequence of techniques implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of techniques for example TACACS XTACACS local the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no response comes from the server host the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the local account database set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user When the local method is used the privilege level will be dependant on the local account privilege configured on the Switch When the user logins to the device successfully through TACACS XT
216. evel certain security screens and windows will not be made available to view or to Table 2 1 below summarizes Admin Operator and User level privileges Enter a password for the new user Confirm New Retype the new password Password To add a new user enter the appropriate information and click Apply To delete an account click the corresponding Delete button To modify an existing user account click Edit as shown below Js A GUA Add User Accounts Note PasswordfUser Name should be less than 15 characters Total Entries 1 s Right Old Password Mew Password Cantirm Password Encryption Default Figure 2 16 User Accounts window Enter the Old Password for the account the New Password you wish to use and retype the new password in the Confirm Password field Use the drop down menu to select the type of encryption Default Plain Text or Sha 1 and click Apply NOTICE In case of lost passwords or password corruption please refer to the D Link website and the White Paper entitled Password Recovery Procedure which will guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue Admin Operator and User Privileges Recently added to the levels of security offered on the Switch the Operator level privilege will allow users to configure and view configurations on the Switch except for those involving security features which are still left to the Admin privilege Operator users can be authenticated throu
217. evel privileges to administrator privileges he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is locally set on the Switch To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Local Enable Password Settings as shown below 178 ocal Enable Password setings Old Local Enable Password Max 15 characters Mew Local Enable Password confirm Local Enable Password A Figure 5 42 Local Enable Password window To setthe Local Enable Password set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Old Local Enable If a password was previously configured for this entry enter it here in order to change it to Password a new password New Local Enable Enter the new password that you wish to set on the Switch to authenticate users Password attempting to access Administrator Level privileges on the Switch The user may set a password of up to 15 characters Confirm Local Enable Confirm the new password entered above Entering a different password here from the Password one set in the New Local Enabled field will result in a fail message If the user has configured the user privilege attribute of the RADIUS server for example User A has Admin privilege and the login is successful the device will assign the correct privilege level according to the RADIUS server to the user However if the user does not configure the user privilege attribute and logs in successfully the
218. ew entry and Delete All to remove an entry 82 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings The table allows the user to configure Protocol VLAN settings The lower half of the table displays any previously created settings To view this window click L2 Features gt 802 1v Protocol VLAN gt 802 1v Protocol VLAN Settings as shown below Add New Protocol VLAN Group ID vi 1 4094 e 802 1p Priority O Group Name w O YLAN Name Port List e g 1 6 Dal Ports Protocol VLAN Table Total Entries 0 VLAN Mame Group ID 802 19 Priority Figure 3 16 Protocol VLAN Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Click the corresponding radio button to select a previously configured Group ID from the drop down menu Click the corresponding radio button to select a previously configured Group Name from the drop down menu Click the radio button to enter the VID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create Click the radio button to enter a VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create 802 1p Priority This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded t
219. f a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize fin finish src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff which you wish to filter dst port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff to be filtered dst port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff to be filtered Protocol_id lt 0x0 0xff gt Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt Enter a value defining the mask options behind the IP header Click Apply to implement changes made Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List table shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button to view the specifi
220. f the Switch IP address has not yet been changed read the introduction of the DGS 3700 Series CLI Manual for more information To view this window click Configuration gt IP Address as shown below ee LT E Static DHCP BOOTP IP Interface Management WYLAN Mame Interface Admin State IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Gateway Apply IP Interface IP Address Subnet task Gateway Status Link Status Figure 2 4 IP Address Settings window The upper part of the page allows you to manually assign the Switch s IP address subnet mask and default gateway address 1 Select Static at the top of the screen 2 Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask 3 If you want to access the Switch from a different subnet from the one it is installed on enter the IP address of the Gateway If you will manage the Switch from the subnet on which it is installed you can leave the default address 0 0 0 0 in this field 4 Ifno VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you can use the default VLAN Name The default VLAN contains all of the Switch ports as members lf VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you will need to enter the Management VLAN Name of the VLAN that contains the port connected to the management station that will access the Switch The Switch will allow management access from stations with the same VID listed here NOTE The Switch s factory default IP address is 10 90 90 90 with a s
221. figuration Settings The following window is used to configure firmware information set in the Switch The DGS 3700 Series has the capability to store two firmware images in its memory To view this window click Configuration gt Dual Configuration Settings as shown below Version Size Bytes Update Time From Boat 1 00 8031 17208 2009 01 14 01 27 22 G108 E531 88CC Guest Cons Empty Set Boot Active Delete means the current active configuration Ra means configuration Update through Serial PortiR5232 Ti means configuration Update through TELNET S means configuration Update through SMMP AA means configuration Update through WEB SSH means configuration Update through SSH SIMD means configuration update through Single IP Management Figure 2 37 Dual Configuration Settings This window displays the following information Parameter Description States the ID number of the configuration file located in the Switch s memory The Switch can store two configuration files for use ID 1 will be the default boot up configuration file for the Switch unless otherwise configured by the user Displays the firmware version set in the Switch 32 Size bytes Displays the size of the configuration file in bytes Update time Displays the time that the configuration file was updated to the Switch Displays the location from which the configuration file was uploaded 0 Displays the name of the user device that update
222. figured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLANs can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLANs also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLANs can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated Notes About VLANs No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLANs without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs The Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLANs and Port Based VLANs The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1Q tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named default The default VLAN has a VID 1 The member po
223. file Settings Edit window To configure the Group List Settings click the hyperlinked Group List Profile ID 12 Profile Mame RoB Multicast Address List Pe FFO203FFO2 FFOS Multicast Address Group List O Multicast Address List Figure 3 52 Multicast Address Group List Settings Group List window Enter the multicast Address List starting with the lowest in the range and click Add To return to the IP Multicast Profile Settings window click the lt lt Back button 103 Ls Na A WI IN IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings The IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings enables the user to configure the ports or VLANs on the switch that will be involved in the Limited IPv6 Multicast Range The user can configure the range of IPv6 multicast addresses that will be accepted on the ports or VLANs To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings as shown below C d ee a A tests Total Entries O Lan ID Profile ID Figure 3 53 IPv6 Limited Multicast Range Settings window To add a new range enter the information and click Add to delete an entry enter the information and click Delete IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings The IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings allows users to configure the ports or VLANs on the switch that will be apart of the max number of multicast groups that can be learned To view this window click L2 Features gt ML
224. formational authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Enable Admin failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through Console Informational authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web from lt userlP gt Informational authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt MAC lt macaddr gt Successful Enable Admin through Telnet from Informational lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt MAC lt macadar gt 2 1 Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA none method Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA server Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA server Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA server Enable Admin failed through Web authenticated by AAA server Successful Enable Admin through Telnet authenticated by AAA server Enable Admin failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA server Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA server Enable Admin failed through SSH authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Enable Admin failed through Console due to AAA server timeout or improper
225. forwarded Interval 20 120 Specifies the maximum number of seconds between successive statistic counter information To disable the interval check the Disabled box Click Apply to implement the changes made 50 Single IP Management Simply put D Link Single IP Management is a concept that will stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using stacking ports or modules There are some advantages in implementing the Single IP Management feature 1 SIM can simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling the network to handle increased bandwidth demand 2 SIM can reduce the number of IP address needed in your network 3 SIM can eliminate any specialized cables for stacking connectivity and remove the distance barriers that typically limit your topology options when using other stacking technology Switches using D Link Single IP Management labeled here as SIM must conform to the following rules SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled through the Command Line Interface or Web Interface SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user s network There are three classifications for SIM The Commander Switch CS which is the master switch of the group Member Switch MS which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group and a Candidate Switch CaS which is a Switch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not
226. frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to which you are sending the copies Also the target port for the mirroring cannot be a member of a trunk group Please note a target port and a source port cannot be the same port 105 Loopback Detection Settings The Loopback Detection function is used to detect the loop created by a specific port This feature is used to temporarily shutdown a port on the Switch when a loop detecting packet has been looped back to the switch When the Switch detects that these packets are received from a port or a VLAN it signifies a loop on the network The Switch will automatically block the port or the VLAN and send an alert to the administrator The Loopback Detection port will restart change to discarding state when the Loopback Detection Recover Time times out The Loopback Detection function can be implemented on a range of ports at a time The user may enable or disable this function using the pull down menu To view this window click L2 Features gt Loopback Detection Settings as shown below DODDACR Wetec far ds Sara LBD State Disabled Enabled Loopback Detection Global Settings Mode Port Based ka Interval 1 32767 ser Trap Status Recover Time 0 or 60 17 000000 sec From Port State Loopdetect State Loop Status Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 56 Loo
227. from the group at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active Both devices must support LACP Passive LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot initially send LACP control frames In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically one end of the connection must have active LACP ports see above Click Apply to implement changes made 89 Traffic Segmentation Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single port to a group of ports on either a single switch or a group of ports on another switch in a switch stack This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to using VLANSs to limit traffic but is more restrictive lt provides a method of directing traffic that does not increase the overhead of the Master switch CPU This page allows you to view which port on a given switch will be allowed to forward packets to other ports on that switch Select a port number from the drop down menu to display the forwarding ports To configure new forwarding ports for a particular port select a port from the menu and click Apply To view this window click L2 Features gt Traffic Segmentation as shown below Traffic Segmentation Settings From Port Forward Portlist Clear All Select All Pone 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Apply r Forward Portlist Oo so Mm E i ri an ee e ea PS e Figure 3
228. fy a UDP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff Protocol_id lt 0x0 Oxff gt Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask user_define_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt Enter a value defining the mask options behind the IP header Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window PU ACL Profile Details Profile ID Profile Type Owner Type DSCP ICMP Show All Profiles Figure 6 32 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for IP IPv4 The window shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for IPv 6 209 Select Profile ID select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Pwd ACL IPvb ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask IPvB Class IPvE Flow Label IPVE Address IPv6 Class J iPv i Class IPv6 Flow Label C Py Flow Label Figure 6 33 Add CPU ACL Profile window for IPv6 The following parameters may be configured for the IPv6 filter Parameter Description Select Profile ID Use the drop down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 5 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 or packet content mask This will change the
229. g Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address Destination IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address ICMP Type icmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field within each packet type lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the type field within each packet code lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the code field within each packet Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header You must then specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value or specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP 194 code value Select IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts o
230. ge of ports to set for IP MAC Binding Use the pull down menu to Enable or Disable these ports for IP MAC Binding Enabled Strict This mode provides a stricter method of control If the user selects this mode all packets will be sent to the CPU thus all packets will not be forwarded by the hardware until the S W learns the entries for the ports The port will check ARP packets and IP packets by IP MAC Port Binding entries When the packet is found by the entry the MAC address will be set to dynamic state If the packet is not found by the entry the MAC address will be set to block Other packets will be dropped The default mode is strict if not specified The ports with strict mode will capture unicast DHCP packets through the ACL module If configuring IP MAC binding port enable in strict mode when IP MAC binding DHCP_snoop is enabled it will create an ACL profile and the rules according to the ports If there is not enough profile or rule space for ACL profile or rule table it will return a warning message and will not create ACL profile and rules to capture unicast DHCP packets Enabled Loose This mode provides a looser way of control If the user selects loose mode ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets will be sent to the CPU The packets will still be forwarded by the hardware until a specific source MAC address is blocked by the software The port will check ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets by IP MAC PORT Binding entries Whe
231. gh Warning Low Warning Apply High Alarm mW Low Alarm mv High Warning mv Low Warning mW Figure 2 82 DDM Tx Power Threshold Settings window The following fields can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured This is the highest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the alarm will be taken This is the lowest threshold for the alarm When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the alarm is taken High Warning This is the highest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter rises above this value action associated with the warning is taken Low Warning This is the lowest threshold for the warning When the operating parameter falls below this value action associated with the warning is taken Click Apply to implement changes made DDM Rx Power Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the threshold of Rx power for specific ports on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt DDM gt DDM Rx Power Threshold Settings as shown below From Port To Port High Alarm Low Alarm High Warning Low Warning P mw w dw jw High Alarm mm Low Alarm mW High Warning mV Low Warning mw Figure 2 83 DDM Rx Power Threshold Settings window 64 The following fields can be configured Parameter Description
232. gh either the local authentication method of the Switch or through the Access Authentication Control feature discussed later in this document Once the user has logged in to the Switch in the Operator level certain security screens and windows will not be made available to view or to configure Only Admin level users have access to these features There are three levels of user privileges Admin Operator and User Some menu selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User or Operator privileges The following table summarizes the Admin Operator and User privileges Management Admin Operator User 18 User Account Management Community Strings and Trap Stations Update Firmware and Configuration Files View User Accounts Table 2 1 Admin Operator and User Privileges 19 System Log Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for System Log Configurations including System Log Settings and System Log Host System Log Settings This window allows the user to enable or disable the System Log and specify the System Log Save Mode Settings To view this window click Configuration gt System Log Configuration gt System Log Settings as shown below CJ Sateaguan SystemLog Disabled Enabled System Log Save Mode Settings Figure 2 17 System Log Settings window The following parameters can be set Param
233. gine Checking Interval Example Figure 5 1 Mapping QoS on the Switch For every consecutive checking interval that reveals a packet flooding issue the Switch will double the time it will accept a few ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets In the example above the Switch doubled the time for dropping ARP and IP broadcast packets when consecutive flooding issues were detected at 5 second intervals First stop 5 seconds second stop 10 seconds third stop 20 seconds Once the flooding is no longer detected the wait period for limiting ARP and IP broadcast packets will return to 5 seconds and the process will resume Once in Exhausted mode the packet flow will decrease by half of the level that caused the Switch to enter Exhausted mode After the packet flow has stabilized the rate will initially increase by 25 and then return to a normal packet flow To view this window click Security gt Safeguard Engine as shown below Safeguard Engine State Disabled Enabled Safeguard Engine Current Status Mormal CPU Utilization Settings Rising Threshold 20 100 Trap Log Disabled Falling Threshold 20 100 Made Fury Note D Link Safeguard Engine is a robust and innovative technology developed by D Link which will automatically throttle the impact of packet flooding into the switch s CPU It will keep D Link Switches better protected fram being too frequently interrupted by malicious viruses or worm attacks Figure 5
234. gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Policy Settings as shown below Authentication Policy Disabled Response Timeout 0 255 Sec User Attempts 1 255 a times Apply Enable Admin Authentication policy is disabled Figure 5 35 Authentication Policy Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameters Description Authentication Policy Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Authentication Policy on the Switch Response Timeout 0 255 This field will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user The user may set a time between 0 and 255 seconds The default setting is 30 seconds User Attempts 1 255 This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will be locked out of further authentication attempts Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds before another authentication attempt Telnet and web users will be disconnected from the Switch The user may set the number of attempts from 7 to 255 The default setting Is 3 Click Apply to implement changes made Application Authentication Settings This window is used to configure switch configuration applications console Telnet SSH web for login at the user level and at the administration level Enable Admin utilizing
235. gure the Authenticator 1 The 802 1X State must be Enabled Security 802 1X 802 1X Global settings 2 The 802 1X settings must be implemented by port Security 802 1X 802 1X Port Settings 3 A RADIUS server must be configured on the Switch Security 802 1X Authentication RADIUS Server gme Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Workstation Authentication Server Client Figure 5 17 The Authenticator 156 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Client The Client is simply the endstation that wishes to gain access to the LAN or switch services All endstations must be running software that is compliant with the 802 1X protocol For users running Windows XP or Windows Vista that software is included within the operating system All other users are required to attain 802 1X client software from an outside source The Client will request access to the LAN and or Switch through EAPOL packets and in turn will respond to requests from the Switch Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Workstation Authentication Server Client Figure 5 18 The Client Authentication Process Utilizing the three roles stated above the 802 1X protocol provides a stable and secure way of authorizing and authenticating users attempting to access the network Only EAPOL traffic is allowed to pass through the specified port before a successful authentication is made This
236. h CaS This is a switch that is ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the SIM group The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group of a switch by manually configuring it to be a MS of a SIM group A switch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and will take on the following characteristics It is not a CS or MS of another Single IP group It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group additional switches may join the group through a direct connection to the Commander switch Only the Commander switch will allow entry to the candidate switch enabled for SIM The CS will then serve as the in band entry point for access to the MS The CS s IP address will become the path to all MS s of the group and the CS s Administrator s password and or authentication will control access to all MS s of the SIM group With SIM enabled the applications in the CS will redirect the packet instead of executing the packets The applications will decode the packet from the administrator modify some data then send it to the MS After execution the CS may receive a response packet from the MS which it will encode and send it back to the administrator When a CS becomes a MS it automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community include read write and read only to which the CS belongs However if a MS has its own IP address it can belong to SNMP communities
237. h of time between sending IGMP queries Max Response Time This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed to wait for a 1 25 sec response for MLD port listeners The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 7 and 25 seconds Default 70 Robustness Value 1 255 Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The user may choose a value between 1 and 255 with a default setting of 2 If a subnet is expected to be lossy the user may wish to increase this interval Last Listener Query Interval Specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages 1 25 sec including those sent in response to leave group messages A value between 1 and 25 The default is 7 second Data Driven Group Expiry Specifies the data driven group expiry in seconds The user may specify a time Time 1 65535 between 7 and 65535 with a default setting of 260 seconds Querier State The default is Disabled lf the field displays Disabled it will always be in MLD Snooping non querier state Fast Done Used to enable or disable the fast done state of the switch This field is disabled by default Used to enable or disable MLD snooping for the specified VLAN This field is Disabled by default Report Suppression Used to enable or disable MLD Snooping report suppression for the specified VLAN Data Driven Learning State If the state is Enabled it allows the switch to be selected as a MLD Querier
238. he DiffServ Code part of each packet header Enter a value between 0 and 63 Time Range Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports Specifies the access rule can take effect on one port or a range of ports To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Rule List window to view the following window 214 PU ACL Rule Details Profile ID 5 Access ID 1 Profile Type IP Action Ports 2 VLAN RG Show All Rules Figure 6 42 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for IP To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile To configure the Access Rules for IP open the CPU Access Profile List window and click Add View Rules for an IPv6 entry This will open the following window Action Show Details Delete Rules Figure 6 43 CPU Access Rule List window for IPv6 To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding Delete Rules button To add a new Access Rule click the Add Rule button Kdd Access Rule Profile Information Profile ID 3 Profile Type Owner Type CPU ACL IPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label Yes Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treatthe corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 100 Class e 9
239. he Switch remains in the quiet state This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the authentication server The default setting is 30 seconds MaxReq 1 10 The maximum number of times that the Switch will retransmit an EAP Request to the client before it times out of the authentication sessions The default setting is 2 TxPeriod 1 65535 This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine This value determines the period of an EAP Request Identity packet transmitted to the client The default setting is 30 seconds ReAuthPeriod A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic reauthentication of 1 65535 the client The default setting is 3600 seconds ReAuthentication Determines whether regular reauthentication will take place on this port The default setting is Disabled PortControl This allows you to control the port authorization state Select forceAuthorized to disable 802 1X and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required This means the port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802 1X based authentication of the client If forceUnauthorized is selected the port will remain in the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The Switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface If Auto is selected it will enable
240. he following parameters may be configured 28 Parameter Description IP Address Enter the IP address of the interface Enter the Subnet mask of the interface Enter the default gateway of the out of band management networks Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the IP interface Link Status Displays the current configurations of the out of band management interface Click Apply to implement changes External Alarm Settings This window is used to display and configure the messages receiving from the RJ 45 alarm port when external alarm occurs The alarm port is designed to collect the alarm message generated by the 3 party alarm generator While receiving the alarm messages the Switch will send out alarm traps to the NMS according to the message you configured To view this window click Configuration gt External Alarm Settings as shown below Alarm Message Normal External Alarm 1 Occurred Normal External Alarm 2 Occurred Edit Normal External Alarm 3 Occurred Edit Normal External Alarm 4 Occurred Edit Figure 2 28 External Alarm Settings window To modify an existing message click the corresponding Edit button and retype the new Alarm Message as shown below Alarm Message External Alarm 2 Occurred External Alarm 3 Occurred External Alarm 4 Occurred Figure 2 29 External Alarm Settings window Edit Enter the new information and click Apply to implement changes made DHCP Auto Configuration
241. he security offered in this situation is open to attack 158 Host Based Network Access Control slo J RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch 802 1X 02 1X 802 1X 8021X 8021X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port Network access uncontrolled port Figure 5 21 Example of Typical Host Based Configuration In order to successfully make use of 802 1X in a shared media LAN segment it would be necessary to create logical Ports one for each attached device that required access to the LAN The Switch would regard the single physical Port connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct logical Ports each logical Port being independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state The Switch learns each attached devices individual MAC addresses and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then use to communicate with the LAN via the Switch 159 802 1X Global Settings This window is used to configure the 802 1X Global Settings on the Switch To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Global Settings as shown below DUZ ODE tal Authentication Mode Disabled w Authentication Protocal RADIUS EAP w Forward EAPOL POL Disabled ka Max User 1 1536 1536 Mo Limit Figure 5 22 802
242. he user to add a profile to which multicast IPv4 address es reports are to be received on specified ports or VLANs on the Switch This function will therefore limit the number of reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch The user may set an IP Multicast address or range of IPv4 Multicast addresses to accept reports Permit or deny reports Deny coming into the specified switch ports or VLANs To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings as shown below Profile 10 Profile Mame 1 tax 32 characters Total Entries 0 Profile Mame Figure 3 36 IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Profile ID Use the drop down menu to choose a Profile ID Profile Name Enter a name for the IPv4 Multicast Profile To edit and entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button Profile ID Profile Name Delete All Total Entries 1 Profile Mame Group List Pp Figure 3 37 IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings Edit window To configure the Group List Settings click the hyperlinked Group List 96 Profile ID Profile Mame RAG Multicast Address List te 235 2 2 1 235 2 2 2 Multicast Address Group List O MO Multicast Address List Figure 3 38 IP Multicast Address Group List Settings Group List window Enter the multicast Addre
243. her than a table Transmitted TX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Errors gt Transmitted TX as shown below 231 rm AN B A FS Y A i AQ fy 7 A Y A d A O gt a J i an a a fr x1 Pat L cr Bs j f a _ A Ae ee DNGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series aver 2 Giaabit t Switch User Manual Ly 9 U0UU Tae LIAO SIS UU TE OGIICGS Lady MUI OT OWO USCI Wialliual y ua 1000 ann ExDeter 200 CRCError 700 Latecall 600 Ext all 500 a A Sing Call 400 pees Collision SUL 200 100 UnitiPacketsi Time Interval lis w Record Number 200 ShowHide i ExDeter W CRCEror i Latecoll Iw ExColl W SingColl W Collision Figure 7 16 Transmitted TX window for errors To view the Transmitted TX Table window click the link View Table which will show the following table ExDeter CRC Error LateCcoll Exc all SsingGaoll Collision Figure 7 17 Transmitted TX Table window for errors The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select
244. his Priority Apply Hote WO Maintenance Domain MA Maintenance Association MEP Maintenance Endpoint LAM Loophack Message Figure 3 83 CFM Loopback Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description MEP Name The name of the Maintenance End Point Max 32 characters MEP ID 1 8191 The ID for the Maintenance End Point between 7 and 8797 MD Max 22 The Maintenance Domain Name characters MA Max 22 The Maintenance Association Name characters MAC Address The destination MAC address LBMs Number 1 The number of LBMs to be sent the default value is 4 65535 LBM Payload The payload length of the LBM to be sent the default value is O Length 0 1500 LBM Payload The arbitary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV along with the indication of whether Pattern the Data TLV is to be included Max 1500 characters 126 Click Apply to implement changes made CFM Linktrace Settings This window is used to configure the CFM linktrace settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Linktrace Settings as shown below MEP Name O MEP ID 1 8191 MD Name 7 MA Name IFR MAC Address TTL 2 255 PDU Priority v MEP Name O MD Name MA Name mePpa s9 Transaction ID Source MEP Destination Hote MA Max 22 characters Maintenance Association MD Max 22 characters Maintenance Domain MEP Mai
245. ic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Click Apply to implement the configured settings The window will automatically refresh with new updated statistics Change the view parameters as follows Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Show Hide Check whether or not to display Five Secs One Min and Five Mins 221 Port Utilization The Port Utilization window displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Utilization as shown below Y Safacuar Apply Port_Util Uniti Time Interval 1s e Record Number 200 Show Hide e Port_Ultil Figure 7 4 Port Utilization window To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Change the view parameters as follows Parameter Description CA Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Select number of times the Switch wi
246. ield will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC binding When enabled the Switch will send a trap log message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC binding configuration set on the Switch DHCP Snoop State Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the DHCP Snoop State for IP MAC Binding Click Apply to implement the settings made IMP Binding Port Settings Select a port or a range of ports with the From Port and To Port fields Enable or disable the port with the State Allow Zero IP and Forward DHCP packet field and configure the port s Max entry To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Binding Port Settings as shown below From Port To Port State Allow Zero IF Forward DHCP Packet Max Entry 1 50 uo w Disabled v Disabled v Enabled y 6 CN Limit Allow Zero IP Forward DHEP Packet hax Entry Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled mon om A on oh on oh oh oh cn on Figure 5 5 IMP Binding Port Settings window The following fields can be set or modified Parameter Description 148 From Port To Port Select a port or ran
247. ies the slot number to display 1 5 Specifes that the 15 minute intervals will be displayed in chronological order with 1 being the most recent 1 2 Specifies that the daily intervals will be displayed in chronological order with 1 being the most recent Enter the appropriate information and click Find the information will be displayed in the CPU Utilization table System Log This window is used to view the Switch s history log as compiled by the Switch s management agent To view this window click Monitoring gt System Log as shown below Log Type Regular Log w Total Entries 6 Date Time Log Text 2009 01 21 00 47 36 successful login through Web Lisername Anonymous 2009 01 21 00 47 05 successful login through web sername Anonymous 2009 01 21 00 46 38 successful login through web Jsername Anonymous 2009 01 21 00 27 41 Fort 1 link up 1000mbps FULL duplex 2009 01 21 00 27 41 Port 5 link up 100Mbps FULL duplex 2009 01 21 00 27 41 System started up lt lt Back Figure 7 49 System Log window The Switch can record event information in its own logs to designated SNMP trap receiving stations and to the PC connected to the console manager Click Next to go to the next page of the System Log window Clicking Clear Log will allow the user to clear the Switch History Log The information in the table is categorized as 293 Parameter Description A counter incremented whenever an entry to
248. iew existing SNMP Community Table configurations and to create a SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string e An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch s SNMP agent e Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects will be accessible to the SNMP community e Read write or read only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Community Table as shown below Add Community Access Right Read Only Total Entries 2 View Mame Access Right private Communityview read_write public Community view read_only Figure 2 49 SNMP Community Table window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Community Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch The view name must exist in the
249. ile ID 1 Profile Type Ethernet Owner Type CPU ACL VLAN Mask Yes 802 1P Yes Keep an input field as blank to treatthe corresponding option as do not care Access ID 1 100 VLAN Mask VLAN ID 802 1P 0 7 Rule Action Action Permit Time Range Name d OOo E e 9 1 4 6 9 Figure 6 38 Add Access Rule window for Ethernet To setthe Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Access ID 1 100 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 100 212 Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered Ethernet Type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s 0 FFFF header Time Range Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch Ports sd Specifies the access rule will take effect on one port or a range of ports To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Rule List window to view the following window CPU ACL Rule Details Profile ID 1
250. ill not check the validity of the packet s option 82 field DHCP Relay Agent This field can be toggled between Replace Drop and Keep by using the pull down menu lt Information Option 82 is used to set the Switches policy for handling packets when the DHCP Agent Information Policy Option 82 Check is set to Disabled The default is Replace Replace The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Drop The packet will be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Keep The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client DHCP Relay Option This function enables or disables the DHCP option 60 state When option 60 is enabled if 60 State the packet does not have option 60 then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 60 The relay servers will be determined based on either option 60 or per IPIF configured servers If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 then the IPIF configured servers will be ignored lf the relay servers are not determined by option 60 then the IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers DHCP Relay Option This function enables or disables the DHCP option 61 state When option 61 is enabled if 61 State the packet does not have option 61 then the relay servers cannot be determi
251. in failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt due Telnet from user dueto AAA to AAA server timeout or improper configuration server timeout or improper Username lt username gt MAC lt mac gt configuration Warning Warning Enable Admin failed through Enable Admin failed through SSH from lt userlP gt due SSH from user due to AAA to AAA server timeout or improper configuration server timeout or improper Username lt username gt MAC lt mac gt configuration Successful Enable from user Successful Enable from lt userlP gt Module AAA Informational Module AAA Enable failed from user Enable failed from lt userlP gt Module AAA Warning Module AAA Warning AAA server lt serverlP gt Protocol lt protocol gt Warning AAA server response is wrong response is wrong AAA doesn t support this AAA doesn t support this functionality Informational functionality Port Security Port security has exceeded Port security violation mac addrss lt macaddr gt on its maximum learning size and locking address full port lt unitID portNum gt will not learn any new addresses Safeguard Safeguard Engine is in normal Safeguard Engine enters NORMAL mode Informational Safeguard Engine is in packet mode safeguard Engine enters EXHAUSTED mode Warning Multicast storm occurrence Port lt portNum gt Multicast storm is occurring Warning Port shut down due to a Port lt portNum gt is currently shut down due to a
252. ing this port is to manually recover it using the Port Configuration window in the Configuration folder and selecting the disabled port and returning it to an Enabled status To utilize this method of Storm Control choose the Shutdown option of the Action field in the window below To view this window click QoS gt Traffic Control as shown below Traffic Control Settings From Port To Port Action Count Down 0 or 5 30 Time Interval 5 30 Threshold 0 255000 pktis a qu La Apply Apply Storm Control Type Traffic Trap Settings ppt lt Storm Control Type Action Threshold Count Down Interval Mone Drop 131072 o Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 Mone Drop 131072 A a Oo co D D D mm A A o A A Oa A Aa aa a an o 4 _ 5 ab D e 3 _ ia 11 12 mm Hote For unicast storm traffic the violated action is always drop Figure 4 4 Traffic Control window 134 The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Traffic Control Settings From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Select the method of traffic Control from the pull down m
253. ion will be displayed in the table Click lt lt Back to return to the IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window and click Delete to remove an entry MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings This window is used to configure the MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings as shown below Sal lBauar Multicast WL AN v Global State Disabled Enabled Multicast VLANiv6 Forward Unmatched O Disabled OEnabled WLAN Name VID 2 094 State Disabled Replace Source IP e 9 FEB0 201 Member Port e 9 1 6 Source Port e g 1 6 Tagged Member Port e g 1 4 6 Total Entries 0 VID VLAN Mame Replace Source IP Member Port Tagged Port source Port Figure 3 49 MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN the user wishes to modify the MLD Snooping Settings for VID 2 4094 This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN the user wishes to modify the MLD Snooping Settings for State Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Replace Source IP Enter an IP address that new IP address to be used Member Port Select the ports that will be members of the Multicast VLAN Eg Ports 1 to 4 and port 6 e g 1 6 Source Po
254. ip address or the ip address of the entity you wish to advertise to IPv4 IPv6 is a management IP so the IP information will be sent with the frame when the mgt_addr config is enabled Click Find to implement changes made LLDP Basic TLVs Settings This window is used to enable the settings for the Basic TLVs Settings An active LLDP port on the Switch always includes mandatory data in its outbound advertisements There are four optional data types that can be configured for an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of these data types from outbound LLDP advertisements The mandatory data type includes four basic types of information end of LLDPDU TLV chassis ID TLV port ID TLV and Time to Live TLV The mandatory data types cannot be disabled There are also four data types which can be optionally selected These include Port Description System Name System Description and System Capability To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Basic TLVs Settings as shown below From Port 011 Aye To Part 01 Ay Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Port Description System Mame System Description System Capabilities Apply Port Description system Mame System Description Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 a T a Figure 3 69 LLDP Basic TLVs Settings window Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
255. is function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server The Switch supports SSLv3 and TLSv1 Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host Download Certificate This window is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server The certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network lt contains information on the owner keys for authentication and digital signatures Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function The Switch only supports certificate files with der file extensions The Switch is shipped with a certificate pre loaded though the user may need to download more depending on user circumstances Ciphersuite This window will allow the user to enable SSL on the Switch and implement any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch A ciphersuite is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The Switch possesses four possible ciphersuites for the SSL function which are all enabled by default To utilize a particular ciphersuite disable the unwanted ciphersuites leaving the desi
256. isplayed in chronological order with 1 being the most recent 1 2 Specifies that the daily intervals will be displayed in chronological order with 1 being the most recent Enter the appropriate information and click Find 252 Browse Historical Utilization This window displays information regarding the historical utilization of the CPU and memory The counters are set up in 15 minute and one day intervals There is a maximum of five 15 minute historical utilization entries supported for each port with one being the most recent 15 minutes of data The Switch also displays utilization information based on a per day basis with a maximum of two historical statistic entries supported To view this window click Monitoring gt Historical Counter amp Utilization gt Browse Historical Utilization as shown below srowse Historical L atic e 15 Minute Y slot 1 5 PU Utilization 1 Day Slot 1 21 Jan 2009 04 49 36 20 Jan 2009 04 49 36 Figure 7 48 Browse Historical Utilization window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description CPU Memory Specify CPU or Memory to display the historical utilization information 15 Minutes 1 Day Choose whether to view information relating to 15 minute intervals or 1 day intervals 15 Minutes Specifies historical utilization information based on 15 minute intervals 1 Day Specifies historical utilization information based on one day intervals Specif
257. k L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings as shown below From Port To Part 01 w MACIPHY Configuration Status Disabled Link Aggregation Disabled Maximum Frame Size Disabled MACIPHY Configuration Status Link Aggregation Maximum Frame Size co som mh E oo ha Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 3 71 LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select a range of ports to be configured MAC PHY This TLV optional data type indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit MAC PHY Configuration configuration status TLV This indicates it is possible for two ends of an IEEE 802 3 link to be Status configured with different duplex and or speed settings and still establish some limited network connectivity More precisely the information includes whether the port supports the auto negotiation function whether the function is enabled whether it has auto negotiated advertised capability and what is the operational MAU type The default state is Disabled Link Aggregation The Link Aggregation option indi
258. ked 111 MST Contiguration dental Mass e 112 SIP NSA Ee SUING paco oline pila 113 MSTRPOPINMO Malo N enny acabes TIO cdo iras pld 114 Forwarding amp Elle Md arta dido da item 115 Unicasti FO Wald uscar iii iii 115 M lticast Forwarding did 115 Multi ast Filtering MO hcn O E E 116 A a a 116 LEDP Glo Dal Sets e lalo ta e ota TA 117 WLIDIP P OM SS Un Se add 118 LEDP Management Address List ais rr o e dd e ld de ld o ad 119 LLDP Basie TENS SONO tit 119 PDIP DOU WE SS CGS caos 120 ELIDIP DO GEV SS Cts ssor cats healer dence eget tati 121 WILD IP Statisties SV SOU se ccs ct nn eae a a Gene sa deat inden nob a cow bash enceteder seth hucmosete deeap tant a ead 121 EL DP OCGA Or MTOM MatlON rn A A its 122 ELOR Remote On IMIOFMIAl OWN id a a ill dido clio 123 A esse tea let de ad ea Sisal eh he Matas dah aa M thal teh adie alas sata 123 SFA Bl A e ee et ae ee eee ere ee er ee 123 CEM CCM PDUs Porwarding MOC srta dt a a aai 124 ISIS CY LETRAS e dace 124 CFM MIPFGGM LIS oringa ricotta tits 124 Connectivity Fault Management Seting Ss iio 125 CFM LoopDack SellndS siii into a a 126 CIN IEIIK a CE SGUN Sennaa o idol 127 Eme A Musicas ina ii 128 Ethenmet OAM Sets no an et scare es TA a a E 128 Ethernet OAM Configuration Settings e e ll a foc e 129 DOS 130 Advantages OF DO rt ica 130 VAST STIG OOS aeann E ii A 131 MOL BIOCKING EVERIO Neuen e E T E caia 133 Bana Wwicth COMtUOl axis a iltines NisinaDentecsnadueiacedectesuudiers 133 AI ANG SO A P
259. l port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Remote Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Port Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Click Close to close the Property window 57 Commander Switch Icon default35 26 30 idefaultjas Collapse Property Property Figure 2 67 Right Clicking a Commander Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand To expand the SIM group in detail Property To pop up a window to display the group information Member Switch Icon Configure Property Property i Figure 2 68 Right Clicking a Member icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Remove from group Remove a member from a group Configure Launch the web management to configure the Switch Property To pop up a window to display the device information Candidate Switch Icon Add to group Property default4 default4 Add to group Property Figure 2 69 Right Clicking a Candidate icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Add to group Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog for the user to e
260. late Specifies the action when the packet is in red color mode e Permit Permits the packet e Replace DSCP Allows yout to change the DSCP of the packet e Counter Allows you to set the counter of the packet e Drop Drops the packet Click Apply to implement changes made click Back to return to the ACL Flow Meter 219 Monitoring Device Status Cable Diagnostic CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packet Size Memory Utilization Packets Errors Port Access Control Browse ARP Table VLAN IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Browse Session Table CFM MAC Address Table Browse VLAN Counter Statistics Ethernet OAM Historical Counter amp Utilization System Log Device Status The Device Status window displays status information for Power Status Temperature and Side Fan Status To view this window click Monitoring gt Device Status as shown below Power Status Temperature Celsius Side Fan Status AC Active Fan 1 ShutDown 0 RPM DG Fail Fan 2 ShutDown 0 RPM Fan 3 ShutDown 0 RPM Figure 7 1 Device Status window Click the Refresh button to update the status table Cable Diagnostic This window displays the details of copper cables attached to specific ports on the Switch If there is an error in the cable this feature can determine the type of error and the position where the error has occurred To view this window click Monitoring gt Cable Diagnostic as shown below 220
261. lating outbound LLDP advertisements in the local port brief table shown below To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Local Port Information as shown below Show Normal Forti Subtype Fort ID Fort Description RMON Fort 1 on Unit 1 RMON Port 2 on Unit 1 RMON Port 3 on Unit 1 RMON Port 4 on Unit 1 RMON Fort 5 on Unit 1 RMON Fort amp on Unit 1 RMON Port r on Unit 1 RMON Fort on Unit 1 RMON Port 9 on Unit 1 RMON Fort 10 on Unit 1 RMON Port 11 on Unit 1 RMON Fort 12 on Unit 1 Figure 3 73 LLDP Local Port Information window To view the information on a per port basis click the Show Normal button which will display the following window LLDP Local Port Normal Table LLDP Normal Ports Pot lO Subtype Local Port ID 111 Port Description RMON Port 4 on Unit 1 Port PYID 1 Management Address Count show Detail PPY ID Entries Show Detail VLAN Entries show Detail Protocol Identity Entries Count show Detail MACIPHY Contiguration Status Show Detail Link Aggregation show Detail Maximum Frame Size 1536 Figure 3 74 LLDP Local Port Information Show Normal window Use the drop down menu to select a port and click Find the information will be displayed on the lower half of the window To return to the previous window click the Show Brief button To view details of individual parameters click the hyperlinked Show Detail which will reveal the following window 122 LLDP Local Management Address Detail Table
262. le Waj El ht mS OO Sa eS 5h 00M es eS 0 4 505 0M A i i eS a E 0 ki oy TT e a e a eS o 0 0 La sR RO eo RD Bo Ro oe ey ey a Figure 4 8 QoS Scheduling The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Enter the port or port list you wish to configure Class ID Select the Class ID from 0 7 to configure for the QoS parameters Scheduling Strict The highest class of service is the first to process traffic That is the highest class of Mechanism service will finish before other queues empty Weight Use the weighted round robin WAR algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service When Weight is selected a field appears next to this field for the user to specify the maximium number of packets The specified hardware priority queue will be allowed to transmit before allowing the next lowest priority queue to transmit its packets The value is ranged from 1 to 127 Click Apply to implement changes made In Band Manage Settings This window allows the user to specify a priority handling of untagged in band management packets received by the Switch The priority value entered in this window will be used to determine which of the eight hardware priority queues the packet is forwarded to To view this window click QoS gt In Band Manage Settings as shown below 139 Priority Default w Apply Figure 4 9 In Band Manage Settings
263. le are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined in the config mirror port command Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set Priority Enter a priority value if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Replace Priority Enter a replace priority manually if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Replace DSCP 0 Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the 63 selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Replace ToS Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet 192 Prece
264. le switch upload and downloads for firmware configuration files and log files as follows e Firmware The switch now supports multiple MS firmware downloads from a TFTP server e Configuration Files This switch now supports multiple downloading and uploading of configuration files both to for configuration restoration and from for configuration backup MS s using a TFTP server e Log The switch now supports uploading multiple MS log files to a TFTP server 4 The user may zoom in and zoom out when utilizing the topology window to get a better more defined view of the configurations Single IP Settings All switches are set as Candidate CaS switches as their factory default configuration and Single IP Management will be disabled This window is used to enable the SIM for the Switch using the Web interface To view this window click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Single IP Settings as shown below SiM State Disabled e Role State Candidate w Group Mame Discovery Interval 30 90 Hold Time Count 100 255 Figure 2 59 Single IP Settings window disabled Change the SIM State to Enabled and the Role State to Commander using the pull down menu and click Apply 92 SiM State Enabled ka Group Mame Discovery Interval 30 90 Hold Time Count 100 255 Figure 2 60 Single IP Settings window enabled The following parameters can be set Parameters Description Use the pull dow
265. lear 187695140 850127 Figure 7 11 UMB_cast RX Table window for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Bytes Counts the number of bytes successfully sent on the port Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Multicast Broadcast and Unicast Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Transmitted TX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking
266. ll be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Check whether or not to display Port Util Packet Size The Web Manager allows packets received by the Switch arranged in six groups and classed by size to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Two windows are offered To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packet Size as shown below 222 IGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Laver 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual PA asar 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 1024 1518 200 100 Unitipackets sec Time Interval is w Record Number 200 Show Hide iv Ed e 65 127 lw 120 255 W 256 511 W 512 1023 iw 1024 1518 Figure 7 5 Packet Size window To view the Packet Size Table window click the link View Table which will show the following table OHE Frame Size Frames isec 128 255 256 511 1024 151 Figure 7 6 Packet Size Table window The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one s
267. lobal Settings DHCP Relay Interface Settings DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings DHCP Realy Option 61 Default Settings and DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings DHCP Relay Global Settings This window is used to enable and configure DHCP Relay Global Settings on the Switch The relay hops count limit allows the maximum number of hops routers that the DHCP messages can be relayed through to be set lf a packet s hop count is more than the hop count limit the packet is dropped The range is between 1 and 16 hops with a default value of 4 The relay time threshold sets the minimum time in seconds that the Switch will wait before forwarding a DHCP REQUEST packet If the value in the seconds field of the packet is less than the relay time threshold the packet will be dropped The range is between 0 and 65 536 seconds with a default value of O seconds To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Global Settings as shown below DHCP Relay State Disabled ka DHCP Relay Hops Count Limit 1 16 DHCP Relay Time Threshold 0 65535 DHCP Relay Option 82 State Disabled ka DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check Disabled ka DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy Replace w DHCP Relay Option 60 State Disabled ka DHCP Relay Option 61 State Disabled Figure 2 20 DHCP Relay Global Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description DHCP
268. long to two VLAN groups Ports 8 9 and 10 are not configured to any VLAN group This means ports 8 9 and 10 are in the same VLAN group 71 VLAN and Trunk Groups The members of a trunk group have the same VLAN setting Any VLAN setting on the members of a trunk group will apply to the other member ports ns NOTE In order to use VLAN segmentation in conjunction with port trunk groups you can first ly set the port trunk group s and then you may configure VLAN settings If you wish to change the port trunk grouping with VLANs already in place you will not need to reconfigure the VLAN settings after changing the port trunk group settings VLAN settings will automatically change in conjunction with the change of the port trunk group settings Double VLANs Double or Q in Q VLANs allow network providers to expand their VLAN configurations to place customer VLANs within a larger inclusive VLAN which adds a new layer to the VLAN configuration This basically lets large ISP s create L2 Virtual Private Networks and also create transparent LANs for their customers which will connect two or more customer LAN points without over complicating configurations on the client s side Not only will over complication be avoided but also now the administrator has over 4000 VLANs in which over 4000 VLANs can be placed therefore greatly expanding the VLAN network and enabling greater support of customers utilizing multiple VLANs on the network Double
269. loopback mode Click Appy to implement changes VLAN Counter Settings The VLAN Counter Settings table is used to create the control entry for VLAN traffic flow statistsics The user can create control entries to count statistics for specific VLANs or to count statistics for specific ports on specific VLANs The statistics can be either byte count or packet count and can be counted for different frame types To view this window click Configuration gt VLAN Counter Settings as shown below O VID List e 0 1 4 6 OVLAN Name Ports e g 1 5 po O aliPorts Packet Type Counter Type VID 1 4094 LAN Counter Table Packet Type Counter Type Figure 2 40 VLAN Counter Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description VID List Check the radius button to identify the VLAN by its VLAN ID Enter the VID or VID list you wish to configure VLAN Name Check the radius button to identify the VLANs by their VLAN name Ports e g 1 5 Enter a list of ports or check the All Ports check box to specify all the ports Packet Type Use the drop down menu to select the packet type broadcast Specifies to count broadcast packets unicast Specifies to count unicast packets multicast Specifies to count multicast packets all Specifies to count all packets Counter Type Use the drop down menu to select the counter type To count at the packet level select Packet to count at the by
270. ly absorb available network bandwidth and can cause network failure console port The port on the Switch accepting a terminal or modem connector It changes the parallel arrangement of data within computers to the serial form used on data transmission links This port is most often used for dedicated local management CSMA CD Channel access method used by Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 standards in which devices transmit only after finding the data channel clear for some period of time When two devices transmit simultaneously a collision occurs and the colliding devices delay their retransmissions for a random amount of time data center switching The point of aggregation within a corporate network where a switch provides high performance access to server farms a high speed backbone connection and a control point for network management and security Ethernet A LAN specification developed jointly by Xerox Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet networks operate at 10Mbps using CSMA CD to run over cabling Fast Ethernet 100Mbps technology based on the Ethernet CMSA CD network access method Flow Control IEEE 802 3z A means of holding packets back at the transmit port of the connected end station Prevents packet loss at a congested switch port forwarding The process of sending a packet toward its destination by an internetworking device full duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received at the same time and
271. ly an ICMP type value or specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value Select IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires a source port mask and or a destination port mask is to be specified The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize fin finish src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff which you wish to filter dst port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to filter select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff dst port mask Speci
272. m Port To Port A consecutive group of ports that are part of the VLAN configuration starting with the selected The user can choose between UNI or NNI role UNI To select a user network interface which specifies that communication between the specified user and a specified network will occur NNI To select a network to network interface specifies that communication between two specified networks will occur Use the drop down menu to enable or disable missdrop If missdrop is enabled the packet that does not match any assignment rule in the Q in Q profile will be dropped If disabled then the packet will be assigned to the PVID of the receiving port Outer TPID The Outer TPID is used for learning and switching packets Use Inner Priority The priority given to the inner tag will be copied to the outer tag if this setting is enabled Add Inner Tag hex Specify whether to add inner tag for ingress untagged packets If set the inner tag will be 0x1 Oxffff added for the ingress untagged packets and thus the packets egress to the NNI port will be double tagged Click Apply to implement changes VLAN Translation Settings VLAN translation translates the VLAN ID carried in the data packets it receives from private networks into those used in the Service Providers network To view this window click L2 Features gt QinQ gt VLAN Translation Settings as shown below 80 LAN From Port CYID 1 5 7 Action SP ID 1 4094
273. mational server successfully This lt username gt 802 1p default priority will assign to the port 802 1x Authentication failure for lt reason gt from 802 1X Authentication failure Username lt username gt Port lt portNum gt MAC Warning lt macadar gt 802 1X Authentication 802 1x Authentication success from Username intonation success lt username gt Port lt portNum gt MAC lt macadar gt DHCP Detect untrusted DHCP server E IP address Detected untrusted DHCP server IP lt ipaddr gt Port Arona lt portNum gt MBAC Login OK MAC AC login successful MAC lt macaddr gt port 2 5 Egress bandwidth assigned from RADIUS server after by RADIUS server lt egressBandwidth gt to port lt portNum gt account Informational successfully This egress lt username gt bandwidth will assign to the MAC AC login rejected MAC lt macaddr gt port Roget lt portNums VID lt vlanID gt Warning MAC AC host aged out MAC lt macadar gt port DGS 3700 Series Trap a Trap Name OID Variable Bind Bind MIB MIB Name MIB Name Severity coldStart ss AA Critical 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 SNMPv2 MIB WarmStart None RFC1907 Critical 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 SNMPv2 MIB authenticationFailure None RFC1907 Informational 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 SNMPv2 MIB linkDown iflndex RFC2863 Informational 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 ifAdminStatus IF MIB ifOperStatus linkup ifIndex RFC2863 Informatio
274. mitations 1 The subnet of the authentication VLAN s IP interface must be the same as that of the client If not configured properly the authentication will be permanently denied by the authenticator 2 If the client is utilizing DHCP to attain an IP address the authentication VLAN must provide a DHCP server or a DHCP relay function so that client may obtain an IP address 3 The authentication VLAN of this function must be configured to access a DNS server to improve CPU performance and allow the processing of DNS UDP and HTTP packets 4 Certain functions exist on the Switch that will filter HTTP packets such as the Access Profile function The user needs to be very careful when setting filter functions for the target VLAN so that these HT TP packets are not denied by the Switch 5 The Redirection Path must be set before the Web based Access Control can be enabled If not the user will be prompted with an error message and the Web based Access Control will not be enabled 6 Ifa RADIUS server is to be used for authentication the user must first establish a RADIUS Server with the appropriate parameters including the target VLAN before enabling the Web based Access Control on the Switch Web based Access Control Settings This window is used to configure the Switch for Web based Access Control Settings on the Switch To view this window click Security gt Web Authenication gt Web based Access Control Settings as shown below
275. mmitted Burst Size of the packet The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1Kbyte This parameter is optional and the default value is 4 1024 The max value is 16 1024 PBS Kbyte value 0 16384 Specifies the Peak Burst Size of the packet The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1Kbyte This parameter is optional and the default value is 441024 The max value is 16 1024 srTCM Single Rate Three Color Marker marks packets green yellow or red based on a rate and two burst sizes This is useful when only burst size matters e CIR 64Kbps value 0 15624 Specifies the Committed Information Rate of the packet The unit is 64Kbps That is to say 1 means 64Kbps CBS Kbyte value 0 16384 Specifies the Committed Burst Size of the packet The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1Kbyte The maximum value is 16 1024 EBS Kbyte value 0 16384 Specifies the Excess Burst Size of the packet The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1Kbyte The maximum value is 16 1024 Conform Specifies the action when the packet is in green color mode e Replace DSCP Allows you to change the dscp of the packet e Counter Allows you to set the counter of the packet Exceed Specifies the action when the packet is in yellow color mode e Permit Permits the packet e Replace DSCP Allows you to change the DSCP of the packet e Counter Allows you to set the counter of the packet e Drop Drops the packet Vio
276. mmunity Community Community Community Community restricted Community Community Community Community Community Community SHIP SMhiPy2 SMhiPys SM hl Py SoM hi Py2 SM hlPy SoM hilPy2 SMM Py SMM Py MoAuthhoPriv MoAuthhoPriy MoAuthhoPriv MoAuthhoPriv MoAuthhoPriv MoAuthhoPriv MoAuthhoPriv MoAuthho Priv MoAuthhoPriv Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Figure 2 47 SNMP Group Table window To delete an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the corresponding Delete button The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP group of SNMP users This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages Specify a SNMP group name for users that are allowed SNMP write privileges to the Switch s SNMP agent Specify a SNMP group name for users that can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch s SNMP agent SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used SNMPv2 Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMPv2 supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features SNMPv3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices through a combinatio
277. mplement your settings 136 802 1p User Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a user priority to each of the 802 1p priorities To view this window click QoS gt 802 1p User Priority as shown below 602 1p User Priority Settings From Port To Port Priority Class ID 602 1p User Priority Table Priority Class 2 Class O Class 1 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class h Class 7 Class 2 Class O Class 1 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 Class Class 2 Class O Class 1 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class h Class 7 Class 2 Class O Class 1 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class h Class 7 Class 2 Class O Place Y OAM ne oe KH oA A B w Kr Ode ee eK oO ee eK 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 E 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 a 4 El 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 Figure 4 6 802 1p User Priority window Once you have assigned a priority to the port groups on the Switch you can then assign this Class to each of the 7 levels of 802 1p priorities Click Apply to set your changes QoS Scheduling Mechanism Changing the output scheduling used for the hardware queues in the Switch can customize QoS As with any changes to QoS implementation careful consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower priority queues are affected Changes in scheduling may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss or significant transmission delays If you choose to customize this setting it is important to monitor network performance
278. munity String Type in the community string or SNMP V3 user name as appropriate SNMP V3 User Name To implement your new settings click Apply SNMP v6Host Table This window is used to specify the IPv6 host IP address to which the trap packets will be sent To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP v6Host Table as shown below MVP YbHO Add Host Table Host IPv6 Address O Liserbased security Model security Level MoAuthMoPriv Community String SMMPys User Name Total Entries 0 Host IPv6 Address SNMF Version Community Mame SNMPY3 User Mame Figure 2 51 SNMP V6Host Table window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Host lpv6 Address Enter the IPv6 host IP address to which the trap packet will be sent User based Security Used the drop down menu to select the user based security model Model SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP version 1 is a network management protocol that provides a means to 45 monitor and control network devices SNMPv2 Specifies that SNMP version 2 will be used The SNMP v2 supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features SNMPv3 Specifies that SNMP version 3 will be used SNMP v3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of
279. n To view this window click Security gt Trusted Host as shown below Permitted Access IP NetMask o Delete All Trusted Host Table Group Permitted Access Met hlask Hote Create a list of iFP addresses that can access the switch Your local hostlP address must be one ofthe IF addresses to avoid disconnection Figure 5 3 Trusted Host window To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button IP MAC Port Binding The IP network layer uses a four byte address The Ethernet link layer uses a six byte MAC address Binding these two address types together allows the transmission of data between the layers The primary purpose of IP MAC binding is to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized users Only the authorized client can access the Switch s port by checking the pair of IP MAC addresses with the pre configured database or when DHCP snooping is enabled the switch will automatically learn the IP MAC pairs by snooping DHCP packets and saving them to the IMPB white list If an unauthorized user tries to access an IP MAC binding enabled port the system will block the access by dropping its packet For the DGS 3700 Series active and inactive entries use the same database The maximum entry number is 511 The creation of authorized users can be manually configured by CLI or Web The function is port based meaning a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port The IP MAC Port Binding folder
280. n the receiving device will use the PVID to make VLAN forwarding decisions If the port receives a packet and Ingress filtering is enabled the port will compare the VID of the incoming packet to its PVID If the two are unequal the port will drop the packet If the two are equal the port will receive the packet Ingress Check This field can be toggled using the space bar between Enabled and Disabled Enabled enables the port to compare the VID tag of an incoming packet with the PVID number assigned to the port If the two are different the port filters drops the packet Disabled disables ingress filtering Ingress Checking is Disabled by default Acceptable Frame This field denotes the type of frame that will be accepted by the port The user may choose Type between Tagged Only which means only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted and Admit_All which mean both tagged and untagged frames will be accepted Admit_All is enabled by default Click Apply to implement changes made GVRP Global Settings The GVRP allows interoperability with other switches so the values of the GVRP timers can be configured This table is used to set the GVRP Global Settings To view this window click L2 Features gt GVRP Global Settings as shown below GVRP Timer Settings Join Time 100 100000 Leave Time 100 100000 Leave All Time 100 100000 HHI BPDU Address Settings NMI BPDU Address Hote Leave Time should be greater than 2 Join
281. n menu to either enable or disable the SIM state on the Switch Disabled will render all SIM functions on the Switch inoperable Role State Use the pull down menu to change the SIM role of the Switch The two choices are Candidate A Candidate Switch CaS is not the member of a SIM group but is connected to a Commander Switch This is the default setting for the SIM role Commander Choosing this parameter will make the Switch a Commander Switch CS The user may join other switches to this Switch over Ethernet to be part of its SIM group Choosing this option will also enable the Switch to be configured for SIM Group Name The user may enter a name for the group Discovery The user may set the discovery protocol interval in seconds that the Switch will send out Interval 30 90 discovery packets Returning information to a Commander Switch will include information about other switches connected to it Ex MS CaS The user may set the Discovery Interval from 30 to 90 seconds Hold Time Count This parameter may be set for the time in seconds the Switch will hold information sent to it 100 255 from other switches utilizing the Discovery Interval The user may set the hold time from 100 to 255 seconds Click Apply to implement the settings After enabling the Switch to be a Commander Switch CS the Single IP Management folder will then contain four added links to aid the user in configuring SIM through the web includi
282. n of authentication and encrypting packets over the network User based Security Model Security Level The Security Level settings only apply to SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthNoPriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthPriv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted To implement the new settings click Apply 42 SNMP User Table This window displays all of the SNMP User s currently configured on the Switch and also allows you to add new users To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP User Table as shown below Add User User Mame Group Mame SMMP Version SAIMP Y3 Encryption Auth Protocol by Password Priv Protocol by Password Auth Protocal by Key Priv Protocol by Key Total Entries 1 Mone Mos Password Mone Password mE key None Key Group Mame SMMP Version Auth Protocol Priv Protocal initial initial Figure 2 48 SNMP User Table window The following parameters may be set Parameter Description UserName An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP users This name is used to specify the SNMP group c
283. n the Access Profile List table shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button to view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button Add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 3 1533 A aea ar d I A Ro ea O a es RTG___ Packet Content a Cros fara a Figure 6 23 Access Profile List Packet Content To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following window ACL Profile Details Profile ID Profile Name Profile Type Owner Type Chunk 1 Show All Profiles Figure 6 24 Access Profile Details Packet Content To return to the CPU Access Profile List click Show All Profiles to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules which will reveal the following window 203 Profile Information Profile ID 2 Profile Mame Profile Type Packet Content Owner Type Chunk 1 2 Value 000000001 Rule Detail Keep an input field as blank to treat the corresponding option as do not care Cl Auto Assign Access ID 1 128 Chunk 1 chunk 2 Chunk 3 Chunk 4 Rule Action Action Permit ka Priority 0 7 Replace Priority Replace DSCP 0 63 Replace Tos Precedence 0 7 Rx Rat
284. n the Save drop down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Configuration ID 1 to open the following window Current Status Completed Program Firmware Write Flash Status saved Figure 8 1 Save Configuration ID 1 window 255 oO TS Ilann RA lt tanh I lenr NASAIS ITCN I fear nani WIICN USer Manua r J J Save Configuration ID 2 Open the Save drop down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Configuration ID 2 to open the following window Current Status Completed Program Firmware Write Flash Status Saved Figure 8 2 Save Configuration ID 2 window Save Log Open the Save drop down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Log to open the following window Current Status Completed Program Firmware EEE Saved Figure 8 3 Save Log window Save All Open the Save drop down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save All to open the following window Current Status Completed Program Firmware EEE Saved Figure 8 4 Save All window 256 Configuration File Backup 8 Restore The Switch supports dual image storage for configuration file backup and restoration The firmware and configuration images are indexed by ID number 1 or 2 To change the boot firmware image use the Configuration ID drop down menu to select the desired configuration file to backup or restore The default Switch settings will use image ID 1 as the boot
285. n the packet is found by the entry the MAC address will be set to dynamic state If the packet is not found by the entry the MAC address will be set to block Other packets will be bypassed Allow Zero IP Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this feature Allow zero IP configures the state which allows ARP packets with 0 0 0 0 source IP to bypass Forward DHCP By default the DHCP packet with broadcast DA will be flooded When set to disable the Packet broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be forwarded This setting is effective when DHCP snooping is enabled under the case that DHCP packet which has been trapped by the CPU needs to be forwarded by the software This setting controls the forwarding behavior in this situation Max Entry 1 50 Specifies the maximum number of IP MAC Port Binding entries By default per port max entry is 5 Click Apply to implement changes 149 IMP Binding Entry Settings This table is used to create Static IP MAC Binding Port entries on the switch To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Binding Entry Settings as shown below IF Address MAC Address Ports PoC at Ports Apply View All Delete All Total Entries 0 IF Address MAC Address Mode Figure 5 6 IMP Binding Entry Settings window The following fields can be set or modified Parameter Description IP Address Enter the IP address to bind to the MAC address set belo
286. n with the VID List parameter VID List 1 4094 This field displays the VLAN IDs associated with the specific MSTI Click Apply to implement changes Click Edit to modify an entry and Delete to remove an entry STP Instance Settings This table is used to create STP Instance Settings on the Switch An STP instance may have multiple members with the same MSTP configuration There is no limit to the number of STP regions in a network but each region only supports a maximum of 16 spanning tree instances one unchangeable default entry VIDs can belong to only one Spanning tree instance at a time To view this window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Instance Settings as shown below STP Priority Settings Total Entries 1 Instance Status Instance Priority Disabled 327 68 Bridge Priority 32768 SYS 1D Ext 0 STP Instance Operational Status MSTP ID Designated Root Bridge External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Root Port hax Age Forward Delay Remaining Hops Last Topology Change Topology Changes Count Figure 3 60 STP Instance Settings window The following information can be set Parameter Description Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being modified An entry of 0 in this field denotes the CIST default MSTI Enter the new priority in the Priority field The user may set a priority value between 0 and 61440 To modify an entry click the E
287. nagement address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the station s point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS through a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 116 LLDP Global Settings This window is used to configure the LLDP Global Settings on the Switch When LLDP is enabled the Switch can start to transmit receive and process LLDP packets The specific function of each port will depend on the per port LLDP settings LLDP Global State is Disabled by default To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Global Settings as shown below LLDP State Disabled Enabled LLDP Forward Message Disabled Enabled Message Tx interval 5 32768 Message Tx Hold Multiplier 2 103 LLOP Reinit Delay 1 10 LLOP Tx Delay 1 6192 LLDP Notification Interval 5 3600 LLDP System Information Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address Chassis ID O0 21 91 AF 37 D0 System Mame System Description Gigabit Ethernet Switch System Capabilities Repeater Bridge Figure 3 66 LLDP Global Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description LL
288. nal 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 ifAdminStatus IF MIB ifOperStatus newRoot None V2 RFC1493 Informational BRIDGE MIB topologyChange None V2 RFC1493 Informational BRIDGE MIB Proprietary Trap List Trap Name OID Variable Bind Bind ATT MIB Name swL2macNotification swL2macNotifylnto L2Mgmt MIB Warning 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 101 2 2 100 1 2 0 1 SwlipMacBindingViolationTrap swlpMacBindingPortindex IPMacBind Warning 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 23 5 0 1 swlpMacBindingViolation P MIB swlpMacBindingViolationMac swPktStormOccurred swPktStormCtriPortindex V2 PktStormCtrl Warning 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 25 5 0 1 MIB swPktStormCleared swPktStormCtriPortindex V2 PktStormCtrl Warning 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 25 5 0 2 MIB swSafeGuardChgToExhausted swSafeGuardCurrentStatus V2 SAFEGUARD Warning 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 1 IEA swSafeGuardChg I oNormal swSafeGuardCurrentStatus V2 SAFEGUARD Warning 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 2 ENGINE MIB 2 6 swPowerStatusChg 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 11 2 2 2 0 1 swFanFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 11 2 2 3 0 1 swFanRecover 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 11 2 2 3 0 2 swMacBasedAuthLoggedSuccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 1 SwMacBasedAuthLoggedFail 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 2 SwMacBasedAuthAgesOut 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 35 11 1 0 3 SwExternalAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 11 2 2 5 0 1 SwDdmAlarmT rap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 72 4 0 1 SwDdmWarningTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 72 4 0 2 swL2PortLoopOccurred 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 10
289. nalyzer server will be deleted Infinite indicates that the analyzer server will never time out If not specified the default value is 400 Collector Address The IP address of the analyzer server If not specified the address will be 0 0 0 0 which means that the entry will be inactive Collector Port 1 65535 The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagrams If not specified the default value is 6364 Max Datagram size The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a single sample datagram If not 300 1400 specified the default value is 1400 Click Apply to implement the changes made sFlow Flow Sampler Settings This table is used to create sFlow flow sampler settings on the Switch By configuring the sampling function for a port a sample packet received by this port will be encapsulated and forwarded to the analyzer server at the specified interval To view this window click Configuration gt sFlow gt sFlow Flow Sampler Settings as shown below From Port To Part Analyzer Server ID 1 4 Rate 0 65535 Mix Header Size 18 256 m 3 a a O isd Total Entries O Analyzer Server IO Configuration Rate Active Rate MAX Header Size Figure 2 57 sFlow Flow Sampler Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specifies the port or list of ports to be configured Analyzer Server ID 1 The analyzer server id specifies the ID
290. name lt username gt IP Informational lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt SNMP SNMP request received with SNMP request received from lt ipAddress gt with invalid Informational invalid community string community string STP Topology changed Topology changed Instance d Port d Informational New Root selected CIST New Root bridge selected MAC s Priority d Informational Spanning Tree Protocol is Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled Informational enabled 268 Spanning Tree Protocol is Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled Informational disabled SSH Successful login through SSH Successful login through SSH Username lt username gt IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Login failed through SSH Login failed through SSH Username lt username gt IP Warning lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Logout through SSH Logout through SSH Username lt usernames gt IP Informational lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt SSH session timed out SSH session timed out Username lt username gt IP Informational lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt SSH server is enabled SSH server is enabled SSH server is disabled SSH server is disabled SSH authentication successful SSH authentication successful Username Informational lt username gt SSH authentication failed SSH authentication failed Username lt username gt _ Informational Authentication Policy is Authentication Policy is enabled Module AAA
291. name s IP s MAC S Port AS Login OK JWAC login rejected Username s IP s MAC s Port S Login fail JWAC host logout normally Username s IP s Logout normal MAC s Port s JWAC host logout forcibly Username s IP s Logout forcibly MAC s Port s CFM CFM cross connect VLAN lt vlanid gt Local MD Level lt mdlevel gt Port lt unitID portNum gt Direction lt mepdirection gt Remote MEPID lt mepid gt Cross connect is detected MAC lt macadar gt Error CFM CCM packet is CFM remote setting error MD Level lt mdlevel gt detected VLAN lt vlanid gt Local Port lt unitID portNum gt Direction lt mepdirection gt Remote MEPID lt mepid gt MAC lt macaddr gt Can not receive remote CFM remote down MD Level lt mdlevel gt MEP s CCM packet VLAN lt vlanid gt Local Port lt unitID portNum gt Direction lt mepdirection gt Remote MEP s MAC reports CFM remote MAC error MD Level lt mdlevel gt an error status VLAN lt vlanid gt Local Port lt unitID portNum gt Direction lt mepdirection gt D D D O D O al lt x gt gt gt E gt 3 gt 3 gt 5 5 X D 5 O O O O A O O O O 5 5 Remote MEP detects CFM CFM remote detects a defect MD Level lt mdlevel gt defects VLAN lt vlanid gt Local Port lt unitID portNum gt Informational Direction lt mepdirection gt Exte
292. ncluding voice data and video signals auto negotiation A feature on a port which allows it to advertise its capabilities for speed duplex and flow control When connected to an end station that also supports auto negotiation the link can self detect its optimum operating setup backbone port A port which does not learn device addresses and which receives all frames with an unknown address Backbone ports are normally used to connect the Switch to the backbone of your network Note that backbone ports were formerly Known as designated downlink ports backbone The part of a network used as the primary path for transporting traffic between network segmenis bandwidth Information capacity measured in bits per second that a channel can transmit The bandwidth of Ethernet is 10Mbps the bandwidth of Fast Ethernet is 100Mbps baud rate The switching speed of a line Also known as line speed between network segments BOOTP The BOOTP protocol allows you to automatically map an IP address to a given MAC address each time a device is started In addition the protocol can assign the subnet mask and default gateway to a device bridge A device that interconnects local or remote networks no matter what higher level protocols are involved Bridges form a single logical network centralizing network administration broadcast A message sent to all destination devices on the network broadcast storm Multiple simultaneous broadcasts that typical
293. nd memory Browse Historical Counter This window is used to display statistics about the packets sent and received by the Switch The counters are set up in 15 minute and one day intervals There is a maximum of five 15 minute historical statistic entries supported for each port with one being the most recent 15 minutes of data The Switch also displays statistics based on a per day basis with a maximum of two historical statistic entries supported To view this window click Monitoring gt Historical Counter amp Utilization gt Browse Historical Counter as shown below GT UYI E Port 1 15 Minute Slot 1 Start Time 21 Jan 2009 03 10 03 End Time 21 Jan 2009 02 55 03 Frame SizerType Frame Count Packets Tx 480460 Bytes Tx 226707670 Packets Fix Bytes Rx hd Re 65 127 RE 128 255 Rx 256 511 Fx 512 1023 RX 1024 1518 RX Unicast Fx Multicast RA Broadcast RA Figure 7 47 Browse Historical Counter window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description Pot Specifies the port you wish to view Packet Error Specifies information regarding valid packets or error packets 15 Minutes 1 Day Choose whether to view information relating to 15 minute intervals or 1 day intervals 15 Minutes Specifies statistics based on 15 minute intervals 1 Day Specifies statistics based on one day intervals Specifies the slot number to display 1 5 Specifes that the 15 minute intervals will be d
294. nds between transmitting IGMP Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed before sending an IGMP Time response report The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 1 and 25 seconds 1 25 Default 10 Robustness Value Adjust this variable according to expected packet loss If packet loss on the VLAN is expected 1 255 to be high the Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet loss This entry field allows an entry of 1 to 255 Default 2 queries Entries between 7 and 65535 seconds are allowed Default 125 Last Member This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages Query Interval including those sent in response to leave group messages Default 1 1 25 Sec Data Driven Group Allows the user to set the time that an IGMP Snooping data driven learning group will expire for Expiry Time 1 the specified VLAN 65535 Querier State Choose Enabled to enable transmitting IGMP Query packets or Disabled to disable The default is Disabled Fast Leave This parameter allows the user to enable the Fast Leave function Enabled this function will allow members of a multicast group to leave the group immediately without the implementation of the Last Member Query Timer when an IGMP Leave Report Packet is received by the Switch The default is Disabled State Select Enabled to implement I
295. ned based on option 61 The relay servers will be determined based on option 61 and the IPIF configured servers will be ignored If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61 then IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers Click Apply to implement any changes that have been made NOTE If the Switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client and the i information checking feature is enabled the switch drops the packet because it is invalid However in Er some instances you might configure a client with the option 82 field In this situation you should lj disable the information check feature so that the switch does not remove the option 82 field from the L packet You can configure the action that the switch takes when it receives a packet with existing option 82 information by configuring the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 Policy 24 The Implementation of DHCP Information Option 82 on the Switch The config dhcp relay option_82 command configures the DHCP relay agent information option 82 setting of the switch The formats for the circuit ID sub option and the remote ID sub option are as follows NOTE For the circuit ID sub option of a standalone switch the module field is always zero Circuit ID sub option format 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 efe Te ma 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Sub option type Length Circuit ID type
296. nfigured starting with the selected port DSCP Map Use the drop down menu to choose a DSCP Map you can choose between DSCP Priority DSCP DSCP and DSCP Color DSCP List 0 63 This field allows the user to enter a DSCP value in the space provided which will instruct the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding The user may choose a value between 0 and 63 Priority This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user Click Apply to implement changes 143 802 1p Map Settings This window is used to enable 802 1p Map Settings To view this window click QoS gt SRED gt 802 1p Map Settings as shown below From Fort Priority List O 7 Apply Figure 4 14 DSCP Map Settings window The following parameters may be set Parameter Description From port To port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Priority List 0 7 This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field i
297. ng In Band Manage Settings SRED The DGS 3700 Series supports 802 1p priority queuing Quality of Service The following section discusses the implementation of QoS Quality of Service and benefits of using 802 1p priority queuing Advantages of QoS QoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving bandwidth for important functions that require a large bandwidth or have a high priority such as VoIP voice over Internet Protocol web browsing applications file server applications or video conferencing Not only can a larger bandwidth be created but other less critical traffic can be limited so excessive bandwidth can be saved The Switch has separate hardware queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to and in turn prioritized View the following map to see how the Switch implements 802 1P priority queuing 130 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Implementation of QoS 802 1p Priority Tagging QoS QoS Class 4 Mesa 6 Class 0 e 7 L Packets without QoS tags will be forwarded to the QoS class based on the QoS 802 1p default priority set per individual port QoS Priority Incoming packets tagged with the QoS priorities 0 7 will be forwarded to the QoS Class as shown ooo booo boob oooO oo ode t q an e q p a ie R R R R gt E tayi k
298. ng Topology Firmware Upgrade and Configuration Backup Restore and Upload Log File Topology The Topology window will be used to configure and manage the Switch within the SIM group and requires Java script to function properly on your computer The Java Runtime Environment on your server should initiate and lead you to the topology window as seen below 53 File Group Device View Help defaultAF 37 D0 p Mud Device name Local port Speed Remote port Mac Address Model name amp defaultAF 37 D i detaultAr 3 D0 O0 21 91 AF 37 D0 DGS 3700 12 L2 Switch Figure 2 61 Single IP Management window Tree View The Tree View window holds the following information under the Data tab Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Remote Port Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Local Port Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the corresponding Switch Model Name Displays the full model name of the c
299. ng Tree gt MST Configuration Identification as shown below MST Configuration Identification Settings Configuration Marne 00 21 91 4F 37D00 Instance ID Settings MSTIID 1 15 gt Type Add WID w Total Entries 1 MSTI ID Delete Figure 3 59 MST Configuration Identification window The window above contains the following information 112 Parameter Description Configuration Name A previously configured name set on the Switch to uniquely identify the MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance If a configuration name is not set this field will show the MAC address to the device running MSTP This field can be set in the STP Bridge Global Set tings window Revision Level This value along with the Configuration Name will identify the MSTP region configured on 0 65535 the Switch The user may choose a value between 0 and 65535 with a default setting of 0 MSTI ID This field shows the MSTI IDs currently set on the Switch This field will always have the CIST MSTI which may be configured but not deleted Clicking the hyperlinked name will open a new window for configuring parameters associated with that particular MSTI Type This field allows the user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings The user has two choices Add VID Select this parameter to add VIDs to the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter Remove VID Select this parameter to remove VIDs from the MSTI ID in conjunctio
300. ng Tree parameters for use on the switch level the Switch allows for the configuration of groups of ports each port group of which will have its own spanning tree and will require some of its own configuration settings An STP Group will use the switch level parameters entered above with the addition of Port Priority and Port Cost An STP Group spanning tree works in the same way as the switch level spanning tree but the root bridge concept is replaced with a root port concept A root port is a port of the group that is elected based on port priority and port cost to be the connection to the network for the group Redundant links will be blocked just as redundant links are blocked on the switch level The STP on the switch level blocks redundant links between switches and similar network devices The port level STP will block redundant links within an STP Group It is advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to a VLAN group of ports The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port External Cost 0 Auto The external cost defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is O auto 0 auto Setting O for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified
301. ng interface providing a set of functions that applications use to communicate across networks NetBEUI the NetBIOS Enhanced User Interface was created as a data link layer frame structure for NetBIOS A simple mechanism to carry NetBIOS traffic NetBEUI has been the protocol of choice for small MS DOS and Windows based workgroups NetBIOS no longer lives strictly inside of the NetBEUI protocol Microsoft worked to create the international standards described in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002 NetBIOS over TCP IP NBT If the network administrator wants to block the network communication on more than two computers which use NETBUEI protocol it can use NETBIOS filtering to filter these kinds of packets If the user enables the NETBIOS filter the switch will create one access profile and three access rules automatically If the user enables the extensive NETBIOS filter the switch will create one more access profile and one more access rule NetBIOS Filtering Settings This window is used to configure the NetBIOS Filtering Setting To view this window click Security gt NetBIOS Filtering Settings as shown below Apply Figure 5 48 NetBIOS Filtering Settings window Enter the ports you wish to configure to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports and click Apply 186 ACL ACL Configuration Wizard Access Profile List CPU Access Profile List ACL Finder ACL Flow Meter Access profiles allow you to establish criteria to determine wheth
302. nitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database To globally set MAC notification on the Switch open the following window by opening the MAC Notification Settings in the Configuration folder MAC Notification Global Settings This window is used to configure the MAC Notification Global Settings for the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt MAC Notification Settings gt MAC Notification Global Settings as shown below 38 State Disabled Ww Interval 1 214 7403847 History Size 1 500 Figure 2 43 MAC Notification Global Settings window The following parameters may be viewed and modified Parameter Description The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification Up to 500 entries can be specified Click Apply to implement changes MAC Notification Port Settings This window is used to configure the MAC Notification Port Settings for the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt MAC Notification Settings gt MAC Notification Port Settings as shown below From Port State Disabled MAC Address Notification State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 2 44 MAC Notification Port Settings window The following parameters may be modified Parameter Description From Port To Port Select a port or group of ports to enable for MAC notificati
303. nitoring gt Browse VLAN Counter Statistics Table as shown below VID List e 9 1 4 6 O VLAN Name Pott List e 9 4 6 VID 1 4094 Port List po DT OWSE VLAN LOL Clear All VLAN Counter Statistics Table YID Fort Frame Type RX Frames RX Bytes Frames Per Sec Bytes Per Sec Figure 7 44 Browse VLAN Counter Statistics window 249 The functions used in the VLAN Counter Statistic table are described below Parameter Description VID List e g 1 4 Specifies the VLAN ID list that you wish to view 6 VLAN Name Specifies the VLAN Name VID 1 4094 Specifies the VLAN ID Port List Specifies the ports that are attached to the VLAN Enter the appropriate information and click Find the informationwill be displayed in the VLAN Counter Statistics Table To remove an entry enter the appropriate information and click Clear to remove all entries click Clear All Ethernet OAM This folder contains two windows to view Ethernet OAM Event Log information and Ethernet OAM Statistics Browse Ethernet OAM Event Log This window allows the user to view the Ethernet OAM event log information The Switch can buffer up to 1000 event logs The event log will provide and record detailed information about each OAM event Specify the port number and port list you wish to view and click Find To remove an entry enter the appropriate information and click Clear To view this window click Monitoring gt Ethe
304. nity to send packets just like round robin queuing For weighted round robin queuing if the weight for a CoS is set to 0 then it will continue processing the packets from this CoS until there are no more packets for this CoS The other CoS queues that have been given a nonzero value and depending upon the weight will follow a common weighted round robin scheme Remember that the DGS 3700 Series has eight priority queues and eight Classes of Service for each port on the Switch 132 HOL Blocking Pevention This window is used to enable HOL Prevention Settings on the Switch To view this window click QoS gt HOL Blocking Prevention Settings as shown below HOL Blocking Prevention State O Disabled Y Enabled Apply Figure 4 2 HOL Prevention Settings window Bandwidth Control The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected port To view this window click QoS gt Bandwidth Control as shown below n Sandundth Cantra From Port To Port Type Mo Limit Fate 64 1024000 Bandwidth Control Table Patt Rx Rate Kbittsech Tx Rate Kbitisech Effective Rx Kbittsech Effective Tx Kbitisech Mo Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Lirnit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Mo Limit Ho Limit Mo Limit
305. nk aggregation group Link aggregation allows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link This gives a bandwidth that is a multiple of a single link s bandwidth Link aggregation is most commonly used to link a bandwidth intensive network device or devices such as a server to the backbone of a network The Switch allows the creation of up to 6 link aggregation groups each group consisting of 2 to 8 links ports The aggregated links must be contiguous they must have sequential port numbers except the four optional Gigabit ports which can only belong to a single link aggregation group All of the ports in the group must be members of the 87 same VLAN and their STP status static multicast traffic control traffic segmentation and 802 1p default priority configurations must be identical Port locking port mirroring and 802 1X must not be enabled on the trunk group Further the aggregated links must all be of the same speed and should be configured as full duplex The Master Port of the group is to be configured by the user and all configuration options including the VLAN configuration that can be applied to the Master Port are applied to the entire link aggregation group Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group and a link failure within the group causes the network traffic to be directed to the remaining links in the group The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat a li
306. nk aggregation group as a single link on the switch level On the port level the STP will use the port parameters of the Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of the link aggregation group lf two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on the Switch STP will block one entire group in the same way STP will block a single port that has a redundant link To view this window click L2 Features gt Port Trunking as shown below Algorithm MAC source ka Total Entries 0 Group ID Type Master Port Member Ports Active Ports Flooding Ports Edit Trunking Information Hote Maximum 8 ports in a static or LACP group Group ID 1 6 m Master Port State Disabled Figure 3 24Port Trunking window The following fields can be set Parameter Description The algorithm that the Switch uses to balance the load across the ports that make up the port trunk group is defined by this definition Choose MAC Source MAC Destination MAC Source Dest IP Source IP Destination or IP Source Dest See the Link Aggregation section of this manual Group ID Select an ID number for the group between 7 and 6 Type This pull down menu allows you to select between Static and LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP allows for the automatic detection of links in a Port Trunking Group Master Port Choose the Master Port for the trunk group using the pull down menu control Active Port Shows the po
307. nooping gt IGMP Snooping Settings as shown below IGMP Global Settings IGMP Snooping State Disabled Enabled IGMP Data Driven Learning Settings Max Learned Entry value 1 1024 Total Entries 2 VLAN Mame default Disabled Modify Router Port RG Disabled Modify Router Port Figure 3 28 IGMP Snooping Settings window Clicking the Edit button will open the IGMP Snooping Parameters Settings window shown below VLAN ID VLAN Name Rate Limit imitati Querer IF Guerier Expiry Time Guery Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 Robustness Value 1 255 Last Member Query Interval 1 25 Data Driven Group Expiry Time 1 65535 SEC uerier State Fast Leave Disabled ka State Report Suppression Enabled e Data Driven Learning State Data Driven Learning Aged Out Disabled e Version Querier Role Non Querier Figure 3 29 IGMP Snooping Parameters Settings Edit window The following fields can be set Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN for which the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN for which the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings Rate Limit Displays the rate limitation The querier IP address to send IGMP queries Querier Expiry Displays the querier expiry time 92 mo o oo p The Query Interval field is used to set the time in seco
308. nt strings can be specified for the same relay server and the same string can be specified with multiple relay servers The system will relay the packet to all the matching servers To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings as shown below String Do Wax 255 characters Server IP eg10 90 90 90 Match Type ExactMatch Show All Delete All Total Entries 0 Figure 2 24 DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description sting Enter the specified string up to a maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters Enter the relay server IP address Match Type Use the drop down menu to select either Exact Match or Partial Match Exact Match The option 60 string in the packet must fully match the specified string Partial Match The option 60 string in the packet only needs to partially match the specified string Click Add to add a new entry To search for a particular entry enter the correct P Address or String and click Find To delete an entry select it and click Delete DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings This window is used to configure the DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings These settings are used to determine the rule to process those packets that have no option 61 matching rules To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings as shown below DHCP Relay
309. ntenance Endpoint Figure 3 84 CFM Linktrace Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description MEP Wome Thenane fhe vaeret OOOO Mo Wome TheMantnanssOomainName OOOO O O maname TheMantnans Assctoneme OOOO PDU Priority The 802 1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM If the PDU Priority is not specified it uses the same priority as CCMs sent by the MA Click Apply to implement changes made 127 Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAM Settings This window is used to configure the ports Ethernet OAM mode In Active mode the ports can initiate OAM discovery and start or stop remote loopback When a port in OAM enabled any change to the OAM mode will cause the OAM discovery to be restarted To view this window click L2 Features gt Ethernet OAM gt Ethernet OAM Settings as shown below Ethernet OAM Settings From Fort To Part Mode State Remote Loopback Received Remote Loopback Ethernet OAM Table A Local Client A OAM Disabled Mode Active hax QAMPOL 1518 Bytes Remote Loopback Support Unidirection Mot Supported Link Monitoring Support Variable Request Mot Supported POL Revision j Operation Status Disable Loopback Status Mo Loopback Local Client CAM Disabled Mode Active hax QAM POLI 1518 Bytes Remote Loopback Support Unidirection Mot Supported Link Monitoring Support Variable Request Mot Supported POL Revision j Operation Status Disable Loopback Status Mo Loopback P
310. nter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window 58 Input password Password Java Applet Window Figure 2 70 Input password window Property To pop up a window to display the device information as shown below Menu Bar The Single IP Management window contains a menu bar for device configurations as seen below File Group Device View Help Figure 2 71 Menu Bar of the Topology View The five menus on the menu bar are as follows File Print Setup Will view the image to be printed Print Topology Will print the topology map Preference Will set display properties such as polling interval and the views to open at SIM startup Group Add to group Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window Input password Password Java Applet Window Figure 2 72 Input password window Remove from Group Remove an MS from the group Device Configure Will open the web manager for the specific device View Refresh Update the views with the latest status Topology Display the Topology view Help About Will display the SIM information including the curren
311. nting the MAC address age out time in seconds The MAC Address Aging Time can be set to any value between 10 and 1 000 000 seconds The default setting is 300 seconds To view this window click Configuration gt MAC Address Aging Time as shown below MAC Address Aging Time 10 1 000000 Apply Figure 2 31 MAC Address Aging Time window Web Settings Web based management is Enabled by default If you choose to disable this by selecting Disabled you will lose the ability to configure the system through the web interface as soon as these settings are applied To view this window click Configuration gt Web Settings as shown below Web State O Disabled Enabled Port 1 65535 Figure 2 32 Web Settings window Telnet Settings Telnet configuration is Enabled by default If you do not want to allow configuration of the system through Telnet choose Disabled The TCP ports are numbered between 7 and 65535 The well known TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23 To view this window click Configuration gt Telnet Settings as shown below Telnet State O Disabled Enabled Port 1 65535 Apply Figure 2 33 Telnet Settings window 30 Password Encryption Password Encryption Status can be Enabled or Disabled in this window it is Disabled by default Password encryption allows the user to encrypt a password in the configuration file for additional security Select Enabled to change the password into encrypted f
312. o O Delete By Mac Delete By VLA Find By MAC Find By VLAN Total Entries 0 MAC Address VLAN Mame LAN ID Figure 5 45 MAC based Access Control Local MAC Settings To add a MAC address to the local authentication list enter the MAC address and the target VLAN name into their appropriate fields and click Apply To change a MAC address or a VLAN in the list click the corresponding Edit button To delete a MAC address entry enter its parameters into the appropriate fields and click Delete By MAC to delete a VLAN enter its parameters into the appropriate fields and click Delete By VLAN To search for a MAC or a VLAN enter the information in the appropriate fields and click Find By MAC or Find By VLAN 182 Web Authentication Web authentication also known as Web based Access Control is another port based access control method implemented similarily to the 802 1X port based access control method previously stated This function will allow user authentication through a RADIUS server or through the local authentication set on the Switch when a user is trying to access the network via the switch if the port connected to the user is enabled for this feature The user attempting to gain web access will be prompted for a username and password before being allowed to accept HTTP packets from the Switch When a client attempts to access a website that port is placed in the authentication VLAN set by the user All clients in this authentication V
313. o the CoS queue specified previously by the user Click the corresponding box if you want to set the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority 0 7 field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Port List e g 1 6 Select the specified ports you wish to configure by entering the port number in this field or check the Select All Ports box Search Port List This function allows the user to search all previously configured port list settings and display them on the lower half of the table To search for a port list enter the port number you wish to view and click Find To display all previously configured port lists on the bottom half of the screen click the Show All button to clear all previously configured lists click the Delete All button 83 RSPAN Settings This table controls the RSPAN function The purpose of the RSPAN function is to mirror the packets to a remote switch The packet travels from the switch where the monitored packet is received through the intermediate switch then to the switch where the sniffer is attached The first switch is also named the source switch RSPAN VLA
314. ocol 2 Configure the User Account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the SSH User Authentication Lists window There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user which are Host Based Password and Public Key 3 Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH client and the SSH server using the SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings window 4 Finally enable SSH on the Switch using the SSH Settings window After completing the preceding steps a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a secure in band connection SSH Settings The following window is used to configure and view settings for the SSH server To view this window click Security gt SSH gt SSH Settings as shown below eating Oi Sefer SSH Server State Disabled Enabled 55H Global Settings Wax Session 1 3 Connection Timeout 1 20 600 Authtail Attempts 2 20 Rekey Timeout Figure 5 31 SSH Settings window To configure the SSH server on the Switch modify the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description SSH Server State Enable or disable SSH on the Switch The default is Disabled Max Session 1 8 Enter a value between 7 and 8 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch The default setting is
315. ode Once the Switch enters the Password Recovery Mode all ports on the Switch will be disabled Boot Procedure V1 00 B06 Power On Self Test oooooooooooooooooooooooo ooo 100 MAC Address 00 19 5B EC 32 15 H W Version Al Please wait loading V1 00 B031 Runtime image 00 The switch is now entering Password Recovery Mode _ The switch is currently in Password Recovery Mode gt 3 In the Password Recovery Mode only the following commands can be used Command Parameters reset config The reset config command resets the whole configuration will be back to the default value reboot The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and restarts the switch A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the user to save the current settings reset account The reset account command deletes all the previously created accounts reset password The reset password command resets the password of the specified user If a username is not specified the password of all users will be 280 Command Parameters show account The show account command displays all previously created accounts 281
316. of MLD query messages emitted by the router The General Query is used to advertise all multicast addresses that are ready to send multicast data to all listening ports and the Multicast Specific query which advertises a specific multicast address that is ready These two types of messages are distinguished by a multicast destination address located in the IPv6 header and a multicast address in the Multicast Listener Query Message 2 Multicast Listener Report Comparable to the Host Membership Report in IGMPv2 and labeled as 131 in the ICMP packet header this message is sent by the listening host to the Switch stating that it is interested in receiving multicast data from a multicast address in response to the Multicast Listener Query message 3 Multicast Listener Done Akin to the Leave Group Message in IGMPv2 and labeled as 132 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message is sent by the multicast listening host stating that it is no longer interested in receiving multicast data from a specific multicast group address therefore stating that it is done with the multicast data from this address Once this message is received by the Switch it will no longer forward multicast traffic from a specific multicast group address to this listening host MLD Snooping Settings This table is used to enable MLD Snooping on the Switch and to configure the settings for MLD snooping To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Sno
317. of a server analyzer where the packet will be 4 forwarded Rate 0 65535 The sampling rate for packet sampling The actual rate is the configured rate value multiplied by 256 For example if the rate is 20 the actual rate 5120 One packet will be sampled from about 5120 packets If set to 0 the sampler is disabled If the rate is not specified its default value is 0 MAX Header Size 18 The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which will be sampled encapsulated 256 and forwarded to the server If not specified the default value is 128 Click Apply to implement the changes made 49 sFlow Counter Poller Settings This window is used to create the sflow counter poller settings on the Switch Within the sflow counter poller function the port statistics counter information will be forwarded to the server at the configured interval These counters are RFC 2233 counters To view this window click Configuration gt sFlow gt sFlow Counter Poller Settings as shown below From Fort To Port Analyzer Server ID 1 4 Interval 20 120 Delete All Total Entries 0 Analyzer Server ID Polling Interval sec Figure 2 58 sFlow Counter Poller Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specifies the port or list of ports to be configured Analyzer Server ID The analyzer server id specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet will be 1 4
318. of the DHCP server Up to four server IPs can be configured per IP Interface Click Apply to implement changes made DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings This window allows the user to configure the DHCP Relay Option 60 Default servers When there are no matching servers found for the packet based on option 60 the relay servers will be determined by the default relay server setting Similiarly when there is no match found for the packet the relay servers will be determined based on the default relay servers To view this window click Configuration gt DHCP Relay gt DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings as shown below Relay IP Address se 110 90 90 90 Wows 10 24 55 21 Delete 0 0 0 0 Delete 000 0 Delete 000 0 Delete Figure 2 23 DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description Relay IP Address Enter the specified IP address for the DHCP relay forward Use the pull down menu to choose either Relay or Drop When drop is specified the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further process When relay is selected the packet will be relayed based on the relay rules Click Add to add a new Relay IP Address entry Click Apply to implement changes made To remove any entries click the corresponding Delete button 26 DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings This window is used to configure option 60 relay rules on the Switch Differe
319. og while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults If the Switch is reset using this window and Save Changes is not executed the Switch will return to the last saved configuration when rebooted 257 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Laver 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual J J Reset Proceed with system reset except IF address log user account and banner O Reset Config Switch will be reset ta factory defaults Reset System Switch willbe reset to factory defaults and reboot Figure 8 7 Reset System window Download Firmware The following window is used to download firmware for the Switch AA O ive Image ID Figure 8 8 Download Firmware window Enter the Server IP address the Interface Name the path file name and select the desired Image ID Click Download to initiate the file transfer Reboot System The following window is used to restart the Switch Do you wantto save the settings Yes No Ifyou do not save the settings all changes made in this session will be lost Figure 8 9 Reboot System window Clicking the Yes radio button will instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non volatile RAM before restarting the Switch Clicking the No radio button instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch All of the configuration information entered from the last time Save Changes was executed will be lo
320. ole Interface ccccccccooconnccnnnccconoonncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnennns 11 IME AC Oss AAA A e o O damepastasotaaate E E E OO 11 PE OUTS SS UIA Se ace tet cease he een Sac tes ees aah cee aes drat desea cd eee as enone een anaes 13 PP GiINGIGIIDOF Se TINGS uta a ito aida 13 POR COMIQUE ee nett ee een eRe ect ee ee ee eee ee na ea 14 POWs SUES cd o pct 14 o o o o o ee eee ee eer ee eer ne ene oe erence eee eee eens ere ee 15 a ree etal ee res NNT cts ROR en tee ee ee aE nee ee ee eee Ee re 16 UIC ARP e E y e OO a castes austnte aa eaa aa 16 USerAccooUM Sustrato 17 SEA o A 20 System LOO S CHING e eraa rol bib 20 SE A tenet gecutnede ao yaa setteo ad caheakuea 20 SISTEMES SUENA CU GS corte tne a lod al 22 AGS FACTO Madden 23 DHCP Relay Global Seis a to 23 DHCP Relay Interace Sein acct aiads cess aaa 26 DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Seng nonien e A E A a a A 26 DHCP Relay OPHION 60 SEUA IS a a a adeuceeareda cota 27 DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings cuca A a bs 27 DACP Relay Option G1 SENGS o E E EA 28 Out of Band Management Setting Sci ld iii a 28 External Alarm SCORE a 29 DHCP ANO COMiIGUFATION SOWING S estoica lada iid 29 MAG Address Agihda Mies ii aliados 30 WeDSCUINOS plc tl iii olla 30 alo APA a a a a E terdacicactaeete ete 30 Password ENCON atar it daa 31 So a Ore oes oO Ren er een om eee eee eee nee eee ees 31 IGETINV AL Nota IA A os 31 Dial Contigua OMS a a 32 A oanconamcom seon
321. om the 802 1D STP standard RSTP was developed in order to overcome some limitations of STP that impede the function of some recent switching innovations in particular certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches The basic function and much of the terminology is the same as STP Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for RSTP This section introduces some new Spanning Tree concepts and illustrates the main differences between the two protocols Port Transition States An essential difference between the three protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way this transition relates to the role of the port forwarding or not forwarding in the topology RSTP combines the transition states disabled blocking and listening used in 802 1D and creates a single state Discarding In either case ports do not forward packets In the STP port transition states disabled blocking or listening or in the RSTP port state discarding there is no functional difference the port is not active in the network topology Table 6 2 below compares how the two protocols differ regarding the port state transition All three protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way Every segment will have a single path to the root bridge All bridges listen for BPDU packets However BPDU packets are sent more frequently with every Hello packet BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received
322. on D Link Switches xi Intended Readers The DGS 3700 Series Manual contains information for setup and management of the Switch This manual is intended for network managers familiar with network management concepts and terminology Typographical Conventions Convention Description In a command line square brackets indicate an optional entry For example copy filename means that optionally you can type copy followed by the name of the file Do not type the brackets Bold font Indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu item For example Open the File menu and choose Cancel Used for emphasis May also indicate system messages or prompts appearing on your screen For example You have mail Bold font is also used to represent filenames program names and commands For example use the copy command Boldface Typewriter Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in Font the manual Initial capital letter Indicates a window name Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals For example Click Enter ltalics Indicates a window name or a field Also can indicate a variables or parameter that is replaced with an appropriate word or string For example type filename means that you should type the actual filename instead of the word shown in italic Menu Name gt Menu Menu Name gt Menu Option Indicates the menu structure Device gt Port gt Port Properties means the Port
323. on Table window CFM View All The following windows are used to configure the Connectivity Fault Management settings of the Switch CFM Packet Counter List This window displays the CFM packet Rx Tx counters on the Switch Enter the ports you wish to view and click Find To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt CFM Packet Counter List as shown below PortList e 9 1 5 10 ClalPors E Sl gt fie E a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E Si oO ee Sl Sl 5 SS 50 50505000a 25050505000 00800A Soa ceocoa ag as gooooce cea cea cacca Note CCM Continuity Check Message LBM LBR Loopback Message and Response LTM LTR Linktrace Message and Response Figure 7 39 CFM Packet Counter List window 247 NnNae_27nnN 10 N Q Nin Man VICI Ii Zan 1a J Uci BT Q If gt 7 PY Q VII TD a riac ay Or D 2 Ma LK t Ctharnat Quito h lear Jay 3 f j asi st a as f f Ji j Al 7 2 C9 AVE 7 f LTAL SP TOrNnAa 1 1 w i j CAT i D UO0OT9 UU IZ D U9O IS UYU l ZU OCIICO L a y CI Z Ul y adi l a l Fl CITI l UY W Il II USCI CFM Packet Counter CCM List This window displays the CCM database entries on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt CFM gt CFM Packet Counter CCM List as shown below XCON Cross connect CCMs Error Error CCMs Normal Normal CCMs CCM RX Counters MEP Name VID Direction XCON Error Normal Figure 7 40 CFM Pa
324. on a port 22 J a S2Q ATNN AO MC Q7MN 10N Q arine DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series L var 2 Ginahit Fharnert Switch ear A anual ayer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual To view this window click Monitoring gt Packets gt Transmitted TX as shown below CUBA B5 DK k 1000 Packetsfsec or Bytes sec Time Interval Record Mumber 200 ShowHide W Bytes W Packets Figure 7 12 Transmitted TX window for Bytes and Packets To view the Transmitted TX Table window click the link View Table Cw Total sec Packets Rx Packets Unicast Multicast Broadcast Tx Packets Packets Figure 7 13 Transmitted TX Table window for Bytes and Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 228 Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Bytes and Packets View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Clea
325. on using the pull down menus State Enable MAC Notification for the ports selected using the pull down menu Click Apply to implement changes 39 SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The DGS 3700 Series supports the SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 The default SNMP setting is disabled You must enable SNMP Once SNMP is enabled you can choose which version you want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v 1 and v 2 user
326. ony 1000 Milliseconds Threshold 1 Errored Frame Frame Period Error Motity State Enabled Wind ow 1498100 Frames Threshold 1 Errored Frame Frame Seconds Error Motity State Enabled window 60000 Milliseconds Threshold 1 Errored Seconds Port 2 OAM Disabled Mode Active Dying Gasp Enabled Critical Event Enabled Remote Loopback OAMPDL Mot Processed Symbol Error Motity State Enabled window 1000 Milliseconds Figure 3 86 Ethernet OAM Configuration Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specify a range of ports to be configured Link Event Configures the Ethernet OAM critical link event Specify Link Monitor or Critical Link Event Link Monitor Indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive Event Notification OAMPDUs Threshold Specify the number of error frame seconds in the period that is required to be equal to or 0 4294967295 greater than in order for the event to be generated The default value of threshold is 1 error frame second Window Specify the period of error frame summary events The range is 1000ms 60000ms and the 1000 60000 default value is 1000 ms Notify Specify to Enable or Disable the event notification The default state is Enabled Click Apply to implement changes 129 QoS HOL Blocking Pevention Bandwidth Control Traffic Control 802 1p Default Priority 802 1p User Priority QoS Scheduling Mechanism QoS Scheduli
327. op down menu to enable or disable the advertised VLAN Name This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port If a port is associated with multiple VLANs those enabled VLAN name will be advertised Those enabled VLAN name will be advertised If the numbers of VLANs are larger it will only bring limited numbers of VLANs due to restrictions of the package length Dot1 TLV Protocol Identity Use the drop down menu to enable or disable the advertised Protocol Identity This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s Protocol Identity instance will be transmitted on the port The Protocol Identity TLV provides a way for stations to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of the network Such as Spanning 120 Tree Protocol the Link Aggregation Contol Protocol and numerous vendor proprietary variations are responsible for maintaining the topology and connectivity of the network If EAPOL GVRP STP including MSTP and LACP protocol identity is enabled on this port and itis enabled to be advertised then this protocol identity will be advertised Click Apply to implement changes made LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings This window is used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more IEEE 802 3 organizational specific TLV data type from outbound LLDP advertisements To view this window clic
328. oping Settings as shown below MLD Global Settings MLO Snooping State Disabled Enabled MLD Data Driven Learning Settings Max Learned Entry Value 1 1024 Total Entries 2 WYLAN Name default Disabled Modify Router Port VLANE Disabled Modify Router Port Figure 3 41 MLD Snooping Settings window To configure the settings for an existing entry click the corresponding Edit button which will display the following window 98 VLAN ID VLAN Name Rate Limit imitati Querer IF Guerier Expiry Time Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 Robustness Value 1 255 Last Member Query Interval 1 25 Data Driven Group Expiry Time 1 65535 Querier State Fast Done Disabled State Report Suppression Enabled w Data Driven Learning State Data Driven Learning Aged Out Disabled ka Version GQuerier Role Non Querier Figure 3 42 MLD Snooping Parameters Settings Edit window The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN for which to modify the MLD Snooping Settings This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN for which to modify the MLD Snooping Settings VLAN Name Query Expiry Time Displays the query expiry time in seconds Query Interval 1 65535 sec Allows the entry of a value between 7 and 65535 seconds with a default of 125 seconds This specifies the lengt
329. orce _Unauth or N A N A Not Available indicates that the port s authenticator capability is disabled Backend State The Backend Authentication State can be Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize or N A N A Not Available indicates that the port s authenticator capability is disabled Port Status Controlled Port Status can be Authorized Unauthorized or N A 236 Authenticator Statistics This window contains the statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Statistics as shown below LE t Apply Uma ES O MAC Address Frames Rx Frames Tx x Sia TxRegld Rix Logat Figure 7 22 Authenticator Statistics window for MAC based 802 1X Authenticator Statistics Time Interval a Pa Figure 7 23 Authenticator Statistics window for Port based 802 1X The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Frames Tx TxReqld RxLogOff Tx Req The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Rx Respld The number of EAP Resp ld frames that have been received
330. original value before being forwarded by the Switch Enter a replace priority manually if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet header Entering a class will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or 200 Precedence bits field in IP vA Rx Rate 1 15624 Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured This rate is implemented using the following equation 1 value 64Kbit sec ex If the user selects an Rx rate of 10 then the ingress rate is 640Kbit sec The user many select a value between 7 and 15624 or tick the No Limit check box The default setting is No Limit Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this
331. orm When password encryption is disabled the password will be in plain text form However if the user specifies the password in encrypted form or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last Enable password encryption command the password will still be in encrypted form and cannot be reverted back to plaintext form To view this window click Configuration gt Password Encryption as shown below Password Encryption State Disabled O Enabled Apply Figure 2 34 Password Encryption window Clipaging Settings Clipaging Status can be Enabled or Disabled in this window it is Enabled by default Clipaging settings are used when issuing a command which causes the console screen to rapidly scroll through several pages This command will cause the console to pause at the end of each page To view this window click Configuration gt Clipaging Settings as shown below Clipaging State O Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 2 35 Clipaging Settings window Firmware Information The following screen allows the user to view information about current firmware images stored on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt Firmware Information as shown below Version Size Bytes Update Time From 1 00 8031 2570746 0 days 00 00 00 Serial Port Prom Serial Por Empty means boot up firmware Ra means firmware update through Serial Port RS23 iD means firmware update through TELMET means fi
332. orresponding Switch To view the Topology Map click the View menu in the toolbar and then Topology which will produce the following window The Topology View will refresh itself periodically 20 seconds by default 54 Topology Cluster 1 View 2 efaul 9 default 03 04 00 ated pa default 01 01 00 default 33 13 00 default 38 29 00 default 10 24 04 default 00 36 18 default 01 01 00 default B8 28 00 default 00 00 0 default 35 26 03 Java Applet Window Figure 2 62 Topology view This window will display how the devices within the Single IP Management Group are connected to other groups and devices Possible icons in this screen are as follows Icon Description Member switch of other group Layer 2 candidate switch Layer 3 candidate switch Unknown device Non SIM devices 55 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Tool Tips In the Topology view window the mouse plays an important role in configuration and in viewing device information Setting the mouse cursor over a specific device in the topology window tool tip will display the same information about a specific device as the Tree view does See the window below for an example default Ar Figure 2 63 Device Information Utilizing the Tool Tip Setting the mouse cursor over a line between two devices will display the connection speed between the two devices
333. ort If it does not the packet is dropped If it has the same VID the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping packets that are not on the same VLAN as the ingress port at the point of reception This eliminates the subsequent processing of packets that will just be dropped by the destination port Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLANs are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default Packets cannot cross VLANs If a member of one VLAN wants to connect to another VLAN the link must be through an external router y NOTE If no VLANs are configured on the Switch then all packets will be forwarded to any destination port Packets with unknown source addresses will be flooded to all ports Broadcast and multicast packets will also be flooded to all ports An example is presented below System default 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 Marketing 13 14 15 16 Finance 17 18 19 20 Table 3 1 VLAN Example Assigned Ports Port based VLANs Port based VLANs limit traffic that flows into and out of switch ports Thus all devices connected to a port are members of the VLAN s the port belongs
334. ort 3 Local Client CAM Disabled Mode Active hax OAMPOL 1518 Bytes Remote Loopback Support Unidirection Mot Supported Link Monitoring Support Figure 3 85 Ethernet OAM Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Specify a range of ports to be configured Mode Specify to operate in either Active mode or Passive mode The default mode is Active State Specify that the OAM function state is Enabled or Disabled The default state is Disabled Remote Loopback Specify to Start or Stop the OAM remote loopback function Received Remote Specify whether to Process or to Ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback Loopback function The default method is gnore Click Apply to implement changes 128 Ethernet OAM Configuration Settings This window is used to configure and display the primary controls and status information for Ethernet OAM on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt Ethernet OAM gt Ethernet OAM Configuration Settings as shown below Ethernet OAM Configuration Settings From Port To Port Link Event Link Monitor Threshold 0 429496 7295 Windows OO0 60000 Motity Ethernet OAM Configuration Table Disabled Active Dying Gasp Enabled Critical Event Enabled Remote Loopback OAMPDLI Mot Processed symbol Error Motity State Enabled Window 1000 Milliseconds Threshold 1 Errored Symbol Frame Error Motity State Enabled Wid
335. otal Entries 0 IP Address MAC Address Lease Timetsec Figure 5 7 DHCP Snooping Entries window MAC Block List This table is used to view unauthorized devices that have been blocked by IP MAC binding restrictions To find an unauthorized device that has been blocked by the IP MAC binding restrictions enter the VID and MAC Address in the appropriate fields and click Find To delete an entry click the delete button next to the entry s port To delete all the entries in the Blocked Address Browser window click Clear All To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt MAC Block List as shown below MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 View All Delete All Total Entries 0 VLAN Mame MAC Address Figure 5 8 MAC Block List window Port Security Port Security Port Settings A given ports or a range of ports dynamic MAC address learning can be locked such that the current source MAC addresses entered into the MAC address forwarding table cannot be changed once the port lock is enabled Setting the Admin State pull down menu to Enabled and clicking Apply can lock the port Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers with source MAC addresses unknown to the Switch prior to locking the port or ports from connecting to the Switch s locked ports and gaining access to the network To view this window click Security gt Port Security gt Port Security Port Settings as shown below
336. ow shown below is the Add CPU ACL Profile window for Ethernet 206 Add CPU At Select Profile ID Select ACL Type Ethernet ACL Tagged vw O IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL Packet Content ACL You can select the field in the packet to create filtering mask MAC Address VLAN soe Ethernet Type PayLoad MAC Address C Source MAC Mask O Destination MAC Mask 802 10 VLAN DO VLAN Mask 802 1P 802 1P Ethernet Type L Ethernet Type Figure 6 29 Add CPU ACL Profile window for Ethernet Parameter Description Select Profile ID Use the drop down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 5 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 or packet content mask This will change the menu sen to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header Source MAC Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address Mask Destination MAC Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address Mask 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each pa
337. ow will allow users to set up Authentication Server Groups on the Switch A server group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server group The Switch has three built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified Up to eight authentication server hosts may be added to any particular group To view this window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Group as shown below sever Group List cit Sever Group Group Mame Max 15 characters Total Entries 4 Group Mame radius Delete tacacs Edit Delete tacacs edit Delete xtacacs Edit Delete Figure 5 37 Authentication Server Group Settings window The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified To modify a particular group click on its corresponding Edit button or click the Edit Server Group tab at the top of this window the following screen will be displayed 174 Athen ra q Sever Group List Ect Sever Group Group Mame Max 15 characters server Host IF Address Protocol TACACS v IF Address Protocol Figure 5 38 Authentication Server Group Settings Edit window To add an Authentication Server Host to the list enter its IP address in the IP Address fiel
338. pback Detection Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description CO isene aopsomnennooage tewon Por sasesana uan sad Recover Time Time allowed in seconds for recovery when a Loopback is detected The Loopdetect 0 or 60 1000000 Recover Time can be set at O seconds or 60 to 1000000 seconds Entering O will disable the Loopdetect Recover Time The default is 60 seconds From Port To Port Use the drop down menu to select a beginning and ending port number State Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made 106 Spanning Tree This Switch supports three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1D 2004 STP compatible 802 11d 2004 Rapid STP and 802 1q 2005 MSTP 802 1D STP will be familiar to most networking professionals However since 802 1w RSTP has been recently introduced to D Link managed Ethernet switches a brief introduction to the technology is provided below followed by a description of how to set up 802 1D STP and 802 1w RSTP 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree The Switch implements two versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 1w specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802 1D STP RSTP can operate with legacy equipment implementing IEEE 802 1D however the advantages of using RSTP will be lost The IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP evolved fr
339. ping MAC Notification 802 1 SSH Port Mirror Single IF Management Clipaging HOL Blocking Prevention Figure 2 1 Device Information window O0 21 91 AF 37 00 10 24 73 21 Static 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 default Never Supported 22 01 2009 05 12 15 Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Disabled Settings Enabled Settings Enabled Settings This window contains the System Information details The user may enter a System Name System Location and System Contact to aid in defining the Switch to the user s preference This window displays the MAC Address Firmware Version and Hardware Version To view this window click Configuration gt System Information as shown below a 7 e MAC Address O0 21 91 AF 37 D0 Firmware Version Build 71 00 8031 Hardware Version Ad System Marne System Location System Contact Figure 2 2 System Information window The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description System Name Enter a system name for the Switch if so desired This name will identify it in the Switch network System Location Enter the location of the Switch if so desired System Contact Enter a contact name for the Switch if so desired Click Apply to implement changes made Serial Port Settings The following window contains information about the Serial Port Settings including the Baud R
340. played Parameter Static ARP Settings The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a TCP IP protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses This table allows network managers to view define modify and delete ARP information for specific devices Static entries can be defined in the ARP Table When static entries are defined a permanent entry is entered and is used to translate IP address to MAC addresses To view this window click Configuration gt Static ARP Settings as shown below 16 Global Settings ARP Aging Time 0 65535 i Add Static ARP Entry Delete All IP Address MAC Address 10 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF Local Broadcast 10 24 73 71 00 01 02 03 04 00 Local System 10 255 255 255 FF FF FF FF FF FF LocaliBroadcast Figure 2 14 Static ARP Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description ARP Aging Time The user may globally set the maximum amount of time in minutes that an Address 0 65535 Resolution Protocol ARP entry can remain in the Switch s ARP table without being accessed before it is dropped from the table The value may be set in the range of 0 65535 minutes with a default setting of 20 minutes IP Address The IP address of the ARP entry MAC Address The MAC address of the ARP entry After entering the IP Address and MAC Address of the Static ARP entry click Apply to implement the new entry To completely clear the Static ARP Settings click the Delete All b
341. plement the 802 1X Guest VLAN Once properly configured the Guest VLAN Name and associated ports will be listed in the lower part of the window ve NOTE For more information and configuration examples for the 802 1X Guest VLAN f function please refer to the Guest VLAN Configuration Example located on the D Link website SSL Settings Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication digital signatures and encryption These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels 1 Key Exchange The first part of the cyphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used This switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA specified here as the DHE DSS Diffie Hellman DHE public key algorithm This is the first authentication process between client and host as they exchange keys in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level 2 Encryption The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host The Switch supports two typ
342. port is locked until the point when a Client with the correct username and password and MAC address if 802 1X is enabled by MAC address is granted access and therefore successfully unlocks the port Once unlocked normal traffic is allowed to pass through the port The following figure displays a more detailed explanation of how the authentication process is completed between the three roles stated above 02 1X Authentication process Switch RADIUS Server Workstation Authentication Server Client Authenticator g oa RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Challenge RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized RADIUS Account Stop RADIUS Ack Port Unauthorized OTP One Time Password Figure 5 19 The 802 1X Authentication Process The D Link implementation of 802 1X allows network administrators to choose between two types of Access Control used on the Switch which are 1 Port Based Access Control This method requires only one user to be authenticated per port by a remote RADIUS server to allow the remaining users on the same port access to the network 2 Host Based Access Control Using this method the Switch will automatically learn up to sixteen MAC addresses by port and set them in a list Each MAC address must be authenticated by the Switch using a remote RADIUS server before being allowed access to the Network 157 Understanding 802 1X Port based and Host b
343. pplicant Responses Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access Request packet to the Authentication server i e executes sendRespToServer on entry to the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server AccessChallenges Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access Challenge packet from the Authentication server i e aReq becomes TRUE causing exit from the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator OtherReqToSupp Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an EAP Request packet other than an Identity Notification Failure or Success message to the Supplicant i e executes txReq on entry to the REQUEST state Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP method NonNakRespFromSup Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP Request and the response is something other than EAP NAK i e rxResp becomes TRUE causing the state machine to transition from REQUEST to RESPONSE and the response is not an EAP NAK Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator s chosen EAP method Bac Auth Success Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server i e aSuccess becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to SUCCESS
344. processing will be started When there is no IPv6 address explicitly configured by default link local address is not configured and the IPv6 processing will be disabled By enabling this automatic configuration the link local address will be automatically configured and IPv6 processing will be started Click Apply to implement changes made IPv6 Route Settings This window allows the user to create and configure IPv6 Route interfaces to the Switch s IP routing table To view this window click Configuration gt IPv6 Route Settings as shown below Create IPvti Route Interface Mame Mexhop Address Metric 1 65535 Backup state Apply Delete All Total Entries 0 Prete Mext Hop IF Infterace Protocol Backup Figure 2 9 IPv6 Route Settings window The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Interface Name Enter the name you wish to give the IPv6 Route Interface Nexthop Enter the IPv6 address for the next hop router Address Metric 1 65535 Allows the entry of a routing protocol metric entry representing the number of routers between the Switch and the IP address above The default setting is 1 Backup State The user may choose between Primary and Backup If the Primary Static Default Route fails the Backup Route will support the entry Click Apply to implement changes made To remove any entry click the Delete All button IPv6 Neighbor Settings This window allows the user to creat
345. r Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window 229 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Laver 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual y Errors The Web Manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Four windows are offered Received RX To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Errors gt Received RX as shown below ot 1000 goo CRCError Lindersize r Oversize aut Fragment 500 Jabber 400 Drop 300 El 200 symbolE rr 100 Time Interval Record Mumber 200 Show Hide W CRCError le Undersize le Oversize W Fragment W Jabber W Drop W SyrmbolErr Figure 7 14 Received RX window for errors To view the Received RX Table window for errors click the link View Table which will show the following table af Rx Error Ra Frame CRCError Undersize CwerSize Fragment Jabber Figure 7 15 Received RX Table window for errors 230 The following fields can be set Parameter Description Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7
346. r of security is available for SNMPv3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMPv3 settings for the Switch read the next section Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot Someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and Broadcast Multicast Storm MIBs The Switch in the Management Information Base MIB stores management and counter information The Switch uses the standard MIB II Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base Specifying the MIB Object Identifier may also retrieve the proprietary MIB MIB values can be either read only or read write The DGS 3700 Series incorporates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment SNMP management can be customized to suit the needs of the networks and the preferences of the network administrator Use the SNMP V3 menus to select the SNMP version used for specific tasks The DGS 3700 Series supports the Simple Network Management Pro
347. reated can request SNMP messages SNMP Version SNMP V3 Encryption Auth Protocol by Password Priv Protocol by Password Auth Protocol by Key Priv Protocol by password V1 Indicates that SNMP version 1 is in use V2 Indicates that SNMP version 2 is in use V3 Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use None Indicates that there is no SNMP V3 Encryption Password Indicates that there is SNMP V3 Encryption through a password Key Indicates that there is SNMP V3 Encryption through a key MD5 Indicates that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used SHA Indicates that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use DES Indicates that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard MD5 Indicates that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used SHA Indicates that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use DES Indicates that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard 43 Password Enter a Password when SNMP V3 Encryption is enabled for Password mode Enter a Key when SNMP V3 Encryption is enabled for Key mode To implement changes made click Apply To delete an existing SNMP User Table entry click the corresponding Delete button SNMP Community Table Use this table to v
348. red one for authentication When the SSL function has been enabled the web will become disabled To manage the Switch through the web based management while utilizing the SSL function the web browser must support SSL encryption and the header of the URL must begin with https Ex https 10 90 90 90 Any other method will result in an error and no access can be authorized for the web based management To view this window click Security gt SSL Settings as shown below SSL Settings SSL State Disabled Enabled Cache Timeout 60 86400 oo see Note Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled SSL Ciphersuite Settings RSA with RC4 1268 MDS Disabled Enabled RSA with 3DES EDE Cac SHA O Disabled Enabled DHE OSS with 3DES EDE CAC SHA Disabled Enabled RSA ESPORT with RC4 40 MOS Disabled Enabled SSL Certificate Download Server P Address Certificate File Mame Current Certificate Loaded with RSA Certificate Figure 5 30 SSL Settings To set up the SSL function on the Switch configure the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description SSL Settings SSL Status Enable or Disable the SSL status on the switch The default is disabled Cache Timeout This field will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using 60 86400 the SSL function A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange Specifying a longer timeout will
349. rmware Update through SNMP AA means firmware Update through WEB SSH means firmware Update through SSH FSI means firmware update through Single IP Management Figure 2 36 Firmware Information window This window holds the following information Parameter Description States the image ID number of the firmware in the Switch s memory The Switch can store two firmware images for use Image ID 1 will be the default boot up firmware for the Switch unless 31 E e oia States the IP address of the origin of the firmware There are five ways firmware may be downloaded to the Switch R If the IP address has this letter attached it denotes a firmware upgrade through the serial port RS232 T If the IP address has this letter attached to it it denotes a firmware upgrade through Telnet S If the IP address has this letter attached to it it denotes a firmware upgrade through the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP W If the IP address has this letter attached to it it denotes a firmware upgrade through the web based management interface SSH If the IP address has these three letters attached it denotes a firmware update through SIM If the IP address has these letters attached it denotes a firmware upgrade through the single IP Management feature States the user who downloaded the firmware This field may read Anonymous or Unknown for users that are unidentified Dual Con
350. rnal External Alarm External Alarm Channel lt channel_id gt Critical Alarm lt alarm_message gt MBAC MAC AC login successful MAC s port s VID d Informational MAC AC login rejected MAC s port s VID d Informational 2 4 DM fo Port d SFP s exceeded the s alarm threshold O Te Port d SFP s exceeded the s warning threshold IP and Password IP Address change activity Management IP address was changed by Username Informational Changed lt username gt Password change activity Password was changed by Username lt username gt Informational Dual Excution error encountered Configuration had lt int gt syntax error and lt int gt execute Warni arning Configuration druring system boot up error VID assigned from RADIUS server after RADIUS client authenticated by RADIUS server successfully This VID will assign to the port and this port will be the VLAN untagged port member Radius server lt ipaddr gt assigned vid lt vlanlD gt to Informational port lt portNum gt account lt username gt by RADIUS server lt ingressBandwidth gt to port lt portNum gt account Informational successfully This Ingress lt username gt bandwidth will assign to the 802 1p default priority assigned from RADIUS server after RADIUS client Radius server lt ipaddr gt assigned 802 1p deafult authenticated by RADIUS priority lt priority gt to port lt portNum gt account Infor
351. rnet OAM gt Browse Ethernet OAM Event Log as shown below Local Event Statistics Error Symbol Event Error Frame Event Error Frame Period Event Errored Frame Seconds Event Dying Gasp Critical Event Remote Event Statistics Error Symbol Event Error Frame Event Error Frame Period Event Errored Frame Seconds Event Dying Gasp Critical Event Ethernet OAM Event Log Table Index Type Location Time Stamp Wind oy Threshald Accumulated errors Figure 7 45 Browse Ethernet OAM Event Log window Browse Ethernet OAM Statistics This window displays the Ethernet OAM Statistic information on each port of the Switch To clear information for a particular port or list of ports enter the ports and click Clear To view this window click Monitoring gt Ethernet OAM gt Browse Ethernet OAM Statistics as shown below 250 Srovice Ethernet OAR Stall Port List e 9 1 4 6 att Ports Ethernet OAM Statistics a Information GAMP OLU Tx Information OAMPDU Rx a Unique Event Notification OAMPOL Tx Unique Event Motification OAMPDL Rix Duplicate Event Notification OAMPOL Tx Duplicate Event Notification CAMPO Rix Loopback Control OAMPDU Tx Loopback Control OAMPOL Rx Variable Request OAMPOLU Tx Variable Request GAMPO Rx Variable Response CAMPO Tx Variable Response QAMPOL Rx Organization Specific OAMPOUs Tx Organization Specific OAMPOUs Rx Unsupported QAMPDL Tx Unsupported GAMP OIJ Rx Frames Lost Due To OAM Information GAMP OIJ Tx Information OAMPD
352. rowse Ethernet OAM StatiStiCS ces sd N E a 250 Elistorical Counter s Utizatiom ea a ideada 252 Browse Historical Gounet aca ira doi 252 Browse historical UtlIZa ON aldo 253 gt casa diecast a a ar Ooi etalon eta 253 Save Services and TOO Sart loli ia 255 Save Conig rat m ID Torreren t a e e dense 255 Save Contigua ID Ls ias nidad 256 Dav 6 A AA 256 SN A ie a le oS ti aS ec alae Le ak a ele Sct ht 206 Configuration File Backup amp Restore ccccceccccccceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeecaeeseeeeesseaeeeeeesseuseeeeeseeaseeeesseeaeceeessaaeeeeeessaaeeeeeeseaaasss 257 Ubload LOG Fl alcoi 257 OSO italia 257 a IMMIWANC A E A EE EAE A A EAEE AEE A AEE E EE 258 FREDO OES VS ON adaa ida 258 Mitigating ARP Spoofing Attacks Using Packet Content ACLoonconnccconnncconcccconoonennnonnannnnnanos 259 System Log Entries soci 267 MOS SA cca a 278 Password Recovery PrOCOQUIO isc illa 280 Preface The DGS 3700 Series User Manual is divided into sections that describe the system installation and operating instructions with examples Section 1 Introduction to Web based Switch Management Describes how to connect to and use the Web based switch management feature on the Switch Section 2 Configuration A detailed discussion about configuring some of the basic functions of the Switch including accessing the System information Serial Port Settings IP Address Interface Settings IPv6 Route Settings IPv6 Neighbor Settings Port Configuration Static A
353. rt Select the source Port for the Multicast VLAN e g 1 6 102 Tagged Member Select the ports that will be tagged as members of the VLAN Port e g 1 4 6 To modify an entry click the corresponding Modify button To remove an entry click the corresponding Delete button IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings The IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings window allows the user to add a profile to which multicast IPv6 address es reports are to be received on specified ports or VLANs on the Switch This function will therefore limit the number of reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch The user may set an IP Multicast address or range of IPv6 Multicast addresses to accept reports Permit or deny reports Deny coming into the specified switch ports or VLANs To view this window click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings as shown below Profile ID Profile Mame T Delete All Total Entries 0 Frofile Mame Figure 3 50 IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Profile ID Use the drop down menu to choose a Profile ID Profile Name Enter a name for the IPv6 Multicast Profile To edit an entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button Profile ID Profile Mame Delete All Total Entries 1 Profile Mame Group List pp Figure 3 51 IPv6 Multicast Pro
354. rt that is currently forwarding packets Member Ports Choose the members of a trunked group Up to eight ports per group can be assigned to a group Flooding Port A trunking group must designate one port to allow transmission of broadcasts and unknown unicasts Click Apply to implement changes made Trunk groups can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled This is used to turn a port trunking group on or off This is useful for diagnostics to quickly isolate a bandwidth intensive network device or to have an absolute backup aggregation group that is not under automatic 88 LACP Port Settings The LACP Port Settings window is used to create port trunking groups on the Switch Using the following window the user may set which ports will be active and passive in processing and sending LACP control frames To view this window click L2 Features gt LACP Port Settings as shown below From Port To Port Activity Figure 3 25 LACP Port Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Activity Active Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames This allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group that is to add or subtract ports
355. rt to be specified as a non VLAN member Click Apply to implement changes made To search for a VLAN click the Find VLAN tab at the top of the screen which will display the following window enter a VLAN ID and click Find to display the settings for a previously configured VLAN LAN List Add Edit WLAN Find VLAN LAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 Figure 3 9 802 1Q VLAN window Find VLAN window To create a VLAN Batch entry click the VLAN Batch Settings tab at the top of the screen which will display the following window 76 VLAN List Add Edit VLAM Find WLAN VLAN Batch Settings Total Entries 1 YID List e q 2 5 DO O O Delete O contig Advertisement Disabled Fort List e g 1 5 Figure 3 10 802 1Q VLAN window VLAN Batch Settings window The following fields can be set in the VLAN Batch Settings windows Parameter Description VID List e g 2 5 Enter a VLAN ID List that can be added deleted or configured Advertisement Enabling this function will allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources notifying that they may join the existing VLAN Port List e g 1 5 Allows an individual port list to be added or deleted as a member of the VLAN Tagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q tagged Checking the box will designate the port as Tagged Untagged Specifies the port as 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will designate the port as untagged Forbidden Select this to specify
356. rts of Port based VLANs may overlap if desired 67 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header Ingress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made Egress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing out of the Switch either to another switch or to an end station and tagging decisions must be made IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLANs are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLANs require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLANs allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLANs will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLANs allows VLANs to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLANs to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through
357. s The table allows the user to create Protocol VLAN groups and add protocols to that group The 802 1v Protocol VLAN Group Settings supports multiple VLANs for each protocol and allows the user to configure the untagged ports of different protocols on the same physical port For example it allows the user to configure an 802 1Q and 802 1v untagged port on the same physical port The lower half of the table displays any previously created groups To view this window click L2 Features gt 802 1v Protocol VLAN gt 802 1v Protocol Group Settings as shown below ou TY PITOLTOCO TOUD se Add Protocol VLAN Group Hote Mame should be less than 32 characters Add Protocol for Protocol VLAN Group Group ID Group Name Protocol Protocol Value 0 FFFF Total Entries 0 Group ID Group Mame Frame Type Protocol value Figure 3 15 802 1v Protocol Group Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description GroupID Select an ID number for the group between 7 and 16 Group Name This is used to identify the new Protocol VLAN group Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters Protocol This function maps packets to protocol defined VLANs by examining the type octet within the packet header to discover the type of protocol associated with it Use the drop down menu to toggle between Ethernet_ l EEE802 3_ LLC and IEEE802 3_ SNAP Protocol Value Enter a value for the Group 0 FFFF Click Add to make a n
358. s counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port 235 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Authenticator State The following section describes the 802 1X Status on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator State as shown below Atthenticator State Pori o w MAC Address Auth PAE State Backend State Port Status Figure 7 20 Authenticator State window for MAC based 802 1 X Authenticator State Time Interval Figure 7 21 Authenticator State window for Port based 802 1X This window displays the Authenticator State for individual ports on a selected device A polling interval between 7s and 60s seconds can be set using the drop down menu at the top of the window and clicking OK The information on this window is described as follows Parameter Description MAC Address The MAC Address of the device of the corresponding index number Auth PAE State The Authenticator PAE State value can be Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held Force Auth F
359. s The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason RADIUS Account Client This window shows managed objects used for managing RADIUS accounting clients and the current statistics associated with them To view this window click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Account Client as shown below 234 RADIOS Account Client Oy Safe Serverindex InvalidSereraddr Identifier ServerAddr Figure 7 19 RADIUS Account Client window The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left hand corner The following information is displayed Parameter Description InvalidServerAddresses The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from unknown addresses The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS account This is not necessarily the same as sysName in MIB II Serverlndex The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that it shares a secret with ServerAddress The conceptual table listing the RADIUS accounting servers with which it shares a secret ServerPortNumber The UDP port it is using to send requests
360. s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 CRCError Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64 bytes and have a good CRC Undersize packets usually indicate collision fragments a nor mal network occurrence Counts valid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536 The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an invalid CRC These are normally the result of collisions Jabber Counts invalid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536 The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot Symbol Counts the number of packets received that have errors received in the symbol on the physical labor Show Hide Check whether or not to display CRCError UnderSize OverSize Fragment Jabber Drop and SymbolErr errors Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Graphic Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rat
361. s specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user Color Specify the color Red Yellow or Green Click Apply to implement changes 144 Security Safeguard Engine Trusted Host IP MAC Port Binding Port Security DHCP Server Screening Settings 802 1X SSL Settings SSH Access Authentication Control MAC based Access Control Web Authentication NetBIOS Filtering Safeguard Engine Periodically malicious hosts on the network will attack the Switch by utilizing packet flooding ARP Storm or other methods These attacks may increase the Safeguard Engine beyond its capability To alleviate this problem the Safeguard Engine function was added to the Switch s software The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch while the attack is ongoing thus making it capable to forward essential packets over its network in a limited bandwidth When the Switch either a receives too many packets to process or b exerts too much memory it will enter an Exhausted mode When in this mode the Switch only receives a small amount of ARP or IP broadcast packets for a calculated time interval Every five seconds the Switch will check to see if there are too many packets flooding the Switch If the threshold has been crossed the Switch will do a rate limit and only allow a small amount of ARP and IP broadc
362. shown below Multicast VLAN w4 Global State Disabled Enabled Multicast VLAN w4 Forward Unmatched Disabled O Enabled VLAN Name WID 2 4094 po State Replace Source IP e g 10 90 90 90 Member Port e g 1 4 6 Source Port 6 g 1 4 6 Tagged Member Port e g 1 46 Total Entries 0 ID VLAN Name Replace Source IP Member Port Tagged Port source Port Figure 3 35 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for 95 State Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Replace Source IP Enter an IP address that new IP address to be used Member Port Select the ports that will be members of the Multicast VLAN Eg Ports 1 to 4 and port 6 e g 1 4 6 Source Port Select the source Port for the Multicast VLAN e g 1 4 6 Tagged Member Select the ports that will be tagged as members of the VLAN Port e g 1 4 6 To modify an entry click the corresponding Modify To edit and entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings The IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings window allows t
363. shown below j ami Fh f l St ACL rule finder helps you identify any rule has been assigned to a specific port Profile ID Profile Type Action Figure 6 49 ACL Finder window ACL Flow Meter ACL Flow Metering Table is a per flow bandwidth control used to limit the bandwidth of the ingress traffic When the users create an ACL rule to filter packets a metering rule can be created to associate with this ACL rule to limit traffic The step of bandwidth is 64kbps Due to limited metering rules not all ACL rules can associate with a metering rule 217 To view this window click ACL gt ACL Flow Meter as shown below je Sareaguean Profile ID Access ID 1 128 View All Delete All Total Entries 0 Profile ID Mode Figure 6 50 ACL Flow Meter window The following fields may be configured Parameter Description Profile ID The pre configured Profile ID for which to configure the Flow Metering parameters AccessID The pre configured Access ID for which to configure the Flow Metering parameters Enter the appropriate information and click Find the entries will be displayed on the lower half of the table To edit an entry click the corresponding Modify button to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button to add a new entry click the Add button which will display the following window for the user to configure Profile ID Profile Name Access ID 1 128 CIR 64Kbps 0 15624 PIR 654K
364. srdo Apply Hote Engine ID length is 10 64 the accepted character is fram O to F Figure 2 52 SNMP Engine ID window To change the Engine ID enter the new Engine ID in the space provided and click the Apply button 46 SNMP Trap Configuration The following window is used to enable and disable trap settings for the SNMP function on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Trap Configuration as shown below SMMP Traps Enabled SNMP Authentication Trap Enabled Figure 2 53 SNMP Trap Configuration window To enable or disable the Traps State and or the Authenticate Traps State use the corresponding pull down menu to change and click Apply Time Range Settings The Time Range window is used in conjunction with the Access Profile feature to determine a starting point and an ending point based on days of the week when an Access Profile configuration will be enabled on the Switch Once configured here the time range settings are to be applied to an access profile rule using the Access Profile table The user may enter up to 64 time range entries on the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt Time Range Settings as shown below Fange Name a Max Support 32 Characters HoursHHNM 8S Star Time End Times Weekdays tion O Tue O wed O Thu O FiO sat sunL Selectall Days O Total Entries 0 Range Mame lays Start Time End Time Figure 2 54 Time Range Settings window
365. ss List starting with the lowest in the range and click Add To return to the IP Multicast Profile Settings window click the lt lt Back button IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings The IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings enables the user to configure the ports or VLANs on the switch that will be involved in the Limited IPv4 Multicast Range The user can configure the range of IPv4 multicast addresses that will be accepted on the ports or VLANs To configure these settings click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings Pe 1 45 Total Entries 0 VLAN ID Profile ID Mext gt Figure 3 39 IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings window To add a new range enter the information and click Add to delete an entry enter the information and click Delete IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings The IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings allows users to configure the ports on the switch that will be apart of the max number of multicast groups that can be learned by data driven To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings as shown below ea 48 Total Entries 2 VLAN ID Max Multicast Group Number Infinite Infinite Figure 3 40 IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings window To add a new IPv 4 Max Multicast Group enter the information and click Apply to search for an entry click Find 97 MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Snooping
366. ss prefix length The prefix Address length of the IPv6 network address cannot be greater than 64 Priority The priority to be associated with the subnet lts range is 0 7 Enter the appropriate information and click Add to create a new entry To search for a particular entry enter the appropriate information and click Find To remove an entry click Delete To view all entries on the Switch click Show All to remove all entries click Delete All VLAN Precedence Settings The VLAN precedence settings are used to configure VLAN classification precedence on each port You can specify the order of MAC based VLAN classifications and subnet VLAN classifications If a port s VLAN classificataion is a MAC based precedence MAC based VLAN classification will process first If MAC based VLAN classification fails the subnet VLAN classification will be executed If a port s VLAN classification is subnet VLAN precedence the subnet VLAN classification will process first If subnet VLAN classification fails the MAC based VLAN classification will be executed To view this window click L2 Features gt Subnet VLAN gt VLAN Precedence Settings as shown below 78 From Port VLAN Precedence 01 MAC Based VLAN ow Total Entries 17 VLAN Precedence hAC Based WYLAN MAC Based VLAN MAC Based VLAN hAC Based VLAN MAC Based VLAN MAC Based VLAN hAC Based WYLAN hAC Based VLAN MAC Based VLAN MAC Based VLAN hAC Based WYLAN MAC Based VLAN Figure 3
367. st Click the Reboot button to restart the Switch 258 Appendix A Mitigating ARP Spoofing Attacks Using Packet Content ACL Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard method for finding a host s hardware address MAC address when only its IP address is known This protocol is vulnerable because it can spoof the IP and MAC information in the ARP packets to attack a LAN known as ARP spoofing This document is intended to introduce ARP protocol ARP spoofing attacks and the counter measure brought by D Link s switches to counter the ARP spoofing attack e How Address Resolution Protocol works In the process of ARP PC A will firstly issue an ARP request to query PC B s MAC address The network structure is shown in Figure 1 Who is 10 10 10 2 A sender 00 20 5C 0 1 33 33 Port 3 00 20 50 01 11 11 10 10 10 3 m eae 10 10 10 1 Port 4 o B Target 00 40 5 C 01 44 44 00 70 5CO1 22 77 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 7 Figure 1 In the mean time PC A s MAC address will be written into the Sender H W Address and its IP address will be written into the Sender Protocol Address in ARP payload As PC B s MAC address is unknown the Target H W Address i be 00 00 00 00 00 00 while PC B s IP address will be written into the Target Protocol Address shown in Table H W Protocol Protocol Operation Sender Sender Target Target type type address address H W address protocol ww address pro
368. st technique listed for authentication If the first technique goes through its Authentication Server Hosts and no authentication is returned the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication until the authentication has been verified or denied or the list is exhausted Please note that when the user logins to the device successfully through TACACS XTACACS TACACS server or none method the user priviledge level is the only level assigned If the user wants to get the administration privilege level the user must use the enable admin command to promote his privilege level However when the user logins to the device successfully through the RADIUS server or through the local method 3 kinds of privilege levels can be assigned to the user and the user cannot use the enable admin command to promote to the admin privilege level ES NOTE TACACS XTACACS and TACACS are separate entities and are not ET compatible The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same using the d same protocol For example if the Switch is set up for TACACS authentication so must be the host server 172 Authentication Policy Settings This command will enable an administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When enabled the device will check the Login Method List and choose a technique for user authentication upon login To view this window click Security
369. station on the network or a malfunctioning device such as a faulty network card Thus switch throughput problems will arise and consequently affect the overall performance of the switch network To help rectify this packet storm the Switch will monitor and control the situation The packet storm is monitored to determine if too many packets are flooding the network based on the threshold level provided by the user Once a packet storm has been detected the Switch will drop packets coming into the Switch until the storm has subsided This method can be utilized by selecting the Drop option of the Action field in the window below The Switch will also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch s chip counter This method is only viable for Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these two types of packets Once a storm has been detected that is once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded the Switch will shutdown the port to all incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets for a time period specified using the CountDown field If the packet storm discontinues before the Countdown timer expires the port will again allow all incoming traffic If this field times out and the packet storm continues the port will be placed in a Shutdown Forever mode which will produce a warning message to be sent to the Trap Receiver Once in Shutdown Forever mode the only method of recover
370. t Management Settings window The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description CFM State Used to Enable or Disable the CFM State Connectivity Fault Management Create MD Enter the maintenance domain name you wish to create Level Enter the maintenance domain level Connectivity Fault Management Settings MD MD Enter the maintenance domain name you wish to configure 125 This setting controls the creation of MIPs None Means that no MIPs will be created This is the default value Auto MIPs are created when the next lower active MD level on the port is reached or there are no lower active MD levels Explicit MIPs are created when the next lower active MD level on the port is reached SenderlD TLV Used to define the TLV data types of the maintenance domain The user can choose between None Chassis Manage or Chassis Manage To create a new entry enter the appropriate information and click Add To configure the settings enter the appropriate information and click Apply CFM Loopback Settings This window is used to configure the CFM Loopback settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt CFM gt CFM Loopback Settings as shown below A dl jT DODO CR oe C MEP Name Maxa characters O MEP ID 1 8191 MO Max22 characters MA Max22 characters MAC Address LBhis Number 1 65535 Lam Payload Length 0 1500 LBM Payload Pattern Max1 500 characters LB
371. t SIM version 99 Single IP Management 1 61 Copyright c 2008 D Link Corporation Release Date 2005 07 14 Figure 2 73 About window Firmware Upgrade This screen is used to upgrade firmware from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Version To specify a certain Switch for firmware download click its corresponding check box under the Port heading To update the firmware enter the Server IP Address where the firmware resides and enter the Path Filename of the firmware Click Download to initiate the file transfer To view this window click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Firmware Upgrade as shown below es Safe Server F Address Path Filename Total Entries 0 Select All MAC Address Model Mame Firmware Version Figure 2 74 Firmware Upgrade window Configuration File Backup Restore This screen is used to upgrade configuration files from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch using a TFTP server Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by ID Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Firmware Version To update the configuration file enter the Server IP Address where the file resides and enter the Path Filename of the configuration file Click Restore to initiate the file transfer from a TFTP server
372. t the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch The server doesn t respond to the verification query At this point the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups one for each of the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols These built in Authentication Server Groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch The users will set Authentication Server Hosts in a preferable order in the built in Authentication Server Groups and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch the Switch will ask the first Authentication Server Hosts for authentication If no authentication is made the second server host in the list will be queried and so on The built in Authentication Server Groups can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol For example the TACACS Authentication Server Groups can only have TACACS Authentication Server Hosts 171 The administrator for the Switch may set up six different authentication techniques per user defined method list TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS local none for authentication These techniques will be listed in an order preferable and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch and may contain up to eight authentication techniques When a user attempts to access the Switch the Switch will select the fir
373. t triggers either a log entry or a trap message can be set as well Use the System Severity Settings menu to set the criteria for alerts The current settings are displayed below the Settings menu To view this window click Configuration gt System Severity Settings as shown below System Severity Severi Leve System Severity Table System Severity Severity Level Information Information Figure 2 19 System Severity Settings Use the drop down menus to configure the parameters described below Parameter Description System Severity Choose how the alerts are used from the drop down menu Select og to send the alert of the Severity Type configured to the Switch s log for analysis Choose trap to send it to an SNMP agent for analysis Select all to send the chosen alert type to an SNMP agent and the Switch s log for analysis Severity Level Choose what level of alert will trigger sending the log entry or trap message as defined by the Severity Name Select critical to send only critical events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent Choose warning to send critical and warning events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent Select information to send informational warning and critical events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent Click Apply to implement the new System Severity Settings 22 DHCP Relay The DHCP Relay folder contains six windows regarding the DHCP relay functions on the Switch The DHCP windows include DHCP Relay G
374. te level specify Byte VID 1 4094 To search for a particular VLAN enter the VID and click Find Click Add to create a new entry To remove an entry click Delete to delete all entries click Delete All 35 SNTP Settings The Simple Network Time Protocol Settings can be configured in the next two windows Time Settings This window is used to configure the time settings for the Switch To view this window click Configuration gt SNTP Settings gt Time Settings as shown below Status SNTP State Disabled Enabled Current Time 14 01 2009 05 48 08 Time Source System Clock SNTP Settings SMTP First Server SMTP Second Server SMTP Poll Interval ln Seconds 30 99999 Set Current Time Date DOMAINS 4101 2009 Time HH MM SS Figure 2 41 Time Settings window The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description SNTP State Use the radius button to select an Enabled or Disabled SNTP state Current Time Displays the Current Time set on the Switch Time Source Displays the time source for the system SNTP Settings SNTP First Server This is the IP address of the primary server the SNTP information will be taken from SNTP Second Server This is the IP address of the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from SNTP Poll Interval in This is the interval in seconds between requests for updated SNTP information Seconds 30 99999 Set Current Time Date DD MM YY YY Ent
375. ter the correct information and click Create To return to the Access Profile List page click Back The following parameters can be set for IPv6 Parameter Description IPv6 Class Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 IPv6 Flow Label Ticking this check box will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets IPv6 TCP Ticking this check box will specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic The user can enter a specific TCP Source Port Mask or TCP Destination Port Mask IPv6 UDP Ticking this check box will specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic The user can enter a specific UDP Source Port Mask or UDP Destination Port Mask IPv6 Address IPv6 Source Address Enter an IPv6 address to be used as the source address mask IPv6 Destination Address Enter an IPv6 address that will be used as the destination address mask NOTE At any one time the user can only choose IPv6 class and IPv6 Flow Label together or IPv6 Address by itself Click Apply to implement changes made 198 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Click Create to view the ne
376. ternal loopback test on selected ports or set to recover external loopback mode When internal loopback is enabled the device starts to send test packets to the port and keeps monitoring the packets received When internal loopback is disabled the loopback test is terminated and the result is displayed A port can only operate in one loopback mode at a time When external loopback is enabled the MAC PHY is set to external loopback mode When external loopback is disabled the MAC PHY resumes normal operation To view this window click Configuration gt Local Loopback Ports Settings as shown below Fram Fort To Fort Loopback Mode State Local Loopback Ports Settings Table Loopback Mode Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Mone Figure 2 39 Local Loopback Ports Settings window The following parameters may be configured Parameter Description From Port To Port Select a port or group of ports to Enable or Disable the Local Loopback Ports Settings using 34 Loopback Mode This function allows the user to select MAC Internal MAC External or PHY Internal PHY External MAC and PHY represent the layer on which the loopback is performed while the Internal or External represents the local loopback mode Select Enable to start internal loopback test for external loopback set port s to external loopback mode Select Disable to stop internal loopback test for external loopback recover port s from external
377. the Switch s history log is made The table displays the last entry highest sequence number first Displays the time in days hours minutes and seconds since the Switch was last restarted Log Text Displays text describing the event that triggered the history log entry Log Type Choose the type of log to view There are two choices Regular Log Choose this option to view regular switch log entries such as logins or firmware transfers Attack Log Choose this option to view attack log files such as spoofing attacks 204 Save Services and Tools Save Configuration ID 1 Save Configuration ID 2 Save Log Save All Configuration File Backup 8 Restore Upload Log File Reset Download Firmware Reboot System The four Save windows include Save Configuration 1 Save Configuration 2 Save Log and Save All Each version of the window will aid the user in saving configurations to the Switch s memory The options include e Save Configuration_ID 1 to save the configuration file indexed as Image file 1 To use this file for configuration it must be designated as the Boot configuration e Save Configuration_ID_ 2 to save the configuration file indexed as Image file 2 To use this file for configuration it must be designated as the Boot configuration e Save Log to save only the current log e Save All to save the current configuration file indexed as Image file 1 and save the current log Save Configuration ID 1 Ope
378. the server is capable of option 82 it can implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to the server by the relay agent The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option 82 data Finally the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request Disabled lf the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not insert and remove 23 DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients and the check and policy settings will have no effect DHCP Relay Agent This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is Information Option 82 used to enable or disable the Switches ability to check the validity of the packet s option 82 Check field Enabled When the field is toggled to Enable the relay agent will check the validity of the packet s option 82 field If the switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client the switch drops the packet because it is invalid In packets received from DHCP servers the relay agent will drop invalid messages Disabled When the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent w
379. ther MAC Address or String The MAC Address will specify the hardware address of the client and the String will specify the client ID Choose a method and enter the appropriate information into the box provided Relay Rule Use the pull down menu to choose either Relay or Drop When drop is specified the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further process When relay is selected the packet will be relayed based on the relay rules Choose a method and enter the appropriate information into the box provided Click Add to create a new entry To remove an entry enter the appropriate Client ID information and click Delete To delete all entries click Delete All Out of Band Management Settings This window is used to configure the RJ 45 Out of band OOB management port on the Switch The OOB port is physically isolated from the data channels of the Switch This port allows administrators manage the device remotely without the impact data channel congestion The OOB management is a method to manage devices while sharing the network bandwidth with other management traffic The OOB port allows Management packets and ARP requests to pass while other packets will be dropped To view this window click Configuration gt Out of Band Management Settings as shown below IP Address a a or i Subnet Mask Gateway Status Enabled Ww Link Status LinkDown Apply Figure 2 27 Out of Band Management Settings window T
380. this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 5 Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IPv4 address IPv6 or packet content mask This will change the menu Sse to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame s header Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header 802 1Q VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding IPv4 DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address 208 Destination IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header You must then specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will app
381. ticast group and ports either that are forbidden from joining dynamically or that can join the multicast group dynamically using GMRP The options are None No restrictions on the port dynamically joining the multicast group When None is chosen the port will not be a member of the Static Multicast Group Egress The port is a static member of the multicast group Click Apply to implement the changes made To delete an entry in the Static Multicast Forwarding Table click the corresponding Delete button All the entries will be shown on the lower half of the Multicast Forwarding Table window Multicast Filtering Mode This table is used to configure the Multicast Filtering settings on the switch It allows users to configure the switch to forward or filter the Unregistered Groups per VLAN To view this window click L2 Features gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Filtering Mode as shown below WIL Adsl FITO ajjaja VLAN Name YID List Multicast Filter Mode ID List Total Entries 2 VLAN Mame Multicast Filter Mode default Forward Unregistered Groups YLANG Forward Unregistered Groups lt lt Back Next gt gt Figure 3 65 Multicast Filtering Mode window LLDP The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN The major capabilities provided by this system is that it incorporates the station the ma
382. to whether there is a single computer directly connected to a switch or an entire department On port based VLANs NICs do not need to be able to identify 802 1Q tags in packet headers NICs send and receive normal Ethernet packets If the packet s destination lies on the same segment communications take place using normal Ethernet protocols Even though this is always the case when the destination for a packet lies on another switch port VLAN considerations come into play to decide if the packet gets dropped by the Switch or delivered VLAN Segmentation Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port 1 that is a member of VLAN 2 If the destination lies on another port found through a normal forwarding table lookup the Switch then looks to see if the other port Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 and can therefore receive VLAN 2 packets If Port 10 is not a member of VLAN 2 then the packet will be dropped by the Switch and will not reach its destination If Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 the packet will go through This selective forwarding feature based on VLAN criteria is how VLANs segment networks The key point being that Port 1 will only transmit on VLAN 2 Network resources can be shared across VLANs This is achieved by setting up overlapping VLANs That is ports can belong to more than one VLAN group For example by setting VLAN 1 members to ports 1 2 3 and 4 and VLAN 2 members to ports 1 5 6 and 7 Port 1 will be
383. to display a line graph rather than a table Memory Utilization This window is used to display the utilization of the CPU and memory on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt Memory Utilization as shown below DRAM Utilization Total DRAM 131072 KB Used DRAM 123879 KB Utilization 94 FLASH Utilization Total FLASH 32768 KB Used FLASH 8688 KB Utilization 26 Figure 7 7 Packet Size Table window Click Refresh to reload the display Packets The Web Manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Three windows are offered in the Packets folder to view and configure these settings Received RX This table displays the RX packets on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packets gt Received RX as shown below 224 i 4N INM MC AINN 10M Onrinn apr Mirannah Ctharnnt Quiritah llany Rianiinm AN M l SKariac NYO Y l EINarna QUITS H ica nial DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manuail L PA tT Bytes Packets UnitiPacketsisec or Bytes sec Time Interval Record Mumber Show Hide Iv Bytes lv Packets Figure 7 8 Received RX window for Bytes and Packets To
384. to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte Offset 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 37 Offset 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 Offset 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 Offset 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Time Range Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name configured in the Time Range Settings window This will set specific times when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Rule List window to view the following window Profile ID 4 Access ID 1 Profile Type Packet Content Action Permit Ports 5 Offset 0 15 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 Show All Rules Figure 6 48 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for Packet Content ACL Finder This window is used to help find a previously configured ACL entry To search for an entry enter the profile ID from the drop down menu select a port that you wish to view define the state and click Find the table on the lower half of the screen will display the entries To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button To view this window click ACL gt ACL Finder as
385. to the Switch Click Backup to backup the configuration file to a TFTP server To view this window click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Configuration File Backup Restore as shown below 5 Safes Server P Address Path 4 Filename Total Entries 0 Select All MAC Address Model Mame Firmware Version Figure 2 75 Configuration File Backup Restore window 60 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Upload Log File The following window is used to upload log files from SIM member switches to a specified PC To upload a log file enter the Server IP address of the SIM member switch and then enter a Path Filename on your PC where you wish to save this file Click Upload to initiate the file transfer To view this window click Configuration gt Single IP Management gt Upload Log File as shown below Ubl0ad Log Flle CUE Server P Address Path Filename Upload Total Entries 0 MAC Address Model Mame Firmware Version Figure 2 76 Upload Log File window DDM This folder contains windows that perform Digital Diagnostic Monitoring functions on the Switch There are windows that allow the user to view the digital diagnostic monitoring status of SFP modules inserting to the Switch and to configure alarm settings warning settings temperature threshold settings voltage threshold settings bias current threshold settings Tx power threshold settings and Rx
386. tocol SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 The administrator can specify the SNMP version used to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device SNMP settings are configured using the menus located on the SNMP V3 folder of the web manager Workstations on the network that are allowed SNMP privileged access to the Switch can be restricted with the Management Station IP Address window 40 SNMP Global State Settings The SNMP Global State Settings is used to globally enable or disable the SNMP Settings on the switch To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP Global State Settings as shown below SNMP Global State Disabled O Enabled Figure 2 45 SNMP Global State Settings window SNMP View Table This window is used to assign views to community strings that define which MIB objects can be accessed by a remote SNMP manager To view this window click Configuration gt SNMP Settings gt SNMP View Table as shown below JMF Vie View Name View Type Included Total Entries 8 View Mame Subtree restricted 13561 2411 Included restricted AA Included Delete restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 2 1 Included Delete restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 11 2 1 Included Delete restricted 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 Included Delete Cornmunityview 1 Included Delete Communityview 1 3 6 1 6 3 Excluded Delete Cormmunityview 1 3 6 1
387. tocol length address address ARP 20 5C 01 11 10 10 10 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 10 2 Pf of of os a eee E Table 1 ARP Payload The ARP request will be encapsulated into Ethernet frame and sent out As can be seen in Table 2 the Source Address in the Ethernet frame will be PC A s MAC address Since an ARP request is sent via a broadcast the Destination address is in the format of an Ethernet broadcast FF FF FF FF FF FF II FOSO IES IE E i l O O Table 2 Ethernet frame format When the switch receives the frame it will check the Source Address in the Ethernet frame s header If the address is not in its Forwarding Table the switch will learn PC A s MAC and the associated port into its Forwarding Table Forwarding Table Port1 00 20 5C 01 11 11 In addition when the switch receives the broadcast ARP request it will flood the frame to all ports except the source port port 1 see Figure 2 e Who is 10 10 10 2 00 20 56 01 33 33 y 00 20 56 01 11 11 10 10 10 3 gt j 10 10 10 1 00 20 50 01 44 44 00 20 50 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Figure 2 When the switch floods the frame of ARP requests to the network all PCs will receive and examine the frame but only PC B will reply to the query as the destination IP address of PC B matches see Figure 3 Who is 10 10 10 22 A lin i Sender 00 20 50 01 33 33 Port 3 Port 1 00 205 01 11 11 z E A
388. ual VICO Snooping Group 2 VLAN Name VLAN List e g 1 4 6 Group IP Address View All Clear All Data Driven MLD Snooping Group Table Total Entries 0 VID VLAN Name Source Member Port Router Port Group Type UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Figure 7 35 MLD Snooping Group window Enter a VLAN Name or VLAN List and Group IP Address in the appropriate field and click the Find button MLD Snooping Forwarding Table This window is used to display the current MLD snooping forwarding information on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Forwarding Table as shown below wwname C Owwpes m VLAN Name source F Multicast Group Fort Member Figure 7 36 MLD Snooping Forwarding Table window Enter the appropriate information and click Find 246 Browse MLD Snooping Counter This window is used to display the current MLD snooping counter information on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt MLD Snooping gt Browse MLD Snooping Counter as shown below Browse MLD Snooping VLAN Name VLAN List e g 1 4 6 O Port List e g 1 4 6 VLAN Name Figure 7 37 Browse MLD Snooping Counter window Browse Session Table This window displays the management sessions since the Switch was last rebooted To view this window click Monitoring gt Browse Session Table as shown below STrowse a i Ali Live Time From Name Figure 7 38 Browse Sessi
389. ubnet mask of 255 0 0 0 and a default gateway of 0 0 0 0 To use the BOOTP or DHCP protocols to assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask and default gateway address Select BOOTP or DHCP this will determine how the Switch will be assigned an IP address The lower part of the page is to display the Out of band management information that has been configured in Configuration gt Out of Band Management Settings window The IP Address Settings options are Parameter Description Allows the entry of an IP address Subnet Mask and a Default Gateway for the Switch These fields should be of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a number represented in decimal form between 0 and 255 This address should be a unique address on the network assigned for use by the network administrator before using the default or previously entered settings DHCP The Switch will send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered up The DHCP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a DHCP server to provide it with this information BOOTP The Switch will send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up The BOOTP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a central BOOTP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a BOOTP server to provide it with this information
390. uration 802 1D and 802 1w Compatibility RSTP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to 802 1D format when necessary However any segment using 802 1D STP will not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid topology change detection of RSTP The protocol also provides for a variable used for migration in the event that legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP The Spanning Tree Protocol STP operates on two levels 1 On the switch level the settings are globally implemented 2 On the port level the settings are implemented on a per user defined group of ports basis 108 STP Bridge Global Settings This window is used to enable and configure the STP bridge global settings on the Swtich To view this window click L2 features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Bridge Global Settings as shown below STP Global Setting STP State Disabled Enabled STF Version Forwarding BPD Bridge Max Age 6 40 Bridge Hello Time 1 2 Bridge Forward Delay 4 30 Tx Hold Count 1 10 Max Hops 1 20 MMI BPOW Address Apply Figure 3 57 STP Bridge Global Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description STP State Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the STP Status STP Version Use the pull down menu to choose the desired version of STP to be implemented on the Switch There are three choices STPCompatability Select this
391. ure 7 33 Browse IGMP Snooping Counter window Enter the VLAN Name VLAN List or Port List of the VLAN you wish to view and click Find MLD Snooping Browse MLD Router Port This window displays which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports in IPv6 A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch and is designated by D whereas a Forbidden port is designated by F Enter a VID VLAN ID in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button To view this window click Monitoring gt MLD Snooping gt Browse MLD Router Port as shown below 1 default Note S Static Router Port D Dynamic Router Port F Forbidden Router Port Figure 7 34 Browse MLD Router Port window MLD Snooping Group The following window allows the user to view MLD Snooping Groups present on the Switch MLD Snooping is an IPv6 function comparable to IGMP Snooping for IPv4 The user may browse this table by VLAN Name present in the Switch by entering that VLAN Name in the empty field shown below and clicking the Find button The number of MLD reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reports field To view this window click Monitoring gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Group as shown below 245 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Man
392. ut can be configured The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like TACACS XTACACS Local Enable the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no verification is found the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the Local Enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an Admin privilege 177 NOTE To set the Local Enable Password see the next section entitled Local Enable Password To view the following table click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Enable Method Lists as shown below Method List Name Max 15 characters po Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Po M Priority 4 Total Entries 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 default Delete Figure 5 41 Enable Method List window To delete an Enable Method List defined by the user click the correspoinding Delete button To modify an Enable Method List click its corresponding Edit button To define an Enable Login Method List set the following parameters an
393. uthenticated by the Switch or a VLAN RADIUS server This VLAN should be pre configured to have limited access rights to web based authenticated users Redirection Page Enter the URL of the website that authenticated users placed in the VLAN are directed to once authenticated This path must be entered into this field before the Web based Access Control can be enabled Port List Specify the ports to be enabled as Web based Access Control ports Only these ports will accept authentication parameters from the user wishing limited access rights through the Switch When one client on a port has been authenticated for Web based Access Control all clients on this port are authenticated as well Use the State pull down menu to enable these configured ports as Web based Access Control ports Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE To enable the Web based Access Control function the redirection path field must have the URL of the website that users will be directed to once they enter the limited resource pre configured VLAN Users who attempt to Apply settings without the Redirection Page field set will be prompted with an error message and Web based Access Control will not be enabled The URL should follow the form http s www dlink com NOTE The subnet of the IP address of the authentication VLAN must be the same as that of the client or the client will always be denied authentication NOTE A successful authentication should direct
394. utton ly NOTE The Switch supports up to 255 static ARP entries m User Accounts Use the User Account Management window to control user privileges create new users and view existing User Accounts To view this window click Configuration gt User Accounts as shown below Add User Accounts Access Right Confirm Password Note PasswordLlser Name should be less than 15 characters Total Entries 0 Access Right Old Password Mew Fassword confirm Password Encryption Figure 2 15 User Accounts window The following fields can be set Parameter Description UserName The name of the user an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters Access Right There are three levels of user privileges Admin Operator and User Some menu selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User or Operator 17 configure Only Admin level users have access to these features level privileges There are 3 levels of security offered on the Switch the Operator level privilege will allow users to configure and view configurations on the Switch except for those involving security features which are still left to the Admin level privilege Operator level users can be authenticated through either the local authentication method of the Switch or through the Access Authentication Control feature discussed later in this document Once the user has logged in to the Switch in the Operator l
395. view the Received RX Table window click View Table a View Graphic Apply Totallsec Packets Total sec Unicast Multicast Broadcast Tx Packets Packets Figure 7 9 Received RX Table window for Bytes and Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Pot Use the drop down menu to choose the port that will display statistics Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 225 UMB_cast RX This table displays the UMB_cast RX Packets on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packets gt UMB_cast RX as shown below 1000 900 Unicast 800 Multicast rog Broadcast BOO 500 400 300 00 100 UnitiPacketsiseci Time Interval 1s w Record Number Show Hide lv Unicast W Multicast W Broadcast Figure 7 10 UMB_cast RX window for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets To view the UMB_cast RX Table window click the View Table link 226 DGS 3700 12 DGS 3700 12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual View Graphic Apply C
396. w MAC Address Enter the MAC address to bind to the IP Address set above Specify the switch ports for which to configure this IP MAC binding entry IP Address MAC Address Click the All Ports check box to configure this entry for all ports on the Switch mode can only be used if the ACL Mode has been enabled in the IMP Global Settings window as seen previously The user may set the IP MAC Binding Mode here by using the pull down menu The choices are ARP Choosing this selection will set a normal IP Mac Binding entry for the IP address and MAC address entered If the system is in ARP mode the arp mode entries and acl mode entries will be effective If the system is in the acl mode only the acl mode entries will be active ACL Choosing this entry will allow only packets from the source IP MAC binding entry created here All other packets with a different IP address will be discarded by the Switch This Click Apply for implement changes click Find to search for an entry click Show All for the table to display all entries and click Delete All to remove an entry 150 DHCP Snooping Entries This table is used to view dynamic entries on specific ports To view particular port settings enter the port number and click Find To view all entries click View All and to delete an entry click Clear To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt DHCP Snooping Entries as shown below y View All T
397. w Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List table shown below To add another Access Profile click Add ACL Profile To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button to view the specific configurations for an entry click the Show Details button To add a rule to the Access Profile entry click the Add View Rules button Add ACL Profile Total Used Rule Entries Total Unused Rule Entries 2 1534 Profile ID Profile Name Profile Type OwnerType PP 23 oe P _ aca showbetals Jadd viewRules __ Delete Figure 6 17 Access Profile List IPv6 To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will display the following window CL Profile Details Profile Name Profile Type Owner Type IPv6 Class IPv6 Flow Label Show All Profiles Figure 6 18 Access Profile Details IPv6 To return to the CPU Access Profile List click Show All Profiles to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the corresponding Add View Rules which will reveal the following window 199 Profile Information Profile ID Profile Type IPvb Class TCP Source Port Rule Detail Profile Harme Owner Type IPyb Flow Label TCP Destination Fort Keep an input field as blank to treat the corresponding option as do notcare Access ID 1 128 Class Flow Label TOP Source Port 0 65535 TCP Destination Port 0 65535 Rule Action Action
398. will create both an access profile entry and an access rule per port entry it will also create other access rules These rules are used to block all DHCP server packets In addition to a permit DHCP entry it will also create one access profile and one access rule entry the first time the DHCP client MAC address is used as the client MAC address The Source IP address is the same as the DHCP server s IP address UDP source port number 67 These rules are used to permit the DHCP server packets with specific fields which the user has configured To view this window click Security gt DHCP Server Screening gt DHCP Offer Filtering as shown below Serer IF Address Clients MAC Address Ports 7 7 ANO Total Entries 0 Server IF Address Clients MAC Address Figure 5 13 DHCP Offer Filtering window The user may set the following parameters Parameter Description Server IP Address The IP address of the DHCP server 154 Client s MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client Only multiple legal DHCP servers on the network need to be entered in this field If there is only one legal DHCP server on the network no input to this field is allowed Choose the range of ports that you want to use as the DHCP server or check the All Ports box if you wish to use all the ports on the switch Click Apply to implement changes 802 1 X 802 1X Port Based and Host Based Access Control The IEEE 802 1X standard is a security m
399. will clear the FDB of that port 2 Ifa portis granted clearance for a MAC address in a VLAN that is not a Guest VLAN other MAC addresses on that port must be authenticated for access and otherwise will be blocked by the switch 3 A port accepts a maximum of sixteen authenticated MAC addresses per physical port of a VLAN that is not a Guest VLAN Other MAC addresses attempting authentication on a port with the maximum number of authenticated MAC addresses will be blocked 4 Ports that have been enabled for Link Aggregation stacking 802 1X authentication 802 1X Guest VLAN Port Security GVRP or Web based authentication cannot be enabled for the MAC based Authentication MAC based Access Control Settings The following window is used to set the parameters for the MAC based Access Control function on the Switch Here the user can set the running state method of authentication RADIUS password and view the Guest VLAN configuration to be associated with the MAC based Access Control function of the Switch MAC based Access Control Global Settings To view this window click Security gt MAC based Access Control gt MAC based Access Control Settings as shown below 180 we MBA Global State Disabled Enabled Method Password default Guest YLAN Name O Guest VLAN ID 1 4094 os Guest VLAN Member Parts fg 21 59 apply Port Settings From Port To Port State Mode Aging Time 1 1440 Hold Time 1 300 o Port state Mode
400. yellow or green packets depending on the drop mode 0 100 Drop Rate Low There are eight drop rates as shown below the user may determine the drop rate for the Drop Rate High expected packet Configure Value Drop rate for expected packet 100 6 25 3 125 1 5625 0 78125 0 390625 0 1953125 0 09765625 Click Apply to implement changes 141 SRED Drop Counter This window is used to view the SRED Drop Counter settings on the Switch To view this window click QoS gt SRED gt SRED Drop Counter as shown below JJ OTOC aj SRED Drop Counter Table O lll OSS O 2 O ll O fl O fl ro Figure 4 11 SRED Drop Counter window DSCP Trust Settings This window is used to enable DSCP Trust Settings on the Switch To view this window click QoS gt SRED gt DSCP Trust Settings as shown below State DSP Trust Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 12 DSCP Trust Settings window Select the port or port range you wish to Enable or Disable and click Apply DSCP Map Settings This window is used to enable DSCP Map Settings To view this window click QoS gt SRED gt DSCP Map Settings as shown below 142 From Port DSCP Map DSCP List O 63 Priority Figure 4 13 DSCP Map Settings window The following parameters may be set Parameter Description From port To port A consecutive group of ports may be co

D-Link DGS-3700 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents